TENDER #16-12 PROCESS MECHANICAL AND BUILDING MECHANICAL UPGRADE OF REDWOOD ESTATES WATER TREATMENT PLANT (WTP) PROJECT NO.

Transcription

1 TENDER #16-12 PROCESS MECHANICAL AND BUILDING MECHANICAL UPGRADE OF REDWOOD ESTATES WATER TREATMENT PLANT (WTP) PROJECT NO September, 2016

2

3 THE CORPORATION OF THE TOWNSHIP OF SOUTH GLENGARRY TENDER #16-12 WSP PROJECT NO Tenders from Contractors, in sealed tender envelopes, which shall be clearly marked as to contents, will be received by the TOWNSHIP OF SOUTH GLENGARRY, until 11:00 AM, local time, as recorded by the Township, on For the construction of the works described below. Monday October 4, 2016 On the same day, commencing at 11:15 AM local time, the tenders will be opened at the Township of South Glengarry and read publicly by the Tender Committee at the address mentioned below. The following is a general but not necessarily a complete description of the works to be constructed under this contract: Supplying of materials, labour and equipment for the process mechanical and building mechanical upgrade of Redwood Estates (near Bainsville) Water Treatment Plant (WTP). Hard copy tender documents may be obtained commencing 13 th September, 2016 from the Cornwall Office of WSP Canada Inc. at the address below, on payment of a non-refundable certified cheque in the amount of $ (including HST) per contract set, payable to WSP Canada Inc. or soft copy tender documents (PDF format on USB stick or ) may be obtained at the Township of South Glengarry, 6 Oak Street, Lancaster, Ontario K0C 1N0. Each tender must be accompanied by a tender deposit in the form of a certified cheque or bid bond for minimum of 10% of the tendered amount made payable to the Town of South Glengarry. Tender documents may be studied at, without payment but may not be removed from, the Consultant s office (address below). Tenders are subject to a formal contract being prepared and executed. The Township of South Glengarry, at its own discretion, reserves the right to accept or reject any compliant or non-compliant tenders and advises that the lowest or any tender will not necessarily be accepted CONSULTANT OWNER WSP Canada Inc. Township of South Glengarry Richard Waterton Shawn Killoran, Director of Water/ 1345 Rosemount Ave. Wastewater Operations Cornwall, ON, K6J 3E5 6 Oak Street, P.O. Box 220 Phone: x288 Lancaster, Ontario richard.waterton@wspgroup.com K0C 1N0 Phone: shawn@southglengarry.com Note: There will be a mandatory site review/job showing on Tuesday September 20, 2016 at 10:30 AM at Redwood Estates WTP, 6214 Shannon Lane (just off the south service road), Bainsville. The site tour is mandatory for all General Contractors only. Sub-Contractors are welcome to attend the site tour, but it is not mandatory that they attend.

4

5 Redwood Estates WTP Upgrades Project No Table of Contents Section A Section B Section C Section D Section E Appendix 1 INFORMATION FOR TENDERERS FORM OF TENDER CONTRACT AGREEMENT GENERAL CONDITIONS SPECIAL PROVISIONS AND STANDARDS Preselected Equipment LIST OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS Process P1.1 WTP Building Equipment & Piping Arrangement Removals P1.2 WTP Building Equipment & Piping Arrangement Upgrades Mechanical & Electrical ME1.1 ME1.2 ME1.3 WTP Mechanical and Electrical Removals and Upgrades Layout WTP Mechanical and Electrical Systems Sections Mechanical Schedules and Details

6

7 Redwood Estates WTP Upgrades Project No Section A Information for Tenderers

8

9 Redwood Estates WTP Upgrades Project No Information For Tenderers A: INFORMATION FOR TENDERERS TABLE OF CONTENTS Clause Page IT 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORKS 1 2. FIELD OFFICE NOT APPLICABLE (NA) 1 3. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 1 4. DELIVERY AND OPENING OF TENDERS 2 5. DISQUALIFICATION OF TENDERS 2 6. WITHDRAWAL OR QUALIFYING OF TENDERS 2 7. INFORMAL OR UNBALANCED TENDERS 3 8. EXAMINATION OF SITE 3 9. TENDER OMISSIONS, DISCREPANCIES AND INTERPRETATIONS UNUSED (NOT APPLICABLE) ACCEPTANCE OR REJECTION OF TENDERS PERIOD OF VALIDITY OF TENDER TENDER DEPOSIT AGREEMENT PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS PROOF OF ABILITY SUBCONTRACTORS WORKPLACE SAFETY AND INSURANCE BOARD (WSIB) 9 i

10 Redwood Estates WTP Upgrades Project No Information For Tenderers 20. OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY CANADIAN LABOUR AND MATERIALS COST OF POWER AND FACILITIES AT THE SITE REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR HARMONIZED SALES TAX UNUSED (NOT APPLICABLE) NON-RESIDENT CONTRACTOR INSURANCE UNUSED (NOT APPLICABLE) ACCESS TO EXISTING OPERATING FACILITIES DURING CONSTRUCTION LUMP SUM FOR MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION LUMP SUM FOR OTHER REQUIREMENTS BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL TENDER PRICE DEFECTIVE WORK CERTIFICATE AND INSTRUCTION FOR EQUIPMENT CONDITION SURVEY ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED. 37. SITE REVIEW/JOB SHOWING PAYMENT TO SUPPLIERS OF PRESELECTED EQUIPMENT (NOT APPLICABLE) 15 ii

11 1. Description of Works INFORMATION FOR TENDERERS The following is a general but not necessarily complete description of the works to be constructed under this contract:.1 Replace green sand filter control system including control valves..2 Replace green sand filter media and dispose of existing media..3 Replace high lift motors and add VFD control..4 Replace all bolting with stainless steel bolting..5 Removal of pressure tank..6 Venting of clear well..7 Improvements to address humidity, including:.1 Insulate aboveground piping, valves, pumps, pressure tanks and filter..2 Sealing of building checking doors and windows; louvers; caulking and prime walls with vapour retarding primer..3 Addition of a dehumidifier..4 Addition of a ductless split system. 2. Field Office Not Applicable (NA) A field office as specified as specified in Section Temporary Facilities in the Standard Specifications and as per Section 32 of the General Conditions shall be provided by the Contractor. The General Contractor will supply three (3) new approved white hard hats to the site inspector for the specific use of visitors to the site. A heating/cooling system is to be provided such that a room temperature of 20 C can be maintained at all times. 3. Liquidated Damages In accordance with the General Conditions, should the Contractor fail to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Engineer and in accordance with the Contract within the Time for Completion specified in the Contract or the extended time allowed in writing by the Engineer, the Contractor shall pay to the Owner as Liquidated Damages the sum of any direct costs as may be established by the Owner plus $1000 per calendar day for each day that the work (including all restoration) is not completed within the schedule as defined herein. IT - 1

12 4. Delivery and Opening of Tenders Tenders, sealed in an envelope which shall be clearly marked with the project or contract title (including the name of the Owner or area) and the contract number, if any, will be received by the Owner at the location stated in the tender advertisement for receipt of tenders on the advertised closing date and time for receipt of tenders. Before being deposited by the tenderer, the tender envelope will be marked by the Owner with the time and date the envelope is received. The use of the mails or courier for delivery of a tender will be at the sole risk of the tenderer and no consideration will be given to tenders deposited after the advertised deadline. Delivery to any employee of the Owner concerned with the reception or delivery of mail will not be considered as proper delivery unless the envelope is subsequently deposited in the appropriate location before the said closing time. On the closing day, after the stipulated time, the envelopes will be opened and the tenders will be read and recorded publicly by a representative from the Owner and the Consulting Engineer in the location stated in the tender advertisement. Tenders will then be checked and analyzed and a report making recommendation to the Owner will be completed. The City may, in its sole and absolute discretion, extend the Time of Closing by issuing an Addendum. No telephone will be made available for use by the Bidders at the place of delivery of the Bids. 5. Disqualification of Tenders Under no circumstances will tenders be considered which are: (a) (b) received after 11:00 a.m. local time on the advertised closing date for tenders; or not accompanied by a tender deposit as stipulated in the Contract Documents. 6. Withdrawal or Qualifying of Tenders A tenderer who has already submitted a tender may submit a further tender at any time up to the official closing time of the first submission. The last tender received shall supersede and invalidate all tenders previously submitted by that tenderer for this contract. A tenderer may withdraw or qualify his tender at any time up to the official closing time of the first submission by submitting a letter bearing his signature and seal as in his tender to be delivered to the Owner. Such a submission at the location stated in the tender advertisement for the receipt of tenders must be received in sufficient time to be marked with the time and date of receipt and to be placed in the tender box prior to 11:00:00 a.m. on the date for closing of tenders. The tenderer shall show his name, the name of the project IT - 2

13 and the contract number(s) on the envelope containing such letter. No telegrams, fax transmissions or telephone calls will be considered. 7. Informal or Unbalanced Tenders Entries or changes made in pencil shall, unless otherwise decided by the Owner, be invalid or informal. Tenders which are incomplete, conditional, illegible or obscure, or that contain additions not called for, reservations, erasures, alterations (unless properly and clearly made and initialed by the tenderer s signing officer) or irregularities of any kind, may be rejected as informal. Tenders that contain prices which appear to be so unbalanced as likely to affect adversely the interests of the Owner may be rejected at the sole discretion of the Owner. Wherever in a tender the amount tendered for an item does not agree with the extension of the estimated quantity and the tendered unit price, the unit price shall govern and the amount and the Total Tendered Amount shall be corrected accordingly, unless otherwise decided by the Owner. A discrepancy in addition or subtraction in a tender shall be corrected by the Owner by adding or subtracting the items correctly and correcting the Total Tendered Amount accordingly, unless otherwise decided by the Owner. Where an error has been made in transferring an amount from one part of the Form of Tender to another, the amount shown before transfer shall, subject to any corrections as provided for above, be taken to be correct and the amount shown after transfer and the Total Tendered Amount shall be correctly accordingly. If a tenderer has omitted to enter a price for an item of work set out in the Form of Tender, he shall, unless he has specifically stated otherwise in his tender, be deemed to have allowed elsewhere in the Form of Tender for the cost of carrying out the said item of work and, unless otherwise agreed to by the Owner, no increase shall be made in the Total Tendered Amount on account of such omission. The Owner reserves the right to waive informalities at its discretion. 8. Examination of Site Each tenderer should visit the site of the work before submitting his tender and shall satisfy himself by personal examination as to the total conditions to be met with during the construction and conduct of the work. He shall make his own estimate of the facilities and difficulties to be encountered including the nature of the subsurface materials and IT - 3

14 conditions. He is not to claim at any time after submission of his tender that there was any misunderstanding of the terms and conditions of the Contract relating to site conditions. The Owner has made no arrangements with private owners for site investigations to be carried out by prospective tenderers. If any person proposes to carry out any investigation on any property relative to the proposed works, he shall, before entering the said property, and any other property for the purpose of obtaining access to the said property, and before commencing the said investigation, contact each owner and occupant of the said properties and advise them of the nature and extent of the proposed investigation and obtain an agreement in writing thereto of all such owners and occupants. The person (or firm) who was responsible for carrying out such an investigation or for making use of any access as aforesaid shall reinstate promptly all property which has been disturbed by such investigation or by use of such access and shall be responsible for all damage and claims resulting therefrom in accordance with the said agreement of such owners and occupants. With respect to any matter referred to in the foregoing paragraph, no person referred to therein is authorized to act as agent of or to make any representation on behalf of the Owner and the Owner shall not be responsible for any disturbance to or reinstatement of any property or for any damage or claims referred to therein. 9. Tender Each tender shall be in accordance with the General Conditions and shall include a completed Form of Tender, Agreement to Bond, and all as bound herein and a tender deposit as required herein, together with any further forms or sheets which the tenderer is instructed elsewhere herein, or in any addendum hereto, to submit with his tender. The tenderer may retain the rest of the tender documents issued to him. The tenderer shall submit the total tendered amount, install a lining to the interior of the standpipe and a paint system to the exterior of the standpipe. The exterior paint system will be a provisional item. The tenderer shall give the Total Tendered Amount both in words and in figures and, except as is otherwise specifically permitted in the Form of Tender, shall fill in all blank spaces for unit prices, item prices, lump sums, and other information in the Form of Tender. The tender must be enclosed in the tender envelope and the tenderer s name and address shall appear on the outside of the envelopes. 10. Omissions, Discrepancies and Interpretations Should a tenderer find omissions from or discrepancies in any of the tender documents or should he be in doubt as to the meaning of any part of such documents, he should notify the Consulting Engineer, in writing and not later than forty eight (48) hours before the closing IT - 4

15 date for tenders. If the Consulting Engineer considers that a correction, explanation or interpretation is necessary or desirable, he will issue an addendum to all who have taken out tender documents. No oral explanation or interpretation shall modify any of the requirements or provisions of the tender documents. 11. Unused (Not Applicable) 12. Acceptance or Rejection of Tenders Subject to the General Conditions, except as provided hereunder, neither the Consulting Engineer nor any officer or employee of the Owner has authority to make or accept an offer or to enter into a contract on behalf of the Owner or to create any rights against or to impose any obligations on the Owner. The recommendation of a tender to the Owner for acceptance does not constitute acceptance of the tender by the Owner. A tender is accepted by the Owner when an agreement in the form bound herein is executed by the Owner and by the tenderer or when the Engineer, with the written authorization of the Owner and within the period referred to herein, has issued a written order to commence work to the tenderer and the Owner or anyone acting on its behalf has requested the tenderer to execute the Agreement and to return it to the Owner (and the acceptance of the tender and the execution of the Agreement by the Owner are subject to the express condition that the Owner receive a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond in accordance with the requirements hereof, within seven (7) days after notification of the execution of the agreement by the Owner has been mailed to the tenderer whose tender has been accepted as aforesaid. The Owner shall not be responsible for any liabilities, costs, expenses, loss or damage incurred, sustained or suffered by any tenderer prior or subsequent to or by reason of the acceptance or the non-acceptance by the Owner of any tender or by reason of any delay in the acceptance of a tender save as provided in the Contract. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all tenders and to waive formalities as the interests of the Owner may require without stating reasons therefor and the lowest or any tender will not necessarily be accepted. If an insufficient number of tenders are received, tenders may be returned unopened. 13. Period of Validity of Tender The tenderer s attention is drawn to the Form of Tender, Standard Tender Requirements, for the tender validity period. IT - 5

16 The prices entered by the tenderer in the Form of Tender shall be based on the assumption that the Engineer s written order to commence work will be issued to the tenderer within a sixty (60) calendar day period, after the opening date for tenders. 14. Tender Deposit Each tender shall include a tender deposit in the form and in the amount stated in the Form of Tender. The tender deposits of the two (2) lowest tenderers will be retained until a tender has been accepted and the Performance Bond, the Labour and Material Payment Bond and the other documents required herein have been furnished to the satisfaction of the Owner, save that if a tenderer has not been requested by the Owner to execute the Agreement within 60 days after the date of opening tenders or if the Engineer has not issued to the tenderer a written order to commence work within the said 60 days, his tender deposit will be returned, except as otherwise provided herein. After the execution of the Contract and the receipt by the Owner of the Performance Bond and the Labour and Material Payment Bond the tender deposit of the successful tenderer will be returned. The Owner may, at its discretion: (a) (b) (c) Cash a tender deposit cheque and deposit the proceeds to its account, without prejudice to the ultimate disposition of such tender deposit as provided for herein; or Return a tender deposit to a tenderer at an earlier time than provided for herein; or Return a tender deposit to a tenderer on receipt from the said tenderer of an alternative security acceptable to the Owner in lieu of the said tender deposit; and no such action shall prejudice the validity of the tender to which such tender deposit relates. Except as otherwise herein provided the tenderer guarantees that if his tender is withdrawn before the Owner shall have considered the tenders or before or after he has been notified that his tender has been recommended to the Owner for acceptance or that if the Owner does not for any reason receive within the period of seven (7) days as stipulated and as required herein, the Agreement executed by the tenderer, the Performance Bond and the Labour and Material Payment Bond executed by the tenderer and the surety company and other documents required herein, the Owner may retain the tender deposit for the use of the Owner and may accept any tender, advertise for new tenders, negotiate a contract or not accept any tender as the Owner may deem advisable. IT - 6

17 15. Agreement The tenderer agrees that, if requested so to do by the Owner or anyone acting on its behalf within sixty (60) calendar days after the date of opening tenders he will execute in triplicate and return to the Owner the Agreement in the form bound herein within seven (7) days after being so requested. If the tenderer has not been so requested within the said period or if the Engineer s written order to commence work has not been mailed or delivered to the tenderer or his office or his postal address within the said period, the tenderer may, unless he has otherwise agreed or offered and except as otherwise provided herein, withdraw his tender. 16. Performance and Payment Bonds The Contractor, together with a surety company approved by the Owner and authorized by law to carry on business in the Province of Ontario, shall, unless otherwise directed, furnish to the Owner a Performance Bond in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the Total Tendered Amount and Labour and Material Payment Bond in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the Total Tendered Amount, in the forms supplied by the bonding company and as acceptable to the Engineer of the Total Tendered Amount attached hereto of the Total Tendered Amount and such additional amount, if any, as may be required by the Owner. The tenderer shall tender for the cost of the bonds in the item provided for that purpose in the Form of Tender on the assumption that each bond will be in the amounts noted above. In the event that either of the bonds is required to be in an amount in excess of the amounts noted above, the Owner will reimburse the Contractor in the amount of the premium for such excess amount after submission by the Contractor to the Owner of the surety company s relevant receipted invoice. The tenderer shall include with his tender the Agreement to Bond in the form enclosed herewith executed under its corporate seal by the surety company from which he proposes to obtain the required bonds. The Owner may in its discretion decide to obtain the bonds from a surety company of its choice and may pay the premium for such bonds directly to the surety company so chosen. In that event, the Owner will notify the selected tenderer accordingly before the tender has been accepted and the Tenderer shall execute and furnish to the Owner the required bonds as provided for herein but the cost of the bonds shall be deleted from the Contract and no payment shall be made to the Contractor therefore. The Tenderer will be required to furnish the Performance Bond and the Labour and Material Payment Bond in triplicate as required herein within seven (7) days after notification of the execution of the Agreement by the Owner is received in writing. One copy of the said bonds shall be bound into each of the three (3) executed sets of the Contract. IT - 7

18 The Tenderer s attention is drawn to Clause 18 and the Form of Tender, Standard Tender Requirements, for bonds which may be required for subcontractors. 17. Proof of Ability In order to aid the Owner in determining the responsibility of each tenderer, the tenderer shall complete the following statement sheets which are bound herein: Statement A Statement B Statement C Stating the tenderer s experience in similar work which he has successfully completed. Giving a list of the tenderer s senior supervisory staff to be employed on the Contract with a summary of the experience of each. Giving the location and description of the construction equipment which the tenderer proposes to use. If the tenderer prefers, he may, in lieu of completing and submitting the above-mentioned statement sheets, submit the information required by the said sheets on similar forms prepared in his own office, provided that the said forms bear the tenderer s name and the date of preparation and contain up-to-date information. 18. Subcontractors The tenderer shall give in Statement D sheet of the tender documents the name of each proposed subcontractor used in making up his tender. Only one subcontractor shall be named for each part of the work to be sublet. If the successful tenderer wishes to substitute a subcontractor other than the one named in Statement D of the Form of Tender for a specific item of work, he shall submit documentation to the Engineer pertaining to the proposed subcontractor s experience and competence to carry out the work. Employment of the proposed subcontractor on the works is subject to the written approval of the Engineer. The term subcontractor as referred to in this Clause 18 shall not include suppliers of preselected equipment unless specifically stated in these documents or directed. Attention is drawn to Section 56 of the General Conditions and to the instructions on Statement D sheet. IT - 8

19 19. Workplace Safety and Insurance Board (WSIB) The Contractor shall at the time of entering into any contract with the Owner, make a statutory declaration or furnish a satisfactory clearance letter from the WSIB stating that all assessments or compensation payable to the WSIB. The selected tenderer shall submit such statutory declaration or clearance letter to the Owner in triplicate together with the Agreement executed by the said tenderer. One copy of the statutory declaration or clearance letter shall be bound into each of the three (3) executed sets of the Contract. 20. Occupational Health and Safety In order to avoid any misunderstanding as to the nature of the work to be performed herein, the Contractor by executing this contract, unequivocally acknowledges that it is the constructor within the meaning of the Occupational Health and Safety Act, and the Contractor undertakes to carry out the duties and responsibilities of a constructor with respect to the work. The contractor shall be responsible to administer the Health and Safety Program to all of their suppliers; subtrades, etc. It is specifically drawn to the attention of the tenderer that the Occupational Health and Safety Act provides in addition to other matters that, A constructor shall ensure, on a project undertaken by the constructor that, (a) (b) (c) the measures and procedures prescribed by this Act and the regulations are carried out on the project; every employer and every worker performing work on the project complies with this Act and the regulations; and, the health and safety of workers on the project is protected. 21. Canadian Labour and Materials Unless otherwise specifically approved in writing by the Engineer or specified in the Contract the Contractor shall employ Canadian labour. He shall utilize materials, parts and equipment of Canadian manufacture in constructing the works wherever possible. IT - 9

20 22. Cost of Power and Facilities at the Site The Contractor shall provide and shall bear the costs of all electricity, fuel (including all heating), water and sanitary facilities required for, or at the site of, the works up to the date of substantial performance as established by the Certificate of Substantial Performance. Such costs incurred after the said date shall be borne by the Owner save that any such costs incurred in completing unfinished work or rectifying deficiencies may, at the discretion of the Engineer, be charged against the Contractor. 23. Review of Shop Drawings The Contractor (or subcontractor or equipment supplier acting on behalf of the Contractor) shall submit to the Engineer in accordance with a procedure to be stipulated by the Engineer all shop, working or setting drawings required in order to make clear the work proposed. The Contractor shall make any changes in such drawings that the Engineer may require. When submitting such drawings, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of all respects in which such drawings differ from the requirements of the Contract or from previously notified requirements of the Engineer. The Engineer s review of such drawings shall not be construed as approval of such differences unless the Contractor has complied with the preceding sentence hereof and unless the Engineer has specifically approved such differences in writing. The engineer s review of such drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the correctness of the drawings or the adequacy of the details shown on the drawings. Work shall not be carried out before the Engineer s review of the shop, working or setting drawings relating to such work has been carried out. 24. Machinery and Equipment Supplied by the Contractor The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all machinery and equipment supplied by him, or by any subcontractor under the Contract complies with the requirements of the Contract and in particular with the requirements of the Specifications for machinery and equipment, and that all suppliers of such machinery and equipment comply with such requirements. Failure on the part of a supplier to comply with such requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for ensuring that the requirements of the Contract are fulfilled. 25. Harmonized Sales Tax The Tenderer is instructed to exclude the Harmonized Sales Tax (HST) from their tendered unit prices. Payment of the Harmonized Sales Tax will be made to the contractor in IT - 10

21 conjunction with amounts certified as due on Monthly Payment Certificates as approved by the Engineer. The amount of tax due will be shown as a separate item. 26. Unused (Not Applicable) 27. Non-Resident Contractor If the Contractor is non-resident in Ontario, he shall, immediately after he has received the Engineer s written order to commence work, obtain from the Retail Sales Tax Branch a certificate showing that the Contractor has registered with the Retail Sales Tax Branch and shall submit such certificate to the Owner at the same time that he furnishes the Performance Bond and the Labour and Material Payment Bond. If the Contractor is non-resident in Ontario, he shall not commence work or order any materials or equipment for the Contract until he has registered with the Retail Sales Tax Branch. The Contractor shall ensure that all subcontractors whom he proposes to use for carrying out any of the work required by the Contract and who are non-resident in Ontario have registered with and have complied with the requirements of the Retail Sales Tax Branch before they commence any such work. 28. Insurance The Contractor shall procure and maintain All Risk and Liability Insurance, Boiler Insurance and Contractor's Equipment Insurance in accordance with the General Conditions and the requirements set out below. The tenderer whose tender has been recommended to the Owner for acceptance shall, on receipt from the Contract Administrator of the Agreement for execution, procure and maintain All Risk and Liability Insurance and shall file with the Contract Administrator, together with the Agreement executed by him, a Cover Note of such All Risk Insurance and a Certificate of Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall file with the Contract Administrator prior to the first progress payment the original policy of such All Risk Insurance or a Certificate of Insurance clearly stating that the policy of All Risk Insurance provided as aforesaid complies with the requirements hereof. Insurance shall be obtained from a company satisfactory to the Contract Administrator. (a) The All Risk Insurance shall: (1) comply with the standard requirements for All Risk Insurance, IT - 11

22 (2) include Flood and Earthquake coverage in respect of the construction or alteration of treatment plants, pumping stations, buildings, storage tanks, reservoirs and other structures and equipment, (3) be maintained until the date of completion of the works has been established by the Certificate of Completion or such time as the Contract Administrator has notified the Contractor in writing that the Owner has arranged its own All Risk Insurance coverage of the permanent works (but, in any event, not later than as provided in Section 46 of the General Conditions). (b) The Liability Insurance shall: (1) have a limit of liability of not less than $5,000,000 inclusive for any one occurrence. (2) be Comprehensive Liability Insurance covering all operations and liability assumed under the Contract with the Owner. (3) not contain any exclusions or limitations in respect of shoring, underpinning, raising or demolition of any building or structure, pile driving, caisson work, collapse of any structure or land from any cause. (4) cover the use of explosives. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all damage, loss or costs resulting directly or indirectly from such use. The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, the Contract Administrator(Consulting Engineer) from and against all claims, demands, loss, damage and costs resulting directly or indirectly from such use. (5) include insurance against liability for bodily injury and property damage caused by vehicles owned by the Contractor and used on the work, and in addition, shall include insurance against liability for bodily injury and property damage caused by vehicles not owned by the Contractor and used on the work. Each such insurance shall have a limit of liability of not less than $5,000,000 inclusive for any on occurrence. A vehicle shall be as defined in the Highway Traffic Act. (6) be endorsed to provide that the policy or policies will not be altered, cancelled or allowed to lapse without sixty (60) days written notice to the Owner. (7) be endorsed to include the Owner, WSP Canada Inc., as additional named insured. IT - 12

23 29. Unused (Not Applicable) 30. Access to Existing Operating Facilities During Construction The Contractor is reminded that it is essential that continuous access be provided to existing operating facilities within the vicinity of the working area during the entire construction period. Therefore, the Contractor will be required to schedule work and construct necessary temporary works as necessary to ensure this requirement is met. All costs anticipated for compliance with this clause shall be included in the Total Tendered Amount. 31. Lump Sum for Mobilization/Demobilization The first item in the Schedule of Items and Prices or, in the case of a lump sum type contract, in the Breakdown Schedule, is to cover the Contractor s cost of immobilization at the beginning of the construction period and demobilization at the close of the construction period. The price entered for this item shall be consistent with the costs involved but shall not, in any event, exceed ten percent (10%) of the Total Tendered Amount. If the Tenderer has entered against this item in his Tender a price in excess of ten percent (10%) of the Total Tendered Amount, the Owner shall, in preparing contract documents based upon the Tender, reduce the price for the said item to an amount not exceeding ten percent (10%) of the Total Tendered Amount and shall add the amount of the reduction to the price for the Lump Sum for Other Requirements item so that the Total Tendered Amount shall not be affected. Sixty percent (60%) of the price for Mobilization and Demobilization item shall be considered as relating to mobilization and the balance to demobilization. The payment for mobilization shall be included in the first payment certificate issued for the Contract subject to the Engineer being satisfied that full mobilization has been carried out. If the Engineer is not so satisfied, he shall allow a payment which, in his opinion, reflects the degree of mobilization effected to date. The payment for demobilization shall become due following Substantial Performance of the works and subject to the Engineer being satisfied that full demobilization has been carried out. The Engineer may, in his discretion, allow partial payment for demobilization before full demobilization has been effected. 32. Lump Sum for Other Requirements In this item of the Schedule of Items and Prices, or in the case of a lump sum type contract, in the Breakdown Schedule, the Tenderer shall enter his Tender Price for providing items such as watchmen, permits, bonds, insurance and approvals (other than those to be paid by IT - 13

24 the Owner), items required by the Drawings or Specifications but which have been omitted from the Schedule and other items required by the Contract but not specifically covered by or related to the other items in the Schedule. Each Progress Payment Certificate will include a percentage of the Tender Price for this item in proportion to the percentage of the permanent works completed. The submission by a Tenderer of an unbalanced price for this item may render the Tender liable to disqualification at the discretion of the Owner. 33. Breakdown of Total Tender Price For lump sum type contracts, when requested by the Engineer, submit the breakdown of the Total Tendered Amount in accordance with Section 4 of the Information for Tenderers. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the breakdown contains prices which are unbalanced, the Contractor will be required to submit data to substantiate his prices. In any event, the Engineer reserves the right to adjust the breakdown to correct any unbalanced prices. 34. Defective Work The following is supplementary to the General Conditions. The Engineer may carry out additional inspections of the installed works and the Contractor shall provide at no additional cost to the Owner such unskilled assistance as the Engineer may require therefor. Provided that no defective work is indicated by such inspections, the whole of the cost for inspectors, trained operators, equipment rental and material shall be borne by the Owner. If, however, defective work is indicated by any such inspections carried out prior the issuance of the Final Certificate, the Contractor shall bear the cost thereof and that portion of the work inspected which provide to be defective. The Contractor shall forthwith take the necessary action to rectify to the satisfaction of the Engineer, all defects of which the Engineer may notify him as a result of such inspections. 35. Certificate and Instruction for Equipment The Contractor shall, unless otherwise permitted or directed in writing by the Engineer, furnish to the Owner before the issuance of the Certificate or Substantial Performance and before the Owner takes over the works from the Contractor: (a) three (3) copies of certificates or letters from the manufacturers of the equipment incorporated into the works (or from their accredited Agents) stating that their IT - 14

25 qualified representatives have tested the equipment which they supplied and have found everything to be satisfactorily installed and in proper working order; (b) (c) six (6) copies of the equipment manufacturer s operation and maintenance instructions and parts lists for all equipment incorporated into the works under the Contract; and a certificate or letter from the electric power commission which has jurisdiction in the area of works stating that the said commission s representative has inspected the electrical installations in the works and is satisfied that they are in accordance with the said commission s requirements. 36. Unused (N/A) 37. Site Review/Job Showing A mandatory site tour/job showing is scheduled for Tuesday, September 20, :30AM at the Redwood Estates Water Treatment Plant, 6214 Shannon Lane, Bainsville, Ontario. Members of the project team including Town staff, the project manager and the design team will be in attendance to respond to questions. All responses to questions received at the tour will be provided by addendum. Attendance at the site visit is mandatory for all General Contractors. Other sub-contractors are welcome to attend the site tour but attendance is not mandatory. 38. Payment to Suppliers of Preselected Equipment (Not Applicable) Preselected equipment (see Schedule of Preselected Equipment, in the Form of Tender) which the Contractor is required to furnish under the Contract shall be ordered and paid for either by the Contractor or by an authorized and approved subcontractor who has furnished to the Contractor a fifty percent (50%) Performance Bond and a fifty percent (50%) Labour and Material Payment Bonds, both in forms generally accepted by the construction industry. If an equipment supplier received an order for preselected equipment from a subcontractor, the said supplier may request from the Contractor photocopies of the performance and payment bonds furnished by the said subcontractor to the Contractor. On receipt of such a request, the Contractor shall forthwith pass such photocopies to the said supplier. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer photocopies of any or all bonds furnished by subcontractors to the Contractor. The purchaser of preselected equipment, whether such purchaser is the Contractor or a subcontractor, shall make payments and shall release holdback to suppliers of preselected equipment in accordance with the terms of payment set out in the quotation documents IT - 15

26 prepared by the Owner s Consulting Engineer and upon which quotations for preselected equipment were based. (See documents attached to these Specifications Appendix 1). The itemized statement which the Contractor submits monthly to the Engineer in accordance with Section 52 (a) of the General Conditions shall include items and amounts in respect of preselected equipment in accordance with the said terms of payment. Similarly, if release of holdback becomes due to a supplier of preselected equipment during the period of maintenance of he Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, an itemized statement or invoice showing the amount to be released and when it is due. Provided that the Engineer is satisfied that the supplier of an item of preselected equipment and the Contractor (and subcontractor, if any) have fulfilled their obligations, the Engineer shall approve payment or release of holdback in respect of the said preselected equipment to the Contractor in accordance with the said terms of payment. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer photostat copies of any or all invoices issued by equipment suppliers to the Contractor or to subcontractors in relation to the Contract. IT - 16

27 Redwood Estates WTP Upgrades Project No Section B Form of Tender

28

29 This Form of Tender with Contract Document, TO BE SUBMITTED by the tenderer. FORM OF TENDER WSP Project No TENDER FOR PROCESS MECHANICAL & BUILDING MECHANICAL UPGRADE OF REDWOOD ESTATES WTP Tender by residing at (or place of business) and residing at (or place of business) comprising the firm of a company duly incorporated under the laws of and having its head office at hereinafter called "the Tenderer." NOTE: The Tenderer's name and residence must be inserted above, and in the case of an unincorporated firm, the name and residence of each and every member of the firm must be inserted. To: The Corporation of the Township of Champlain. I (WE) have carefully examined the locality and site of the proposed works, and all contract documents relating thereto including the: Form of Agreement, Addendum/Addenda No. to No. * inclusive, Special Provisions if any, Information for Tenderers, Supplementary General Conditions if any, General Conditions, Supplementary Specifications if any, Specifications if any, Standard Specifications if any, Contract Drawings, Standard Drawings, Form of Tender, forms of Performance Bond and Labour and Material Payment Bond, hereby tender and offer in accordance therewith to enter into a contract within the prescribed time to construct the said works in strict accordance with the contract documents and such further detail drawings as may be supplied from time-to-time and to furnish all materials, labour, tools, plant, matters and things necessary therefore to complete and ready for use within the time specified for the Total Tendered Amount of dollars ($ ) (excluding HST) Or such other sum as may be ascertained in accordance with the Contract. *The Tenderer will insert here the numbers of the addenda received by him during the tendering period and taken into account by him in preparing his tender FT 1

30

31 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS AND PRICES The aforesaid Total Tendered Amount is determined as follows: ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT UNIT PRICE TOTAL PRICE 1 Mobilization & Demobilization LS Replace greensand filter control system + valves. LS 1 Replace green sand filter media. (dispose of existing media). LS 1 Replace high-lift motors. Addition of VFD control to high-lift pumps. Replace all bolting with stainless steel bolting. Removal of pressure tank. Venting of clear well. LS 1 LS 1 LS 1 LS 1 LS 1 Insulate aboveground piping, valves, pumps, pressure tanks and filter. LS 1 Sealing of building-checking doors and windows; louvers; caulking and prime walls with vapour retarding primer. LS 1 11 Addition of dehumidifier. LS 1 12 Addition of a ductless split system. LS 1 13 Contingency LS 1 30,000 TOTAL TENDERED AMOUNT (excluding HST) $ Note: Items to include work completed by ISI Controls. See Appendix 1 preselected equipment. FT 2

32

33 STANDARD TENDER REQUIREMENTS Harmonized Sales Tax Refer to Clause 25 of the Information for Tenderers regarding the Harmonized Sales Tax. Period of Validity of Tender In accordance with Information for Tenderers Clause 13 or as otherwise stipulated in the Contract Document, tenders shall remain valid for acceptance for a period of sixty (60) calendar days from the date of opening of tenders. Contingency Allowance The Tenderer agrees that he is not entitled to payment of the Contingency Allowance except for additional work carried out by him in accordance with the Contract and only to the extent of such additional work, as authorized by the Engineer in writing. Provisional Items All of the work described in the following provisional items is to be included in the Total Tendered Amount. All items must be priced. If the items priced in the following Schedule are deemed, in the Owner s sole and absolute discretion, to be unrealistic, abnormally low or not representative of a fair market price, the Owner reserves the right to request substantiation for the pricing submitted. Bidders are notified that if, following a review of the pricing for the item in this Schedule, and following any substantiation of pricing provided by the bidder, the pricing proposed by the bidder for any or all of the Provisional Items is, in the Owner s sole and absolute discretion, determined to be unrealistic, abnormally low or not representative of a fair market price, the Owner reserves the right to reject the bid. In the event that the project is deemed over budget or, for any other reason the Owner determines to be in its best interests, the Owner reserves the right, in its sole and absolute discretion, to remove any or all of the Provisional Items from the scope of work for the project and adjust the total tendered amount accordingly. This adjusted total tendered amount, exclusive of, some or all of the provisional items, will determine the low tender in the event that they are removed. FT - 3

34

35 Subcontractors (Not Applicable) The Tenderer agrees that he/she will furnish to the Owner copies of all required Subcontractor Performance Bonds and Labour and Material Payments Bonds forthwith upon execution of subcontracts with his Owner-approved subcontractors and further agrees that no payment will be due and payable for work done by any subcontractor whose work is required to be bonded until such time as the required bonds have been filed with the Owner. Contract Agreement The Tenderer agrees that, if so requested in writing by the Owner, he will enter into a contract with the Owner based upon his tender but jointly in the names of the Tenderer and the Tenderer s parent company, if any. The Tenderer further agrees that any request by the Owner as indicated above is not and shall not be deemed to be a counteroffer by the Owner. The Tenderer agrees that, if this tender is accepted by the Owner: 1) He/she will carry out any additional or extra work (including the supplying of any additional materials or equipment pertaining thereto) or will delete any work as may be required by the Engineer in accordance with the Contract; 2) The carrying out of any work referred to in paragraph 1) above or the issuance by the Engineer of a Contract Change Order relating to such work or the acceptance by the Tenderer of such Contact Change Order shall not, except as expressly stated in such Contract Change Order, waive or impair any of the terms of the Contract or of any Contract Change Order previously issued by the Engineer or any of the rights of the Owner or of the Engineer under the Contract; 3) He/she will pay to the Owner (in addition to amounts payable by the Owner in respect of site supervision of the work) the sum specified in the Contract as liquidated damages for each calendar day that the work under the Contract as expressly modified by all Contact Change Orders issued by the Engineer remains uncompleted after the expiry of the Time for Completion specified in the Contract or the extended time for completion allowed in writing by the Engineer. The prices applicable to work referred to in Paragraph 1) above shall be determined as follows: a) The Schedule of Items and Prices shall apply where applicable; b) If the above Schedule is inapplicable the prices shall be determined in accordance with Section 50 of the General Conditions. FT - 4

36

37 Declaration The Tenderer declares that no person, firm or corporation other than the Tenderer has any interest in this contract for which this tender is made. The Tenderer further declares that this tender is made without any connection, comparison of figures or arrangements with, or knowledge of, any other corporation, firm or person making a tender for the same work and is in all respects fair and without collusion or fraud. The Tenderer further declares that no member of the Municipal Council and no officer or employee of the Crown or of the Consulting Engineer is or will become interested directly or indirectly as a contracting party, partner, surety or otherwise in or in the performance of the Contact or in the supplies, work or business to which it relates, or in any portion of the profits thereof, or in any of the monies to be derived therefrom. Schedule The Tenderer agrees to have the works "Substantially Performed", also known as the "Time for Completion", by March 31, 2017 for all items based on acceptance of the tendered amount within sixty (60) calendar days from the date of tender opening. No additional payment or other adjustments to the Contract Document shall apply as a result of any schedule variation unless approved by the Engineer and the Owner. Financial Statement The Tenderer agrees that he will furnish the Owner a copy of his latest financial statement within 4 days after being requested to do so by the Owner. Agreement to Bond The Agreement to Bond of a company lawfully doing business in the Province of Ontario, to furnish a performance bond in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the Total Tendered Amount and a labour and material payment bond in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the Total Tendered Amount, or in such greater amount as may be required by the Owner, if this tender is accepted, is enclosed herewith. Certified Cheque or Bid Bond to Accompany Tender A tender deposit in the form of a certified cheque or bid bond in a minimum amount of ten percent (10%) of the Total Tendered Amount payable to the Owner shall accompany the tender. Failure to provide the required tender deposit may, at the discretion of the Owner, invalidate the tender. FT - 5

38

39 Right to Reject Any or All Tenders The Tenderer understands that fundamental to this competition is the selection of tender that, in the Owner s opinion, is in the best interest of the Owner. The Tenderer agrees that the Owner has the right, at its own discretion, to accept or reject any noncompliant tender and that the lowest or any tender will not necessarily be accepted. Severability If any provision of this Agreement is found by a court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, the other provisions of this Agreement shall not be affected or impaired, and the offending provision shall automatically be modified to the least extent necessary in order to be valid, legal and enforceable. FT - 6

40

41 The Tenderer solemnly declares that the several matters stated on the foregoing tender are in all respects true. Dated at This day of,2016. Signature of Tendered Signature of Witness Note: If the tender is submitted by or on behalf of a corporation, it must be signed in the name of such corporation by the duly authorized officers and the seal of the corporation, or wafer seal, must be affixed. If the tender is submitted by or on behalf of an individual or a partnership a seal must be affixed opposite the signature of the individual or of each partner and each signature shall be witnessed. FT - 7

42

43 STATEMENT "A" Summary of tenderer's experience in successfully completed similar work. Reference is made to the Information for Tenderers - Clause 17 or as otherwise stipulated in the Contract Document. YEAR DESCRIPTION OF CONTRACT FOR WHOM WORK IS PERFORMED VALUE ENGINEER/ ARCHITECT RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK If appropriate, additional pages may be attached. FT - 8

44

45 STATEMENT "B" Qualifications of tenderer's senior supervisory staff to be employed on this contract. Reference is made to the Information for Tenderers - Clause 17 or as otherwise stipulated in the Contract Document. NAME POSITION QUALIFICATIONS AND EXPERIENCE If appropriate, additional pages may be attached. FT - 9

46

47 STATEMENT "C" Proposed construction equipment. Reference is made to the Information for Tenderers - Clause 17 or as otherwise stipulated in the Contract Document. EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE EQUIPMENT TO BE PURCHASED EQUIPMENT TO BE RENTED If appropriate, additional pages may be attached. FT - 10

48

49 STATEMENT "D" LIST OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS This form is to be left blank for the first tender submission package. Tenderers shall complete this form and submit it to the Township of Champlain prior to 3:00:00 pm on the advertised tender closing date, in a separate sealed tender envelope clearly marked as to its contents. Clause 18 of the Information for Tenderers requires the Tenderer to list on this Statement Sheet the name of each proposed subcontractor. For the Tenderer's convenience and to ensure that a complete list is submitted with the tender, a list of possible subtrades has been printed below. The Tenderer shall make an entry against each possible subtrade listed either by naming the proposed sub-contractor or by entering "by own forces", whichever applies. No blank spaces are to be left. If, in addition, the Tenderer proposes to sublet a part of the work which is not listed below, he shall add the subtrade and the proposed subcontractor's name to the list. FAILURE BY A TENDERER TO COMPLY WITH THE FOREGOING REQUIREMENTS MAY RESULT IN HIS TENDER BEING DISQUALIFIED BY THE OWNER. SUBTRADE PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTOR * FT - 11

50

51 AGREEMENT TO BOND ** ** DATE, 20 Township of South Glengarry The Corporation of the Township of South Glengarry Dear Sirs: Re: Redwood Estates WTP Upgrades In consideration of the Corporation of the Township of South Glengarry (hereinafter referred to as "the Owner") accepting the tender of and executing an Agreement with: hereinafter referred to as "the Tenderer") for the construction of: Redwood Estates WTP Upgrades and all associated works, and exterior painting of the standpipe to the express conditions that the Owner receive the Performance Bond and the Labour and Material Payment Bond in accordance with the said tender, we the undersigned hereby agree with the Owner to become bound to the Owner as surety for the Tenderer in a Performance Bond and a Labour and Material Payment Bond each in an amount equal to 100% of the contract price or other such greater amount as may be determined by the Owner, in the forms of Performance Bond and Labour and Material Payment Bond and in accordance with the said tender, and we agree to furnish the Owner with said Bonds within seven (7) days after notification of the acceptance of the said tender and execution of the said Agreement by the Owner has been mailed to us. Yours very truly, (Seal) NOTE: This Agreement To Bond (or an alternate agreement to bond form as supplied by the Surety Company) must be executed on behalf of the Surety Company by its authorized officers under the company's corporate seal. ** Enter the name and address of the Surety Company at the top of the page. FT - 12

52

53 Redwood Estates WTP Upgrades Project No Section C Contract Agreement

54

55 Contract Agreement Contract No. THIS AGREEMENT made in Lancaster, Ontario this day of BETWEEN: The Corporation of the Township of South Glengarry_ - and (hereinafter called the Owner ) OF THE FIRST PART (hereinafter called the Contractor ) OF THE SECOND PART WITNESSETH That the Owner and the Contractor in consideration of the fulfillment of their respective promises and obligations herein set forth covenant and agree with each other as follows: ARTICLE 1 (a) (b) A general description of the work is: Process Mechanical and Building Mechanical Upgrade of Redwood Estates WTP The Contractor shall, for the prices set out in the Form of Tender and except as otherwise specifically provided, provide at no additional cost to the Owner all and every kind of labour, machinery, plant, structures, road ways, materials, appliances, articles and things necessary for the due execution and completion of all the work set out in this Contract and shall forthwith according to the instructions of the Engineer, commence the work and diligently execute the respective portions thereof, and deliver the works complete in every particular to the Owner within the time specified in the Contract. ARTICLE 2 In the event that the Form of Tender provides for and contains a Contingency Allowance, it is understood and agreed that such Contingency Allowance is merely for the convenience of accounting by the Owner, and the Contractor is not entitled to payment thereof except for extra or additional work carried out by him as directed by the Engineer and in accordance with the Contract and only to the extent of such extra or additional work. ARTICLE 3 In case of any inconsistency or conflict between the provisions of this Agreement and the Plans or Specifications or General Conditions or Form of Tender or any other document or writing, the provisions of such documents shall take precedence and govern in the following order, namely: Page 1/4

56

57 (1) This Agreement (6) Contract Drawings (2) Addenda (7) Standard Drawings (3) Information for Tenderers (8) Form of Tender (4) General Conditions (5) Standard Specifications, Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications ARTICLE 4 The Contractor shall not without the consent in writing of the Engineer and without restricting in any way the provisions of the Section of the General Conditions headed Subletting, make any assignment of any part or the whole of any monies due or to become due under the provisions of this Contract. ARTICLE 5 The Owner covenants with the Contractor that the Contractor having in all respects complied with the provisions of this Contract, will be paid for and in respect of the work the sum of dollars ($ ) subject to the Article 2 hereof and subject to such additions and deductions as may properly be made under the terms hereof, subject to the provision that the Owner may make payments on account monthly or otherwise as may be provided in the General Conditions attached hereto. ARTICLE 6 Where any notice, direction or other communication is required to be or may be given or made by one of the parties hereto to the other or to the Engineer or to his agent, it shall be deemed sufficiently given or made if mailed or delivered in writing to such party or to the Engineer at the following addresses: The Owner: The Corporation of the Township of South Glengarry 6 Oak Street, P.O. Box 220 Lancaster, Ontario K0C 1N0 The Contractor: The Engineer: WSP Canada Inc Rosemount Ave. Cornwall, Ontario K6J 3E5 Where any such notice, direction, or other communication is given or made to the Engineer, a copy thereof shall likewise be delivered to any agent of the Engineer appointed in accordance with the General Conditions of this Contract and where any such notice, direction or other communication is given or made to such agent a copy thereof shall likewise be delivered to the Engineer. Page 2/4

58

59 ARTICLE 7 A copy of each of the Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, Form of Tender, Information for Tenders is hereto annexed and together with the Drawings relating thereto and listed in the Specifications are made part of the this Contract as fully to all intents and purposes as though recited in full herein. ARTICLE 8 No implied contract of any kind whatsoever by or on behalf of the Owner shall arise or be implied by or inferred from anything in this Contract contained, nor from any position or situation of the parties at any time, it being clearly understood that the express covenants and agreements herein contained made by the Owner shall be the only covenants and agreements upon which any rights against the Owner may be founded. ARTICLE 9 Time shall be deemed the essence of the Contract. ARTICLE 10 The Contractor declares that in tendering for the works and in entering into this Contract he has either investigated for himself the character of the work and all local conditions that might affect his tender or his acceptance of performance of the work, or that not having so investigated, he acknowledges that his responsibility under the Contract is in no way reduced or limited thereby and, in either case, he is willing to assume and does hereby assume all risk of conditions arising, developing, or being revealed in the course of the work which might or could make the work, or any items thereof, more expensive in character, or more onerous to fulfill, than was contemplated or known when the tender was made or the Contract signed. The Contractor also declares that he did not and does not rely upon information furnished by any methods whatsoever by the Owner or its officers, employees or agents, being aware that any information from such sources was and is approximate and speculative only, and was not in any manner warranted or guaranteed by the Owner. ARTICLE 11 The Contract shall apply to and be binding on the parties hereto and their successors, administrators, executors and assigns and each of them. IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have hereunto set their hands and seals the day and year first above written or caused their corporate seals to be affixed, attested by the signature of their proper officers, as the case may be. Page 3/4

60

61 Owner Per: Per: (Seal) Contractor * Witness as to Signature of Contractor Address Per: Per: (Seal) Occupation * Not necessary if corporate seal is affixed Page 4/4

62

63 Redwood Estates WTP Upgrades Project No Section D General Conditions

64

65 Redwood Estates WTP Upgrades Project No General Conditions TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page G.C. 1. GENDER AND SINGULAR REFERENCES 1 2. DEFINITIONS 1 3. ABBREVIATIONS 2 4. TENDERS 3 5. SCOPE OF CONTRACT 3 6. SCHEDULE OF CONSTRUCTION 4 7. SURVEY DATA 4 8. PLANT, LABOUR AND MATERIAL 4 9. SAMPLES QUALITY CONTROL TREE AND VEGETATION PROTECTION NOISE CONTROL DUST CONTROL POLLUTION CONTROL EROSION CONTROL TRAFFIC CONTROL CONDEMNED AND SURPLUS MATERIALS 7 GC - i

66 Redwood Estates WTP Upgrades Project No General Conditions 18. EQUIVALENTS MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED BY THE OWNER APPROVALS AND PERMITS ERRORS AND OMISSIONS BY CONTRACTOR DELAYS PROJECT MEETINGS ORAL ARRANGEMENTS DECISIONS BY THE ENGINEER CO-OPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS INSPECTOR AND INSPECTION OCCUPANCY OF THE WORKS PUBLIC RELATIONS AND NOTICES ABSENCE OF ENGINEER AND HIS AGENT CONTRACTOR S ABSENCE CONVENIENCES WORK AREAS PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY RESTORATION DRAINAGE BARRIERS, LIGHTS AND DETOURS 17 GC - ii

67 Redwood Estates WTP Upgrades Project No General Conditions 38. PROTECTION OF WORK, PERSONS AND PROPERTY INDEMNIFICATION CONTRACTOR S INSURANCE General General Liability Wrap-up Insurance Automobile Liability Insurance Aircraft and Watercraft Liability Insurance Property and Boiler Insurance Contractor's Equipment Insurance Insurance Requirements and Duration NOTICE TO CONTRACTOR RECTIFICATION AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACT BONDS CONTRACTOR S DISCHARGE OF LIABILITIES COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION CERTIFICATES OF COMPLETION RELEASE OF HOLDBACK TO SUBCONTRACTORS MEASUREMENTS ALTERATIONS, EXTRAS, DEDUCTIONS AND CLAIMS VALUATION OF VARIATIONS BOOKS AND RECORDS OF THE CONTRACTOR 37 GC - iii

68 Redwood Estates WTP Upgrades Project No General Conditions 52. PAYMENT MAINTENANCE SECURITY PAYMENT OF INTEREST SUSPENSION OF WORK SUBLETTING USE OF HYDRANTS AND WATER SETTING OUT ASSISTANCE OTHERS RIGHTS MONIES DUE OWNER WORKERS RIGHTS LIENS REMOVAL OF PERSONNEL NON-FULFILLMENT OF THE CONTRACT BRIBERY CLAIMS, NEGOTIATIONS, MEDIATION Continuance of the Work Record Keeping Claims Procedure Negotiations 50 GC - iv

69 Redwood Estates WTP Upgrades Project No General Conditions 67.5 Mediation Payment Rights of Both Parties ARBITRATION Conditions of Arbitration Arbitration Procedure Appointment of Arbitrator Costs The Decision HOURS OF OPERATION 53 GC - v

70 1. Gender and Singular References References to the masculine or singular throughout the Contract Documents shall be considered to include the feminine and the plural and vice versa, as the context requires. 2. Definitions Wherever used in these General Conditions, or in the Special Conditions, Agreement, Plans, Form of Tender, Information for Tenderers, Specifications, Statutory Declarations or other documents forming part of this Contract: authorized, directed, required, requested, approved, ordered, sanctioned, considered, and satisfactory, shall, unless some other meaning is obvious from the context, mean respectively authorized, directed, required, requested, approved, ordered, sanctioned or considered by or satisfactory to the Engineer. Contract includes the Agreement to do the work entered into with the Owner, the Addenda, Special Provisions, information for Tenderers, the General Conditions, the Specifications, the Plans, the Tender and all other documents referred to in or bound with the said Agreement and identified as being part of the contract documents. Corporation shall mean the municipality or municipalities in or for which the work is being carried out. Engineer means the person for the time being acting as Project Engineer or other person designated by the Thompson Rosemount Group. Inspector means an inspector for the Owner acting under the direction of the Engineer. Owner or a pronoun in place thereof, means the Corporation as identified in the Agreement. owner has its natural meaning except when it refers to the Owner of the project. period of maintenance means the period from the date of substantial performance of the contract, as set out in the Certificate of Substantial Performance, to the date of issuance of the Final Certificate and shall be not less than 12 months. GC - 1

71 Plans means all plans, profiles, drawings, sketches, or copies thereof exhibited, used or prepared for or in connection with the work embraced under the Contract. plant (unless the context requires a different meaning) means every temporary or accessory means necessary or required to carry on or complete the work and extra work, in the time and manner herein provided. shall, may, herein, person, writing or written, surety, and security and words used in the singular number of the masculine gender, shall have the meaning and effect as given in the Interpretation Act of the Revised Statutes of Ontario. Solicitor means the person for the time being acting as Solicitor for the Owner. Subcontractor includes only a person, firm or corporation having a contract for the execution of a part or parts of the work included in the general contract, or a person, firm or corporation furnishing material called for in the general contract and worked to a special design according to the plans or specifications, but does not include one who merely furnishes material not so worked. work or works (unless the context requires a different meaning) means the whole works, materials, matters and things required to be done, supplied, or installed that are mentioned or referred to in the Contract, including all extra or additional work or material, matters or things which may be ordered by the Engineer, as herein provided. 3. Abbreviations This section give abbreviations used..1 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.2 ACI American Concrete Institute.3 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute.4 ANSI American National Standard Institute.5 APWA American Public Works Association.6 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers.7 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.8 AWPA American Wood Preserver s Association.9 AWWA American Water Works Association.10 CGSB Canadian General Standards Board.11 CSA Canadian Standards Association.12 HEPC Hydro Electric Power Commission GC - 2

72 .13 MOEECC Ontario Ministry of Environment, Energy and Climate Change.14 MTO Ministry of Transportation of Ontario.15 OPSD Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings.16 OPSS Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications 4. Tenders All tenders for the execution of the work herein set forth or referred to must be made on the printed forms supplied for that purpose. No others will be considered. Such tenders must be made without any knowledge, comparisons of figures or arrangements with any other person making any tender or estimate for the same purpose, and the tenderers shall declare that such tenders are in all respects fair and without collusion or fraud, and that no officer of the Corporation or The Thompson Rosemount Group, is, shall be, or shall become interested, directly or indirectly, as contracting party, partner, surety or otherwise in, or in the performance of, the Contract, or in the supplies, work or business to which it relates, or in any portion of the profits to be used therein or thereof, or in any of the monies to be derived therefrom. Tenders must cover the cost of completion of the Contract in every respect, in accordance with the Contract, including all labour, plant, tools, etc. The Contractor agrees that he is fully informed regarding all of the conditions, local or otherwise, affecting the work to be performed and that his information was secured by personal investigation and that he will make no claim against the Owner based on any estimate or representation of the Owner or of any representative of same. 5. Scope of Contract Stated in general terms, and without in any way limiting the requirements and intent of the Contract, the work required to be done by the Contractor under the Contract comprises all excavations required for the proper carrying out of the works, the formation, construction, completion and maintenance of the works referred to in the Plans, Specifications, General Conditions or other contract documents relating thereto and includes the provision, except where otherwise specifically stated in the Contract, of all labour, plant, materials and equipment required for the complete and proper execution of the work. The contract documents are complementary and what is required by any part thereof shall be considered as being required by the whole thereof. Materials and work which are not specifically described or shown in the contract documents but the necessity of which can reasonably be considered as inferable from the contract documents shall be supplied and performed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the owner and the Contractor shall not claim extra payment therefor or an extension of the time for completion on account thereof. GC - 3

73 In the case of discrepancies between drawings, those of larger scale, or if the scales are the same, those of later date shall govern. 6. Schedule of Construction The Contractor shall, within two weeks after the receipt by him of (a) the Contract executed by the Owner and the Contractor (b) the Engineer s written order to commence work, whichever is the earlier, submit his proposed schedule of construction to the Engineer for approval. The schedule of construction shall show clearly in weekly stages the proposed progress on the main items, structures and subtrades of the Contract and shall indicate where applicable the labour, construction crews, plant and equipment to be employed. The Engineer may require the Contractor to revise his proposed schedule at any time as provided for in these General Conditions. 7. Survey Data All elevations indicated in Contract are referred to datum of Geodetic Survey of Canada and to a benchmark established at or near site of work. Information on and identification of existing control points and property lines indicated on Contract Drawings will be provided by Engineer. The Engineer will provide principal reference points and benchmarks in accordance with General Conditions. The Contractor is responsible to locate and confirm all control points prior to commencement of works and protect and preserve all permanent reference points during construction. 8. Plant, Labour and Material The Contractor shall provide all necessary storage ground and storage sheds and shall furnish all required skilled and unskilled labour, and materials, fuel, machinery, tools and all plant, so that the Contract, and all work required to be done under it, can and will be carried on continuously and expeditiously to completion, in all respects to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All material, plant, machinery, tools and equipment acquired, possessed or provided by the Contractor for incorporation into the works shall be the property of the Owner, whether or not such material, plant, machinery, tools and equipment are brought to or upon the works or upon lands of the Thompson Rosemount Group or the Corporation and the GC - 4

74 Contractor is prohibited from removing or disposing of the same, or any part thereof, without the consent or instructions of the Engineer in writing. No materials, plant, machinery or equipment reasonably required for the performance of the Contract and not for incorporation into the works, brought to or upon the works or upon lands of the Agency or the Corporation, shall be removed or disposed of during the progress of the works without the written consent or instruction of the Engineer or his authorized representative. In case of a difference of opinion between the Contractor and the Engineer or his authorized representative as to whether any of the aforesaid items is reasonably required on the works for the satisfactory progress of the works, the Contractor shall abide by the decision of the Engineer. 9. Samples Before any material of any kind is used on the work, the Contractor shall submit samples thereof for the approval of the Engineer and must obtain such approval. No material shall be used on the work which is in any way inferior to the approved samples. The giving of such approval shall not obligate the Owner to pay for any material other than in accordance with the Contract, shall not prevent the rejection of any material which may be found, in the opinion of the Engineer, to be unsound or unfit for use on the work or not in accordance with the approved samples or the requirements of the Contract and shall not be deemed to be a waiver of objection to the work or any part thereof at any time on account of the materials used not being satisfactory or on any other account. The decision of the Engineer with respect to the approval or rejection of samples shall be final. 10. Quality Control The Contractor shall adhere to manufacturer s recommendations with respect to handling, preparation, installation, testing, operation or protection of any project or material to be incorporated in work. The Contractor shall ensure that all materials supplied are compatible with each other unless specific adjacent materials have been specified and shall correct any defective work caused by non-compatibility of materials. Where practical or desirable, tests will be conducted by Engineer on materials and equipment to be incorporated into permanent works before delivery to site. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full information on materials, equipment and related arrangements to be furnished, submit information in a form approved by the Engineer, and submit sufficient information to enable the Engineer to determine whether proposed materials, equipment and arrangements meet contract requirements. GC - 5

75 11. Tree And Vegetation Protection The Contractor shall take reasonable measures to protect trees and vegetation during construction operations other than in those areas specifically required to be cleared and grubbed to affect the works. 12. Noise Control The Contractor shall establish and maintain site procedures such that noise levels from construction areas are minimized. This includes but is not limited to the use of vehicles and equipment equipped with efficient muffling devices and the provision of and use of devices that will minimize noise level in construction area. 13. Dust Control The Contractor shall provide measures to prevent dust nuisance resulting from construction operations at all locations on site. Measures shall include but are not limited to the use of water, brine or calcium chloride to control dust, transport dusty materials in covered haulage vehicles, maintain public roads free and clear of mud and construction debris. The use of dust suppressants shall be controlled in close proximity to water courses or agricultural lands. 14. Pollution Control The Contractor shall incorporate various pollution control methods, including but not limited to: reviewing in detail proposed construction haul routes, plan access routes and fueling areas, establish suitable fueling and maintenance areas and obtain approval from Engineer, avoid refueling or maintaining equipment within 30 m of watercourses, develop a contingency plan for spills, advise the Engineer and other appropriate authorities when preparing to work in or adjacent to a watercourse, dispose of all construction debris in an approved location. The Contractor is required to comply with all relevant legislation, regulations and practices to minimize the environmental impacts associated with the construction of the works. Reference is made to the Ontario Environmental Construction Guidelines for Municipal Road, Sewage and Water Projects (1987). GC - 6

76 15. Erosion Control The Contractor is required to implement the following general Erosion Control Measures: avoid removal of vegetation from sloped approaches to watercourses, excavate and stabilize temporary channel beds prior to any diversion of flow, compact, stabilize and rip-rap banks and river bends that have been disturbed or damaged during construction, provide splash pads where water is discharged into watercourses, minimize the removal of vegetation from slopes. More specific erosion control requirements are described in the Special Provisions. 16. Traffic Control The Contractor shall at all times provide and maintain pedestrian access to all properties and provide and maintain emergency access for fire trucks, ambulances and other vehicles for emergency services. The Contractor is also required to provide and maintain detours for traffic where required, mark detours as directed by Police Department, Works Department and Engineer, and supply and place crushed stone on the road shoulder to maintain traffic on road shoulders as required. 17. Condemned and Surplus Materials Should any plant, appliances or materials which the Engineer may deem to be inferior or unfit for use in or on the works, be brought on the ground, or used, the same shall be wholly removed therefrom within twenty-four (24) hours after notification to that effect from the Engineer, and in case of failure or neglect on the part of the Contractor to remove the same, the Engineer may cause the same to be taken away at the Contractor s expense and deposited, wasted, or otherwise disposed of, in any locality, place or way he considers convenient or proper, and the Contractor shall forthwith pay to the Owner on demand, all expenses incurred, including storage, if any, or the same may be deducted or collected by the Owner, as provided in the section thereof entitled Monies Due Owner. No surplus or other material of any kind, arising from any portion of the work, shall be sold, thrown away, dumped, wasted, or otherwise disposed of without the written sanction of the Engineer, and if so disposed of the Engineer may ascertain as nearly as he conveniently can the quantities and value, and deduct the same from the Contractor s next progress payment certificate. GC - 7

77 All excavated material shall be disposed of in the manner set forth in the Plans and Specifications for the work or as directed by the Engineer. All excavated material of value to, or required by the Owner, including materials from existing structures, such as old lumber, stone flagging, scoria, granite or cedar blocks, cobble stones, paving brick, stone suitable for macadam, sewer or other pipe, sewer brick, manhole or gully tops, valves, hydrants, and earth or any other materials, must be neatly piled, deposited or evenly spread by the Contractor in such place as may be directed by the Engineer, the whole expense, including that of hauling, unloading and spreading to be borne by the Contractor. The above mentioned materials must be removed and deposited, as above required, as soon as excavated, or as soon thereafter as the Engineer may direct. Surplus excavated material not required by the Owner shall be disposed of by the Contractor off the line of the works, in such a manner as not to cause a nuisance, injury or inconvenience to the Owner or to public or private parties; otherwise the Contractor will in all cases be held liable for, and must indemnify the Owner against, all claims in respect thereof. 18. Equivalents Where pursuant to the Specifications the Contractor is required to supply an article or group of related articles designated by a trade or other name or an approval equal, the tender shall be based only upon supplying the article or group of articles so designated, which shall be regarded as the standard of quality required by the Specifications. After the acceptance of a tender, the Contractor may apply to the Engineer to substitute as an approved equal another article or group of related articles identified by a different trade or other name for an article or group of related articles designated as aforesaid. The application shall be in writing and shall state the price for the proposed substitute article or group of related articles, the price for the article or group of articles designated as aforesaid and such other information as the Engineer may require. No ruling on a proposed substitution will be made prior to the acceptance of a tender. No substitution shall be made without the prior approval of the Engineer. The approval or rejection of a proposed substitution shall be in the discretion of the Engineer and his decision shall be final. If the proposed substitution is approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall be entitled to the first $100 of the aggregate saving in cost by reason of such substitution and to 50% of any additional saving in cost in excess of such $100. Each such approval shall be conveyed to the Contractor by the issuance of a Certificate of Equality on the Agency s standard form of Certificate of Equality and if any adjustment to the GC - 8

78 Contract Price is to be made by reason of such substitution, a Contract Change Order shall be issued in addition. 19. Materials and Equipment Supplied by the Owner All materials and equipment shall be supplied by the Contractor with the exception of such material or equipment as is specifically stated to be supplied by the Owner. In all cases where materials or equipment are supplied by the Owner every effort will be made to have a sufficient supply of such material or equipment tested, examined and approved and ready for use at such times as they may be required, but in case the Owner fails to furnish sufficient supply at any time, the Contractor will not be entitled to any compensation for delay on that account (except as may be allowed herein) other than an extension of the time for completion, the extent of which shall be determined by the Engineer and shall be as nearly as possible equivalent to the time delayed. When the Contractor is required to make provision for and convey Owner supplied materials or equipment as above from railway cars, he shall do so as soon as the cars are delivered to the nearest siding. Any demurrage on account of his inattention will be borne by him. Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment supplied by the Owner shall be transported to the work by the Contractor from the point designated for their supply, at the expense of the Contractor. Once material or equipment has been supplied to the Contractor by the Owner its storage prior to use is his responsibility. Any loss, theft, or damage occurring after the material is in the Contractor s custody shall be at his expense. Before taking delivery of Owner-supplied materials or equipment, whether they are being delivered by truck or by rail, the Contractor shall examine such materials or equipment and satisfy himself as to possible damage which they may have suffered in transit. Where damage has occurred the Contractor shall immediately notify the resident engineer so that a claim may be made against the carrier. Should the Contractor fail to notify the resident engineer of damage to materials or equipment, the Contractor will be liable for the cost of making good any damage subsequently found. 20. Approvals and Permits The construction of the works and all operations connected therewith are subject to the approval, inspection, by-laws and regulations of all municipal, provincial and federal and other authorities having jurisdiction in respect to any matter embraced in this Contract. The Owner will obtain and pay the fees, if any, for approvals and permits relating to the design and location of the permanent works required from the Municipality (i.e Building & GC - 9

79 Site Plan Control permit) Departments or Ministries of Transportation, Labour, Public Works or Transport, from railway or pipeline companies or from hydroelectric, canal or seaway authorities. Unless otherwise specifically stated in the tender documents, the Contractor shall obtain and pay the fees for all other approvals and permits required for or in respect of the works. 21. Errors and Omissions by Contractor Errors, mistakes, omissions or unauthorized changes made by the Contractor or his agents, workmen or employees and all damage that may result therefrom shall be rectified by the Contractor at his own expense. 22. Delays If, after the execution of the Contract, the Contractor suffers damage by reason of delay with respect to construction of the works arising from causes other than adverse weather or labour disputes and beyond his control, the Owner may in its discretion compensate the Contractor wholly or in part for such damage. The contractor must provide notice in writing to the Engineer of every event that may be the subject of a delay with 14 days of the initial occurrence. An extension of time allowed under Section GC 45 of these General Conditions will not be eligible as a claim for delay under this Section. The Contractor shall take all steps necessary or advisable to reduce or eliminate all damage or loss by reason of delay with respect to construction of the works arising from any cause whatsoever, whether or not delay is caused by an extension authorized by the Engineer pursuant to Section GC 45. For further clarifications, the Contractor is not entitled to compensation under this Section unless all such necessary steps have been taken. 23. Project Meetings The Contractor shall attend any and all project meetings scheduled by Engineer, including the Pre-Construction Meeting and tri-weekly Construction Meetings. The Engineer will schedule meetings and notice will be given in writing at least two (2) days before date of meeting. The location will be at a site designated by Engineer. Attendance by the Contractor s Superintendent, Resident Inspector, and others as appropriate is required. The purpose of the meetings will be to discuss communication requirements between parties, contract procedures and processing of field discussions, submittals, change orders and applications for payment, construction progress and schedule, and any other matters that may have arisen. GC - 10

80 24. Oral Arrangements In all cases of misunderstandings or disputes, oral arrangements will not be considered, but the Contractor must produce written authority in support of his contentions, and shall advance no claim in the absence of such written authority, and shall not use, or attempt to use, against the Owner any conversation with any parties. 25. Decisions by the Engineer Should any discrepancies appear or differences of opinion or misunderstanding arise as to the meaning of the Contract or as to any omissions therefrom or statements therein in any respect, or as to the quality or dimensions or sufficiency of the materials, plant or work or any part thereof, or as to the due and proper execution of the works, or as to the measurement or quantity or evaluation of any works executed or to be executed under this Contract, or as to extras thereto or deductions therefrom, or as to any other questions or matters arising out of the Contract, the same shall, subject to the terms of the Contract, be determined by the Engineer, who shall have the right at all reasonable times to visit, enter and carry out inspections at any buildings, factories, workshops, works or sites of the Contractor or others wherever any materials are being prepared, manufactured or treated, or other work is being done in connection with this Contract and the right also to take such samples therefrom as he may deem necessary and the Contractor shall immediately when ordered by the Engineer, proceed with and execute the work or works, or any part thereof, forthwith in accordance with such order and with such additions to or deductions from the contract price as are provided under the terms of the Contract, without making any claim for any extension of time in completing the work, unless arranged in writing with the Engineer as herein provided. 26. Co-Operation with Other Contractors Other Contracts may be awarded by Owner for work to be done adjacent to and/or within limits of construction as shown on Contract Drawings. Limits of work included in any such contracts are identified on Contract Drawings or elsewhere in Contract Documents. The Contractor is required to co-operate and make suitable working arrangements with other Contractor(s) to ensure satisfactory completion of work and obtain approval in writing from Engineer for all arrangements made with other Contractors(s). The Engineer will determine co-ordination and execution of work in the event that Contractors are unable to reach satisfactory working agreement. GC - 11

81 27. Inspector and Inspection All work to be done under the Contract shall be done to the satisfaction of the Engineer or of an agent or inspector authorized to act for him. The Inspector is required by the Engineer to see that the provisions of the Contract are faithfully adhered to, especially as regards the quality of the workmanship and materials, and may stop the work entirely if there is not a sufficient quantity of suitable and approved material on the site to carry on the work properly or for any good and sufficient reason. In particular, but without limiting the powers of the Inspector, orders given by the Inspector relating to the quality of material or workmanship or in respect of safety or public convenience must at once be obeyed by the Contractor. The Inspector shall have the power to suspend any worker for incompetency, drunkenness, negligence or disregard of orders and the Contractor shall ensure that any worker so suspended is forthwith removed from the site. Materials and equipment and the process of preparation or manufacture of materials or equipment shall at all times be subject to inspection, testing and rejection at any stage by the Engineer or his agent. The Engineer will give the Contractor reasonable notice of the materials and equipment in respect of which the Engineer proposes to have inspection or testing carried out during the process of preparation or manufacture, save that in the case of materials or equipment specifically stated in the Contract as required to be tested or inspected by or in the presence of the Engineer or his agent, the Engineer shall not be obliged to give such notice. The Contractor shall notify the engineer in writing at least seven days previous to the commencement of preparation or manufacture of each item of such materials or equipment of the time and place at which such preparation or manufacture is to commence in order that the Engineer or his agent may be present. Notwithstanding compliance by the Contractor with the foregoing paragraph hereof, if any materials or equipment prepared or manufactured away from the site of the works and required by the Contract or by the Engineer to be inspected or tested by or in the presence of the Engineer or his agent at the place of preparation or manufacture become ready for delivery to the site of the works but have not been inspected or tested as required, the Contractor shall so notify the Engineer in writing and shall not have such materials or equipment delivered to the site of the works until authorized so to do in writing by the Engineer. In any event, no materials or equipment required by the Contract or by the Engineer to be inspected or tested by or in the presence of the Engineer or his agent shall be GC - 12

82 incorporated into the work until the required inspection or testing has been carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide, and shall ensure that all Subcontractors and those carrying out the process of preparation or manufacture shall provide, every reasonable facility and cooperation to assist the Engineer or Inspector or others designated by the Contract or by the Engineer in carrying out inspection and testing. The Contractor shall not backfill or otherwise cover up any work without either having it inspected and passed by the inspector or first notifying the Inspector in a manner approved or as directed by the Engineer that the work is ready to be covered up and allowing the Inspector reasonable notice and opportunity for carrying out an inspection. Any work covered up other than in accordance with the foregoing shall, if ordered by the Inspector or the Engineer, be uncovered or opened up for inspection and the Contractor shall, as directed by and to the satisfaction of the Inspector or the Engineer, make good again all openings, excavations and disturbances of any property, real or personal, resulting therefrom, all at the Contractor s expense; but if the Contractor has backfilled or otherwise covered up any work in accordance with the foregoing, the cost of any uncovering or opening up and making good shall be borne as provided for in Section GC 42 (e) hereof. No approval by an Inspector or by the Engineer or failure of an Inspector or the Engineer to carry out an inspection shall relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the Contract or shall be interpreted as being an acceptance of defective or improper work or material which must in every case be removed and replaced properly or otherwise rectified in a satisfactory manner whenever discovered at any time as provided for in Section GC 42 and GC 65 hereof. If, in addition to the inspection provided for above, the Contractor is required by the Contract, by law, by local by-law or by the Engineer to have any part of the works inspected by others, the Contractor shall give the Engineer and the others concerned reasonable notice of the time and date proposed for the additional inspection. 28. Occupancy of the Works The use or occupancy of the works or any part thereof by the Owner shall not be taken in any manner as an acceptance by the Owner of any work or material not in accordance with the Contract or to relieve the Contractor or his surety from liability, whether heretofore or hereafter incurred or arising, in respect of the observance or performance of any covenant or condition in the Contract not then performed, whether such covenant or condition be by way of indemnity to the Owner or otherwise, save to the extent that loss or damage is caused during such use or occupancy by the Owner or by employees of the Owner for whom the Owner is responsible. In particular, without limiting the GC - 13

83 generality of the foregoing, the use or occupancy of the work or any part thereof by the Owner shall not release the Contractor from liability to pay to the Owner, or waive or impair the right of the Owner to deduct and retain, liquidated damages and resident engineers and inspectors fees, in accordance with the Contract. 29. Public Relations and Notices The Contractor shall appoint competent representative to receive and deal with any complaints from public in regard to safety, protection of traffic, condition of road surfaces along line of work, or nuisances on account of work. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer, Municipality and local police of name, address and telephone number of public relations representative within two (2) weeks after date of order to commence work. The Contractor shall deal promptly with all complaints received and carry out remedial actions to prevent further complaints. The Contractor shall give adequate notice of the schedule (timing and location) of movement of materials, construction activities, maintenance and repairs to affected landowners and occupants of properties adjacent to work areas. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately of any complaints of damage to property or personal injury and notify the Engineer as soon as possible of action taken in respect to any complaints and outcome of such actions. 30. Absence of Engineer and His Agent The Owner may appoint an engineer or firm of consulting engineers as agents of the Engineer for the purpose of inspecting the work performed under this Contract. In the absence of the Engineer or his duly appointed agent, any inspector who has been designated by the agent to inspect the work shall have full power to decide as to the manner of conducting and executing the work in every particular and the Contractor shall follow the instructions or orders of the person so designated. 31. Contractor s Absence In the absence of the Contractor from the works (whether permanent or temporary) he must provide and leave a competent and reliable superintendent in charge of the entire works for him at all times, notwithstanding the extent of subletting, and such person shall be considered as acting in his place, and all notices, communications, orders or instructions given or sent to or served upon such person shall be taken as served upon and received by the Contractor. GC - 14

84 32. Conveniences The Contractor must provide, and properly maintain in clean condition, suitable and convenient privy or water closet accommodation for his workers. From the first of November to the thirtieth of April, the Contractor shall provide at his own expense, an adequate, warm, comfortable shelter, accessible during the noon hour and inclement weather to all persons employed on the work, and its location shall be approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide for the sole use of the Engineer or his representatives, a field office in good condition, having a minimum area of 12 square metres, a wooden floor, a table 1.4 square metres in size, with a bench to accommodate at least four men, adequate lighting, a telephone and a fax machine which shall be maintained by the Contractor at his expense for the duration of the Contract. During winter months the office will be heated by the Contractor at his expense. The office shall be erected and moved as, where, and when the Engineer directs. On completion of works, or as otherwise directed by the Engineer, the field office shall be removed from the site by the Contractor and shall remain his property. 33. Work Areas The Owner has arranged for easements for construction, storage and access as shown on Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall install and maintain snow fencing along working and storage areas and access routes. The Contractor shall not enter upon or occupy with workers, tools or materials any lands other than public streets, roadways, right-of-way or easements shown on Contract Drawings except after written consent has been received from property owner. 34. Public Convenience and Safety If at any time the Engineer or his authorized representative considers the works to be unsafe he may order the Contractor to take measure forthwith to ensure adequate safety. Should the Contractor fail to take adequate measures, the Engineer or his representative may order the work to cease until such measures have been taken. The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional payment for, or an extension of time for the performance of the Contract by reason of, such safety measures. The fact that the Engineer or his representative has ordered or has failed to order additional safety measures shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the adequacy of the safety measures taken. The Contractor during the progress of the work shall keep the site and the work in as tidy a condition as practicable. He shall not deposit any material on any portion of street, GC - 15

85 sidewalk, boulevard, grass plot, or public property, without permission of the Engineer, and shall remove same without delay when and as directed by the Engineer. Upon completion of the work and subject to other requirements, he shall remove all false work, plant and surplus materials, as well as any rubbish accumulated on account of his operations and shall leave the site in a condition satisfactory to the Engineer. Unless all surplus material, plant, rubbish, false work, etc., are removed from timeto-time, when and as directed, the Engineer will proceed to do whatever is necessary to restore the site, and street, sidewalk, boulevard, grass plot, or Agency or public property to a tidy condition and will charge the cost thereof against the Contractor. Whenever and wherever any work is closed, suspended or stopped for the winter, all material of every description must be gathered up from the street, sidewalks, boulevards, and grass plots and removed therefrom and the site shall be left in a safe and tidy condition and shall be maintained in a safe condition until work is resumed. The method of use and the character of all explosives shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall ensure that the charges of explosives used by the Contractor and the time at which they are exploded shall be such as not to cause damage to person or property or to cause unreasonable inconvenience. Explosives shall be properly housed and protected as provided by law, and no explosives known to have deteriorated shall be used. Approved methods of handling and thawing of frozen explosives shall be followed, and the greatest care shall be exercised at all times by the Contractor in blasting operations. 35. Restoration Where the Contractor enters into the lands or buildings of the Province of Ontario or of any municipality or of any person or enters into any highway or road under the jurisdiction and control of any public authority for the purpose of making any survey, examination, investigation, inspection or other arrangement or lays any pipes or appurtenances in, upon, through, over or under any highway or road under the jurisdiction and control of any public authority and in so doing disturbs any such lands, buildings, highways or roads, such lands, buildings, highways or roads shall be restored to their original condition without unnecessary delay. 36. Drainage The Contractor shall keep all portions of his work properly and efficiently drained during construction and until completion, and he will be held responsible for all damage GC - 16

86 which may be caused or result from water backing up or flowing over, through, from or along any part of the works, or which any of his operations may cause to flow elsewhere. The Contractor shall dewater all worksites and excavations as necessary or as directed to enable the works to be constructed in a satisfactory manner. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional payment for compliance with the requirements hereof beyond the prices tendered for the construction of the works. 37. Barriers, Lights and Detours The Contractor must, at his own expense, and without further or other order, provide, erect and maintain all requisite barriers, fences or other proper protection; and must provide, keep and maintain watchmen and lights with red globes, as may be necessary or as may be ordered by the Engineer, in order to ensure safety to the public as well as to those engaged about the premises or works. Should the Contractor neglect to carry out the above requirement, the Engineer is hereby authorized to place such watchmen, lights, barriers, etc., as are required, and to charge the cost to the Contractor, without relieving the Contractor of any claims for damages or accident. The Contractor must (where it is practicable in the opinion of the Engineer) keep the roadway open for travel for the use of the public, for such width as the Engineer may direct. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is not practicable to keep a roadway open for the full flow of traffic, he may permit the Contractor to close or partially close such roadway and to provide for a detour of the traffic or a part thereof. In each such case and before putting into effect the closure or detour, the Contractor shall present his proposal for closure or detour to the municipality, all emergency services or other authority or authorities having jurisdiction over any of the roadways which will be affected by the proposed closure or detour and shall obtain the written authorization to such proposal of the said authority or authorities. The Contractor s proposal for closure shall conform to the Ontario Traffic Manual (latest addition). The Contractor must provide a sufficient number of NO THOROUGHFARE, DETOUR or other proper notices, which he must cause to be placed and maintained in good order in conspicuous places wherever any roadway, sidewalk, or thoroughfare is torn up or dangerous, and so long as it remains unsafe or unfinished. When any work is carried on at night, the Contractor must supply, at his own expense, a sufficient number of electric or other approved and efficient lights, to enable the work to be done in an efficient and satisfactory manner, and the Engineer shall have the power to order additional lights to be put on at the Contractor s expense if in the opinion of the Engineer, they are, or may be required. GC - 17

87 38. Protection of Work, Persons and Property.1 The Contractor, the Contractor's agents, and all workers employed by or under the control of the Contractor, including Subcontractors, shall protect the Work, persons, and property from damage or injury. The Contractor shall be responsible for all losses and damage that may arise as the result of the Contractor's operations under the Contract, unless indicated to the contrary below..2 The Contractor is responsible for the full cost of any necessary temporary protective work or works and the restoration of all damage where the Contractor damages the Work or property in the performance of the Contract. If the Contractor is not responsible for the damage that occurs to the Work or property, the Contractor shall restore such damage, and such work and payment shall be administered according to these General Conditions..3 The Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer of all damage and injuries that occur during the term of the Contract. The Contractor shall then investigate and report back to the Engineer within 15 Days of occurrence of incident, or as soon as possible..4 The Contractor shall not be responsible for loss and damage that occurs as a result of, a. War; b. Blockades and civil commotions; c. Errors in the Contract Documents; or d. Acts or omissions of the Owner, the Engineer, their agents and employees, or others not under the control of the Contractor, but within the Working Area with the Owner's permission. 39. Indemnification.1 The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Engineer, their elected officials, agents, officers, and employees from and against all claims, demands, losses, expenses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings by third parties, hereinafter called "claims", directly or indirectly arising or alleged to arise out of the performance of or the failure to perform the Work, provided such claims are, a. attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death or to damage to or destruction of tangible property; GC - 18

88 b. caused by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor or anyone for whose acts the Contractor may be liable; and c. made in writing within a period of 6 years from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work as set out in the Certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work or, where so specified in the Contract Documents, from the date of certification of Final Acceptance..2 The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from all and every claim for damages, royalties or fees for the infringement of any patented invention or copyright occasioned by the Contractor in connection with the Work performed or Material furnished by the Contractor under the Contract..3 The Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, their elected officials, agents, officers, and employees from and against all claims, demands, losses, expenses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings arising out of the Contractor's performance of the Contract that are attributable to a lack of or defect in title or an alleged lack of or defect in title to the Working Area..4 The Contractor expressly waives the right to indemnity for claims other than those stated in paragraph GC Contractor s Insurance 40.1 General.1 Without restricting the generality of subsection GC 39, Indemnification, the Contractor shall provide, maintain, and pay for the insurance coverages listed under clauses GC 40.2, GC 40.3 and GC Insurance coverage in clauses GC 40.4 and GC 40.6 shall only apply when so specified in the Contract Documents..2 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with an original Certificate of Insurance for each type of insurance coverage that is required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall ensure that the Engineer is, at all times in receipt of a valid Certificate of Insurance for each type of insurance coverage, in such amounts as specified in the Contract Documents. The Contractor will not be permitted to commence work until the Engineer is in receipt of such proof of insurance. The Engineer may withhold payments of monies due to the Contractor until the Contractor has provided the Engineer with original valid Certificates of Insurance as required by the provisions of the Contract Documents. GC - 19

89 40.2 General Liability Wrap-up Insurance.1 General liability insurance shall be in the name of the Contractor, with the Owner, Engineer and Project Managers named as additional insured, with limits of not less than five million dollars inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury, death, and damage to property including loss of use thereof, with a property damage deductible of not more than $5,000. The form of this insurance shall be the Insurance Bureau of Canada Form IBC Another form of insurance equal to or better than that required in IBC Form 2100 may be used, provided all the requirements listed in the Contract are included. Approval of this insurance shall be conditional upon the Contractor obtaining the services of an insurer licensed to underwrite insurance in the Province of Ontario and obtaining the insurer's certificate of equivalency to the required insurance..3 The Contractor shall maintain in force such policies of insurance specified by the Contract Documents at all times from the commencement of the Work until the end of any Warranty Period or as otherwise required by the Contract Documents..4 The Contractor shall submit annually to the Owner, proof of continuation of the completed operations coverage and, if the Contractor fails to do so, the limitation period for claiming indemnity described in paragraph GC 39.1 c), shall not be binding on the Owner..5 Should the Contractor decide not to employ Subcontractors for operations requiring the use of explosives for blasting, pile driving or caisson work, removal or weakening of support of property building or land, IBC Form 2100 as required shall include the appropriate endorsements..6 The policies shall be endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 60 Days written notice in advance of cancellation, change or amendment restricting coverage..7 Claims Made" insurance policies shall not be permitted Automobile Liability Insurance.1 Automobile liability insurance in respect of licensed vehicles shall have limits of not less than five million dollars inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury, death and damage to property, in the following forms endorsed to provide the Owner with not GC - 20

90 less than 60 Days written notice in advance of any cancellation, change, or amendment restricting coverage: a. standard non-owned automobile policy including standard contractual liability endorsement, and b. standard owner's form automobile policy providing third party liability and accident benefits insurance and covering licensed vehicles owned or operated by the Contractor Aircraft and Watercraft Liability Insurance Aircraft Liability Insurance.1 Aircraft liability insurance with respect to owned or non-owned aircraft used directly or indirectly in the performance of the Work, including use of additional premises, shall be subject to limits of not less than five million dollars inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury, death, and damage to property including loss of use thereof, and limits of not less than five million dollars for aircraft passenger hazard. Such insurance shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner. The policies shall be endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 30 Days written notice in advance of cancellation, change, or amendment restricting coverage Watercraft Liability Insurance.1 Watercraft liability insurance with respect to owned or non-owned watercraft used directly or indirectly in the performance of the Work, including use of additional premises, shall be subject to limits of not less than five million dollars inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury, death, and damage to property including loss of use thereof. Such insurance shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner. The policies shall be endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 30 Days written notice in advance of cancellation, change, or amendment restricting coverage Property and Boiler Insurance Property Builder s Risk Insurance.1 All risks property insurance shall be in the name of the Contractor, with the Owner and the Engineer named as additional insureds, insuring not less than the sum of the amount of the Contract price and the full value, as may be stated in the Contract Documents, of Material that is specified to be provided by the Owner for incorporation into the Work, with a deductible not exceeding $100,000. This GC - 21

91 insurance shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner and shall be maintained continuously until 10 Days after the date of Final Acceptance of the Work, as set out in the Final Acceptance Certificate Boiler Insurance.1 Boiler insurance insuring the interests of the Contractor, the Owner and the Engineer for not less than the replacement value of boilers and pressure vessels forming part of the Work, shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner. This insurance shall be maintained continuously from commencement of use or operation of the property insured until 10 Days after the date of Final Acceptance of the Work, as set out in the Final Acceptance Certificate Use and Occupancy of the Work Prior to Completion.1 Should the Owner wish to use or occupy part or all of the Work prior to Substantial Performance, the Owner shall give 30 Days written notice to the Contractor of the intended purpose and extent of such use or occupancy. Prior to such use or occupancy, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing of the additional premium cost, if any, to maintain property and boiler insurance, which shall be at the Owner's expense. If because of such use or occupancy the Contractor is unable to provide coverage, the Owner upon written notice from the Contractor and prior to such use or occupancy shall provide, maintain, and pay for property and boiler insurance insuring the full value of the Work, including coverage for such use or occupancy, and shall provide the Contractor with proof of such insurance. The Contractor shall refund to the Owner the unearned premiums applicable to the Contractor's policies upon termination of coverage..2 The policies shall provide that, in the event of a loss or damage, payment shall be made to the Owner and the Contractor as their respective interests may appear. The Contractor shall act on behalf of both the Owner and the Contractor for the purpose of adjusting the amount of such loss or damage payment with the insurers. When the extent of the loss or damage is determined, the Contractor shall proceed to restore the Work. Loss or damage shall not affect the rights and obligations of either party under the Contract, except that the Contractor shall be entitled to such reasonable extension of Contract Time relative to the extent of the loss or damage as the Engineer may decide in consultation with the Contractor. GC - 22

92 .3 The Owner will be entering and occupying various areas under construction as part of normal plant operations. Contractor insurance should include for this situation without additional cost Payment for Loss or Damage.1 The Contractor shall be entitled to receive from the Owner, in addition to the amount due under the Contract, the amount at which the Owner's interest in restoration of the Work has been appraised, such amount to be paid as the restoration of the Work proceeds, and in accordance with the requirements of Section GC 48, Measurements. In addition, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive from the payments made by the insurers the amount of the Contractor's interest in the restoration of the Work..2 The Contractor shall be responsible for deductible amounts under the policies, except where such amounts may be excluded from the Contractor's responsibility by the terms of this Contract..3 In the event of a loss or damage to the Work arising from the action or omission of the Owner or others, the Owner shall pay the Contractor the cost of restoring the Work as the restoration of the Work proceeds and in accordance with the requirements of Section GC 48, Measurements Contractor's Equipment Insurance All risks Contractor's equipment insurance covering construction machinery and equipment used by the Contractor for the performance of the Work, including boiler insurance on temporary boilers and pressure vessels, shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner and shall not allow subrogation claims by the insurer against the Owner. The policies shall be endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 30 Days written notice in advance of cancellation, change, or amendment restricting coverage. Subject to satisfactory proof of financial capability by the Contractor for self-insurance of the Contractor's Equipment, the Owner agrees to waive the equipment insurance requirement, and for the purpose of this Contract, the Contractor shall be deemed to be insured. This policy shall be amended to provide permission for the Contractor to grant prior releases with respect to damage to the Contractor's Equipment. GC - 23

93 40.7 Insurance Requirements and Duration.1 Unless specified otherwise, the duration of each insurance policy shall be from the date of commencement of the Work until 10 Days after the date of Final Acceptance of the Work, as set out in the Final Acceptance Certificate..2 The Contractor shall provide the Owner, on a form acceptable to the Owner, proof of insurance prior to commencement of the Work and signed by an officer of the Contractor and either the underwriter or the broker..3 The Contractor shall, on request, promptly provide the Owner with a certified true copy of each insurance policy exclusive of information pertaining to premium or premium bases used by the insurer to determine the cost of the insurance. The certified true copy shall include a signature by an officer of the Contractor and, in addition, a signature by an officer of the insurer or the underwriter or the broker..4 Where a policy is renewed, the Contractor shall provide the Owner, on a form acceptable to the Owner, renewed proof of insurance immediately following completion of renewal..5 Unless specified otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for the payment of deductible amounts under the policies..6 If the Contractor fails to provide or maintain insurance as required in section GC 40, Contractor s Insurance, or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, then the Owner shall have the right to provide and maintain such insurance and give evidence thereof to the Contractor. The Owner's cost thereof shall be payable by the Contractor to the Owner on demand..7 If the Contractor fails to pay the cost of the insurance placed by the Owner within 30 Days of the date on which the Owner made a formal demand for reimbursement of such costs, the Owner may deduct the costs thereof from monies which are due or may become due to the Contractor. GC - 24

94 41. Notice to Contractor Any notice or communication to the Contractor shall be deemed to be well and sufficiently given and served if handed to the Contractor or any of his clerks or gents, or if posted or sent to the address given in the Agreement, or to his domicile or usual place of business, or to the place where the work is to be or is being carried on, or if posted to or left at his last known address, and any papers so left, sent or addressed shall be considered to be, and to have been legally served upon the Contractor. In any written or printed notice to the Contractor in respect of general, special, or other repairs, or of any work of any nature required to be done under any of the provisions of the Contract, or of any other matter, it shall not be obligatory upon the Engineer to specify minutely or in detail everything required, nor to specify by measurement the exact extent thereof, or the precise spot or spots where the work or material may be defective or faulty or where any of the requirements of the Specifications have not been observed; but a reference in such notice to the clause or clauses bearing upon the matter, and a description of the locality in general terms, and sufficiently clear, in the opinion of the Engineer, to indicate where the defect or trouble exists, shall be deemed to be, and shall be, ample notice. 42. Rectification and Maintenance (a) The Contractor guarantees and warrants that with ordinary wear and tear the work shall, until the end of the period of maintenance, remain in such condition as will meet with the approval of the Engineer, and that he will be responsible for rectification in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer, and for the cost thereof, of any imperfect work due to or arising from materials, equipment or plant incorporated into or used in the construction thereof, or due to or arising from workmanship or methods of construction, that is discovered by any means at any time prior to the issuance of the Final Certificate. The Engineer shall decide as to the nature, extent, cause of, and responsibility for imperfect work and the necessity for and the method of rectification thereof. (b) Prior to the expiration of the period of 12 months from the date of substantial performance, as set out in the Certificate of Substantial Performance, the Engineer or his agent shall carry out an inspection of the work and shall notify the Contractor of any imperfections therein disclosed by such inspection provided that the failure of the Engineer or his agent to carry out such an inspection or to give such notification shall not relieve the Contractor or his surety from any responsibility or obligation under, or any term of provision of, the Contract. (c) If, as a result of imperfect work for which the Contractor is responsible, the Owner incurs any costs, and without limiting the generality of the forgoing, including costs GC - 25

95 of engineering and investigation and all costs of administration, or sustains damage or loss of any kind, the Contractor and his surety or sureties shall be liable to the Owner for such costs, damage and loss. The amount of such costs, damage or loss shall be determined or estimated by the Engineer and, upon such determination or estimation, shall be deemed to be Monies payable to the Owner as provided here and may be deducted or collected by the Owner as therein provided for. (d) No payment, certificate, document, act, failure to act, statement or representation of, by or on behalf of the Owner or its employees or agents, no dealing, transaction, forbearance or forgiveness which may take place between the Contractor or his surety or sureties and the Owner or its employees or agents and no exercise or forbearance to exercise any of the rights or powers of the Owner or of the Engineer under the Contract, other than a release duly executed by the Owner, shall release the Contractor or his surety or sureties from any term or provision of or any responsibility, obligation or liability under the Contract, or otherwise, or shall waive or impair any of the rights and powers of the Owner or of the Engineer. (e) The Contractor shall, at any time or times prior to the issuance of the Final Certificate and when required to do so by the Engineer, make such openings, tests, inspections, excavations, examinations, or other investigations in, through, of or in the vicinity of the work as the Engineer may direct and shall, if required, make good again, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, any openings, excavations or disturbances of any property, real or personal, resulting therefrom. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any imperfect work for which the Contractor is responsible is found in the work by such investigations, the cost of such investigations and such making good shall be borne by the Contractor; but if, in the opinion of the Engineer, no such imperfect work is found by such investigations, the said cost shall be borne by the Owner, except as otherwise provided herein. 43. Contract Bonds The Contractor shall, unless otherwise directed by the Owner, furnish to the Owner contract bonds in accordance with the requirements of the Information for Tenderers. 44. Contractor s Discharge of Liabilities The Contractor shall discharge all liabilities incurred by him for labour, materials or services, used or reasonably required for use in the performance of this Contract on the date upon which each becomes due. GC - 26

96 The Construction Lien Act, R.S.O. 1990, Chapter C.30, any amendments thereto and any regulations made thereunder apply to the performance of this Contract, but do not limit the provisions of this Contract, and the Owner has all the rights and powers set out therein and in the Contract. The Contractor shall cause every Subcontractor engaged in the performance of this Contract to discharge all liabilities incurred by such Subcontractor for labour, materials or services used or reasonably required for use in the performance of this Contract. Workers employed by a Subcontractor shall be paid in full at intervals not less frequently than semimonthly and other liabilities of the Subcontractor, as aforesaid, shall be discharged on the date upon which each becomes due. At the request of the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish the Owner with evidence satisfactory to it that his liabilities and those of the Subcontractors, as aforesaid, have been discharged. The Owner may, in writing, require the Contractor to send to it, by registered mail, with fifteen days from the date of the mailing of the demand, a list of the names and addresses of and the amounts owing to his creditors in a form satisfactory to the Engineer. No payment to which the Contractor is otherwise entitled under this Contract shall in the discretion of the Owner be due and payable to him so long as he or any of such Subcontractors are in default under this Section, and upon such default occurring, the Engineer may notify the Contractor to discontinue all work under the Contract and the Owner shall have the same rights and privileges as are provided herein. The Owner may after notice in writing to the Contractor and his Surety, if any, (a) pay any such liability of the Contractor and of the Subcontractors, as aforesaid or (b) make a direct payment at any time, with or without default, to a creditor of the Contractor or of a Subcontractor arising out of these works, and in each such case deduct the amount so paid from any monies due or that may become due to the Contractor on any account, and, if there are insufficient monies due or to become due to the Contractor to permit of such deduction, the Contractor shall pay to the Owner upon demand an amount sufficient to make up the deficiency. In making payments under this Section the Owner may act upon any evidence that it deems sufficient and may compromise any disputed liability. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in duplicate, together with each monthly statement, except the first one, as required herein, a Statutory Declaration re Payment of Accounts in the form bound herein (or in such other form as may be required by the Owner) signed by an authorized signing officer of the Contractor stating that all workers employed by the Contractor in the performance of the Contract have been paid in full and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract not less frequently than semi-monthly and up to an including the pay-day immediately preceding the date of the declaration and that GC - 27

97 all other liabilities incurred by the Contractor arising out of work performed or materials supplied as set forth in the Monthly Estimate relating to the last monthly statement previously submitted have been discharged. The Owner may withhold approval of a Monthly Payment Certificate if the Contractor fails to submit such a declaration or if the Contractor submits an improperly completed declaration. Before any holdback will be released to the Contractor the statutory declaration as required herein must have been submitted to the Owner by the Contractor. The Owner may in its discretion require the Contractor to submit such additional statutory declaration relating to discharge of liabilities as the Owner may require before the Owner will release to the Contractor any remaining holdback. 45. Commencement and Completion The work shall not be commenced nor shall any materials for incorporation into the work be delivered to the work site until the Owner has requested the Contractor to execute the Agreement and the Engineer has issued to the Contractor a written order to commence work. Following such request and order, the work shall be commenced within seven days after the date of the said order and shall be continuously carried on to completion, (subject as herein provided) and shall be completed and full possession thereof given the Owner within the period provided in the Contract, unless an extension of time, in writing, shall be allowed by the Engineer in which case, it shall be carried on to completion, and possession given to the Owner within the additional period so allowed. If ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor and his agents and employees shall be required to work continuously throughout the twenty-four (24) hours of the day for six days per week in the performance of the work under the Contract. In case the Contractor shall fail to complete the work in accordance with the Contract and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, within the time or times specified, the Contractor shall pay to the Owner (in addition to amounts payable by the Owner in respect of site supervision of the work) the sum specified in the Contract for each and every day that the work or works shall remain unfinished after the time so specified; which said sum or sums is hereby agreed upon by the parties hereto as the liquidated damages that the Owner will suffer by reason of said delay and default, and not as a penalty; and the Owner s right to recover any other kind of damages or losses which were not known or calculable when the liquidated damages where determined is preserved. The Owner may deduct and retain the amounts of such liquidated damages out of the monies which may be due or become due to the Contractor under the Contract, as provided herein, entitled, Monies Due Owner. GC - 28

98 In the event of delay caused by strikes or combinations on the part of the workers employed, or by any act of the Owner, or from such other cause as, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor cannot reasonably be held responsible for, or, in the event of extra or additional work being ordered by the Engineer, the Engineer may allow such additional time for completion as he may deem fair and reasonable, provided the Contractor applies in writing for an extension of time at the time such delay occurs or such extra or additional work is ordered and satisfies the Engineer that he is justly entitled to a further time allowance. Notwithstanding the time allowed for completion of the work, if in the opinion of the Engineer the rate of progress of any part or parts of the work or during any period or periods during which work is being carried on or is required to be carried on is unsatisfactory and if amounts are payable by the Owner in respect of site supervision of the work, traffic control, compensation or damages by reason, in the opinion of the Engineer, of such unsatisfactory rate of progress, the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for the payment of such amounts and such amounts may be deducted by the Owner from any money due or that may become due to the Contractor under the Contract. No progress or interim estimate or certificate shall release the Contractor or his surety from any responsibility, or be taken as evidence of any such release, or as acceptance of any work or material, or as a waiver of any condition herein. The whole work and every portion and detail thereof shall, during construction, be protected by the Contractor from damage from any cause whatsoever, and shall at the time of completion, be put and left by the Contractor in good and satisfactory condition, finished in all respects, and, at that time, must be fully up to the requirements of the Contract in every particular; all surplus and refuse material and rubbish removed from the vicinity of the works; the premises left in a neat and tidy condition; all damage to adjacent property, pavements, foot-walks, beaches, boulevards and sodding, or other things, injured or interfered with by the Contractor or his agents or employees, made good, and, every other requirement of the Contract complied with. In case of the Contractor s failure to finish the work properly and fully, and as required, or in case of the work, or any part thereof, being taken out of his hands, as provided in these General Conditions, the Engineer may proceed to finish the work for him, as his agent in this respect, and at his expense, or proceed, as provided herein, entitled, Non-fulfillment of Contract. 46. Certificates of Completion a) The Contract shall be considered as substantially performed when: GC - 29

99 (1) the works have satisfactorily passed the required inspection and testing, and are ready for use or are being used for the purposes intended, and (2) the works are capable of being completed or, where there is a known defect, corrected at a cost of not more than: (i) 3 percent of the first $500,000 of the Contract Price plus, (ii) 2 percent of the next $500,000 of the Contract Price plus, (iii) 1 percent of the balance of the Contract Price. (b) Where the works or a substantial part thereof are ready for use or are being used for the purposes intended but part of the works cannot be completed expeditiously for reasons beyond the control of the Contractor or where the Owner and the Contractor agree to delay completion of the works, the cost, as determined by the Engineer, of completing the outstanding work shall be deducted from the Contract Price in determining substantial performance and the value of the work completed. (c) As soon as, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contract has been substantially performed in accordance with the foregoing, the Engineer will issue a Certificate of Substantial Performance. (d) The Engineer shall set out in the Certificate of Substantial Performance the date on which the Contract was substantially performed and within seven days after signing the said certificate he shall provide a copy to the Contractor. (e) Upon receipt of a copy of the Certificate of Substantial Performance, the Contractor shall forthwith, as required by The Construction Lien Act, publish a copy of the said certificate in a construction trade newspaper. Such publication shall include placement in the Daily Commercial News. Alternatively, in order to expedite payment to the Contractor and to creditors under the Contractor, the Engineer will, if so requested by the Contractor, arrange on behalf of the Contractor to publish the said certificate in the Daily Commercial News within seven days after signing the certificate. Such arrangement shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility under the said Act. The cost of publication shall be borne by the Contractor. (f) Where the Contractor fails to publish a copy of the Certificate of Substantial performance as required above within seven days after receiving a copy of the said certificate signed by the Engineer, the Owner may publish a copy of the certificate at the Contractor s expense. GC - 30

100 (g) Except as otherwise provided in the Construction Lien Act, the 45-day period prior to the release of holdback as referred to herein, shall commence from the date of publication of the Certificate of Substantial Performance as provided for in (e) and (f) above. (h) The works shall be deemed to be completed when: (1) the works have satisfactorily passed the required inspection and testing, and (2) the cost of completion of all outstanding work and known defects is not more than the lesser of: (i) one percent of the Contract Price, and (ii) $1, (i) As soon as, in the opinion of the Engineer, the works have been completed in accordance with paragraph (h) above, the Engineer will issue a Certificate of Completion on submission by the Contractor of the following documents: (1) The Contractor s Final Claim. (2) An up-to-date release by the Contractor in a form satisfactory to the Engineer releasing the Owner from all further claims relating to the Contract. (3) An up-to-date Statutory Declaration in a form satisfactory to the Engineer that all liabilities incurred by the Contractor and his Subcontractors in carrying out the Contract have been discharged and that all liens in respect of the Contract and Subcontracts thereunder have expired or have been satisfied, discharged or provided for by payment into Court. (j) The Engineer shall set out in the Certificate of Completion the date on which the works were completed and within seven days of signing the said certificate he shall provide a copy to the Contractor. (k) Payment due to the Contractor following issuance of the Certificate of Completion shall be as provided for herein. (l) On the expiration of a period of 12 months from the date of substantial performance, as set out in the Certificate of Substantial Performance, and after all known imperfect work has been rectified in accordance with the Contract and to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the Engineer is satisfied to the best of his knowledge that the Contractor has discharged all his obligations under the Contract, the Engineer will issue the final Certificate approving the release to the Contractor of the maintenance security, less any deduction as provided for in the Contract. GC - 31

101 (m) On the expiration of a period of 12 months from the date of substantial performance, as set out in the Certificate of Substantial Performance, the Engineer may approve the release to the Contractor of a part of the maintenance security on such terms and conditions as the Engineer deems advisable notwithstanding that the Final Certificate has not been issued and that all imperfect work has not been rectified in accordance with the Contract. (n) The Engineer may in his discretion direct or approve that the works covered by the Contract be divided into two or more parts for the purpose of issuing Certificates of Completion and releasing holdback monies. In that event, the Contractor shall submit documentation as set out above in respect of each such part. 47. Release of Holdback to Subcontractors Notwithstanding that the Contract as a whole has not yet been substantially performed, the Engineer may, if requested in writing by the Contractor, approve the completion of a Subcontract and the release to a Subcontractor through the Contractor of the 10% holdback retained by the Owner in respect of the work covered by the said Subcontract provided that: (a) the Contractor certifies: (1) that the said Subcontract has been completed satisfactorily, or (2) that the said Subcontract has been completed satisfactorily except for work not exceeding in value the lesser of (i) one percent of the Subcontract Price, and (ii) $1, and gives satisfactory reasons why the uncompleted work is still outstanding. (b) the Engineer is satisfied: (1) that the said Subcontract has been completed satisfactorily, or (2) that the said Subcontract has been completed satisfactorily to the fullest extent reasonably possible at that date and that the work remaining to be completed does not exceed in value the sum derived from (a)(2) above. (3) that all required or necessary inspection and testing of the works covered by the said Subcontract have been carried out and that the results are satisfactory. GC - 32

102 (c) the Contractor has furnished to the Engineer: (1) a release by the Contractor in a form satisfactory to the Engineer releasing the Owner from all further claims (excepting holdback monies) relating to the said Subcontract. (2) evidence satisfactory to the Engineer that the said Subcontractor has discharged all liabilities incurred by him in carrying out the said Subcontract and that all liens in respect of the completed Subcontract have expired or have been satisfied, discharged or provided for by payment into Court. (3) a satisfactory clearance certificate or letter from the Workers Compensation Board relating to the said Subcontractor. (4) the required maintenance security in respect of the said Subcontract as provided in Section 53 herein. (d) (e) The Engineer retains sufficient money to cover the cost of completing any work which remains uncompleted under the said Subcontract. If he so requests, the Engineer if furnished with a photocopy of the Contract between the Contractor and the said Subcontractor and with a satisfactory statement showing the total amount due from the Contractor to the said Subcontractor. The Engineer shall, within seven days after he approves a certificate wherein it is certified that the Subcontract has been completed, give a copy of the said certificate to the Contractor and to the Subcontractor concerned. On receipt of the holdback monies from the Owner, the Contractor shall forthwith pass to the Subcontractor concerned the payment due under the said Subcontract and shall pass to the Engineer a copy of the transmittal letter showing the amount of the said payment. The period of maintenance for the work carried out under the said Subcontract shall continue until the issuance of the final Certificate for the Contract. Release of holdback monies by the Owner in respect of a Subcontract in accordance with the foregoing shall not relieve the Contractor or his surety of any of their GC - 33

103 responsibilities and shall not be made until a period of 45 days has elapsed from the date of approval of the certificate certifying the said Subcontract to be completed. 48. Measurements (a) Approximate monthly measurements of the works completed under the Contract shall be made by the Engineer at the end of each calendar month except where the work has been delayed or suspended. An authorized representative of the Contractor shall assist the engineer in taking such measurements and shall furnish all particulars required by the Engineer. The Engineer shall notify the Contractor when such a measurement will be made. (b) The said monthly measurements shall not bind the Engineer in any manner in the preparation of his final measurement of the works constructed by the Contractor under this Contract, but shall be construed and held to be approximate only. (c) The final measurement shall be prepared in detail as soon as the whole of the works have been completed, and this final measurement shall be approved and accepted in writing by the Engineer. Thereafter the Completion Payment Certificate shall be issued and payment shall be made in accordance with Section 52 hereof. 49. Alterations, Extras, Deductions and Claims The Engineer shall have the right to make or order any alterations and changes as he may deem advisable at any time before or during the prosecution of the works, in any line, grade, plan or detail thereof, or to suspend or omit any portion of the work, or to increase or decrease the dimensions of any part of the work or works, or to vary in any way the work herein contracted for, or to order any additional or extra work to be done, or additional or extra materials to be furnished; and the Contractor shall, in pursuance of written orders of the Engineer to that effect, proceed with, carry out and execute the works as directed, and shall supply such additional materials, and do such additional or extra work as the Engineer requires in pursuance of such orders, without being entitled to any extension of time for completion or any additional payment of account thereof, except only as herein provided. In each and every case where additional or extra work or materials of any kind is ordered to be done or supplied, or where the Contractor does or supplies, or contemplates doing or supplying any work or material which he considers extra or beyond the requirements of the Contract, or upon which he intends claiming any extra or additional payment, he is required, before commencing any such work, or procuring any such material, to obtain from the Engineer a written order therefore, stating: GC - 34

104 (a) (b) that the same is an extra and will be paid for as such, and also clearly defining the nature of such extra work or material, and the amount the Contractor is to receive therefor, or the terms under which the same is to be paid for; or that the same is considered to be part of the Contract and not an extra and that no additional payment shall be made therefore; and the Contractor shall also, before beginning any such work or commencing to deliver any such material, notify the Engineer in writing of his intention to commence work thereon or delivery thereof, so that a proper account or record of the same may be kept by the Engineer. If the Contractor proposes to claim additional payment for work or materials which the Engineer considers to be a part of the Contract and not an extra, the Contractor shall so notify the Engineer in writing before commencing such work or delivering such materials. In case of the Contractor s neglect or failure to observe fully and faithfully the above conditions in this section contained, he shall forfeit all right to payment therefor which he otherwise might have had, and shall not make any claim in respect thereof, and if made, the Engineer may reject the same as invalid. 50. Valuation of Variations (a) The Engineer shall determine the amount, if any, to be added to, or deducted from, the sum named in the Tender, in respect of any extra or additional work done, or work omitted by his order. All such work shall be valued at the price as set out in the Schedule of Items and Prices or the Schedule of Additional Unit Prices if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the same shall be applicable. (b) If the Contract does not contain any prices applicable to the extra, additional, or omitted work, then the Contractor and Engineer may agree on a price for such work, in which case the price shall be comparable to prices quoted on work of a similar nature. (c) If the methods of evaluating extras described in (a) and (b) herein are clearly inapplicable, then the Engineer may direct that extra work shall be done by the Contractor on a cost-plus basis providing for payment as follows: 1) The actual cost of all labour (including allowance for holiday pay, unemployment insurance, levy by Workers compensation Board, and other contributions made by the employer to an employee as required by law or a contract, required directly for the performance of extra work) and the actual GC - 35

105 cost of all materials including transportation charges required directly in the extra work plus: a) 20% of the same when the total value of the work described in items (1) and (2) prior to markup is less than $3,000. b) 15% of the same when the total value of the work described in items (1) and (2) prior to markup is less than $10,000. c) 5% of the same when the total value of the work described in items (1) and (2) prior to markup is in excess of $10,000. 2) A rental rate based on 70% of the published OPSS 127 rates for machinery and heavy equipment, such as tractors, bulldozers, ditching machines, air compressors, concrete mixers and graders, for the actual time required in operation for the performance of the extra work, to which no percentage shall be added. If the Contractor is directed to carry out extra or additional work on a costplus basis and he proposes to have such work or a part thereof carried out by a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, he shall notify the Engineer to that effect before commencing the said work. Provided that the Contractor s proposal and all Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors involved have first been approved by the Engineer, the Contractor may claim payment from the Owner for such work as follows: (i) In respect of work carried out by the Contractor s own forces, an amount equal to the sum of the amounts provided for under (1), (2) and (3) above. (ii) In respect of work carried out by a Subcontractor s forces, an amount equal to the sum of the amounts provided for under (1), (2) and (3) above plus 5% of such sum. (iii) In respect of work carried out by a Sub-subcontractor s forces, an amount equal to the sum of the amounts provided for under (1), (2) and (3) above plus 5% of such sum plus a further 5% of the total so obtained. (d) The compensation provided for above shall be payment in full for all charges including superintendence, overhead, the use of small tools and profit. No compensation for extra work or material shall be allowed unless such work or material is ordered in writing by the Engineer. Whenever any extra work is being performed in accordance with (c) herein the Contractor shall, each working day, report to the Engineer, in writing, in full detail, the amount and cost of the labour and materials GC - 36

106 supplied and used in carrying out each order for extra work on the preceding working day, and no claim for compensation for extra work or materials will be considered or allowed unless such report shall have been made. The Engineer will not allow any compensation for the cost of repairs to equipment of any kind or for damage to anything used in performing any such extra work or making any such alterations. 51. Books and Records of the Contractor (a) The Contractor shall keep proper books and records showing names, trades, and addresses of all workers in his employ and wages paid to, and the time worked by, such workers; also records, books, and invoices showing all costs, expenditures, payments, settlements, receipts, and balances in connection with the construction of the works. (b) All records of the Contractor relevant to the valuation of the works including payrolls, time books of account, invoices, and statements, shall be maintained on the site or at some other place approved by the Engineer and shall be open at all reasonable times for inspection by the Engineer. The Contractor shall in every way assist such inspection for the purpose of establishing and determining labour costs, the cost of extra work, and progress payments to be made. 52. Payment (a) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer at the end of each calendar month a fully itemized statement showing the estimated value of the permanent work executed up to the end of the month based on the unit prices shown in the Contract and the section covering Valuation of Variations, together with a fully itemized statement of the value of major items of material and equipment on site for incorporation into the permanent works. (b) From each monthly statement including the statement based on the final measurement, the Engineer will prepare a Monthly Payment Certificate and will include therein so much as he considers fair and reasonable in respect of the value of the work executed and of the major items of material and equipment on site. (c) Ten percent (10%) of all monies due the Contractor in accordance with the Monthly Payment Certificate up to a limit of 10% of the contract price, shall be retained by the Owner (except as may otherwise be provided for in the Contract) and shall be termed the holdback. (d) The Monthly Payment Certificate will show the Engineer s gross valuation of the work performed and materials supplied, the deduction of the appropriate amount of holdback, the previous payments to the Contractor and the amount due him. GC - 37

107 (e) No progress estimate or payment shall be held to bind the Engineer in his valuation of the work on its completion and the Engineer may on any Monthly Payment Certificate make correction or modification to any previous certificate he has made. (f) At the time of issuance by the Engineer of the Certificate of Substantial Performance in accordance with Section 46(c), the Engineer shall: (1) Notify the Contractor of the value of the maintenance security required by Section 53. (2) Prepare a Substantial Performance Payment Certificate showing: (i) the value of work completed to-date. (ii) the value of outstanding or uncompleted work. (iii) the value of the required maintenance security. (iv) the amount of the 10% holdback (allowing for any previous release of holdback to the Contractor in respect of completed Subcontracts and deliveries of pre-selected equipment). (v) the amount due the Contractor. (3) Prepare a Payment Certificate releasing to the Contractor the 10% holdback due in respect of work performed up to the date of substantial performance. Subject to the provisions of the Construction Lien Act and the submission by the Contractor of the following documents such holdback shall become payable after 45 days from the date of publication of the Certificate of Substantial Performance: (i) A written undertaking by the Contractor to complete expeditiously any outstanding work and to discharge all unfulfilled obligations under the Contract. (ii) The Contractor s final claim (except in respect of outstanding work). (iii) A release by the Contractor in a form satisfactory to the Engineer releasing the Owner from all further claims relating to the Contract (except in respect of outstanding work). (iv) A Statutory Declaration in a form satisfactory to the Engineer that all liabilities incurred by the Contractor and his Subcontractors in carrying out the Contract have been discharged and that all liens in respect of the Contract and Subcontracts thereunder have expired or have been satisfied, discharged or provided for by payment into Court. (v) A satisfactory Clearance Certificate from the Workers Compensation Board. GC - 38

108 (g) At the time of issuance by the Engineer of the Certificate of Completion in accordance with the General Conditions, the Engineer shall: (1) Prepare a Completion Payment Certificate showing: (i) the Final Contract Price. (ii) the amount of the further 10% holdback (based on the value of further work completed over and above the value of work completed shown in the Substantial Performance Payment Certificate referred to in (f) above). (iii) the value of the required maintenance security. (iv) the amount due the Contractor. (2) Prepare a Payment Certificate releasing to the Contractor the further 10% holdback. Subject to the provisions of The Construction Lien Act and the submission by the Contractor of the documents required herein, such further 10% holdback shall become payable after 45 days from the date of completion of the works as established by the Certificate of Completion. (h) If, when the Engineer issues the Final Certificate at the end of the period of maintenance, any monies are still being retained by the Owner as maintenance security or for other reasons, the Engineer will issue a Final Payment Certificate releasing the monies due the Contractor. 53. Maintenance Security The Contractor shall provide to the Owner for the duration of the period of maintenance, a maintenance security the value of which shall be derived from the following table: CONTRACT PRICE FROM $ TO $ Less than 0.1 M VALUE OF MAINTENANCE SECURITY $ 4% of Final Contract Price 0.1 M 0.5 M 4,000 on first 0.1 M + 3.0% on next 0.4 M 0.5 M 1.0 M 16,000 on first 0.5 M + 2.4% on next 0.5 M 1.0 M 2.0 M 28,000 on first 1.0 M + 2.2% on next 1.0 M 2.0 M 4.0 M 50,000 on first 2.0 M + 2.0% on next 2.0 M 4.0 M 6.0 M 90,000 on first 4.0 M + 1.8% on next 2.0 M 6.0 M 10.0 M 126,000 on first 6.0 M + 1.5% on next 4.0 M Over 10.0M 186,000 on first 10.0M + 1.0% on balance GC - 39

109 The maintenance security, which is at no time a part of the statutory holdback, shall be retained by the Owner in increments from monies that would otherwise be payable to the Contractor, commencing during the latter part of the period of construction, so that by the date of substantial performance of the contract the full value of the required maintenance security has been retained. Except as otherwise provided hereunder, the maintenance security, less any deductions made therefrom as provided for in the Contract, shall be paid to the Contractor following the issuance by the Engineer of the Final Certificate at the end of the period of maintenance. The Contractor may apply in writing to the Engineer at the time of substantial performance to substitute for the monies retained as the maintenance security an alternative security of equivalent or greater value comprising: (a) (b) one or more irrevocable letters of credit or another readily negotiable security. Acceptance of any such alternative shall be at the discretion of the Engineer and the Solicitor for the Owner. Following receipt and acceptance of any such alternative, the Engineer shall release to the Contractor the monies previously retained for maintenance security purposes. The Engineer may, in his discretion, allow the total maintenance security to be made up in part of monies retained under the Contract and in part of an alternative maintenance security as indicated in (a) and (b) above provided that the total value of such parts, as determined by the Engineer, shall be not less than the required value as derived from the table set out above. Such alternative maintenance security or the monies derived therefrom, less any deductions made as provided for in the Contract, shall be released to the Contractor following the issuance by the Engineer of the Final Certificate at the end of the period of maintenance. Where the Engineer proposes to release the statutory holdback to a Subcontractor through the Contractor as provided for herein, the Engineer shall arrange for the required maintenance security in respect of the said Subcontract, as referred to here, to be provided by a retention from monies that would otherwise be payable to the Contractor. The value of GC - 40

110 the required maintenance security shall be determined by applying to the value of the Subcontract work the same effective percentage retention, derived from the foregoing table, as applies to the Contract as a whole. The Contract may apply in writing to the Engineer to substitute for the maintenance security referred to in the preceding paragraph an irrevocable letter of credit in the name of the Contractor. Following the substantial performance of the Contract, the Engineer may require the Contractor to consolidate all letters of credit provided pursuant to the foregoing into one or two letters of credit covering the Contract as a whole. The Contractor shall allow his Subcontractors to provide letters of credit to the Contractor in conformity with the foregoing procedures. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with copies of any or all such letters of credit on request. 54. Payment of Interest Delay by the Owner in making payment to the Contractor shall be deemed not to be a breach of contract by the Owner. In the event that, following substantial performance of the Contract or completion of the Contract as established by the relevant certificate issued by the Engineer, payment by the Owner to the Contractor in respect of work done or release of holdback is delayed by the Owner, the Contractor shall be entitled to payment of interest from a date or dates derived from the following: (a) Payment for Work Done, including any monies owning by the Owner to the Contractor pursuant to an order of an arbitrator: A date 45 days after the date when the Contractor satisfactorily complete submission of the documentation required by the Contractor and complied with the other requirements of the Contract. (b) Release of Statutory Holdback: A date 30 days after the date established by herein, as the earliest date for release of holdback. GC - 41

111 The applicable rate of interest shall be that established from time-to-time by the Minister of Finance of the Province of Ontario. 55. Suspension of Work The Engineer may, by an order in writing, at any time stop or suspend any part of the work part of the work, or direct any portion to be commenced or completed in priority to any other part or portion, or may cancel the order to proceed with the work, or with any part thereof, and the Contractor shall not thereby be entitled to any additional payment, or to claim for loss of profit or anticipated profit, or for damages or otherwise by reason of such order except as may be allowed herein. When in the opinion of the Engineer, it is deemed advisable for any reason to discontinue the work, or any part thereof, for the winter, the Contractor must, on notice from the Engineer of the required discontinuation, forthwith place the work in proper and satisfactory condition for the accommodation and safety of the public and for the effectual protection of the work against damage from rain, snow, frost, ice, or other causes, and must so maintain the work. When work is ordered or permitted by the Engineer to be done during freezing weather, the Contractor shall provide the necessary means for heating, and all the materials required in the work shall be heated. Unless otherwise directed in writing by the Engineer, all masonry, concrete, painting, roadway and other work liable to be injuriously affected by frost, or which cannot, in the opinion of the Engineer, be satisfactorily proceeded with because of the condition of the weather, must be put in proper and satisfactory condition and be carefully and well protected from damage by frost at all times all at the cost and expense of the Contractor. 56. Subletting The Contractor shall keep the work under his personal control, and shall not assign, transfer, or sublet any portion without first obtaining the written consent of the Engineer. The consent of the Engineer to any such assignment, transfer, or subletting, shall not, however, relieve the Contractor of any responsibility for the proper commencement, execution, and completion of the work according to the terms of the Contract. If the Engineer consents to any such assignment, transfer or subletting the Contractor shall, either in person or through an accredited agent, receive all notices, communications, orders, instructions, or legal service, as if he were performing the work with his own plant and his own workers. GC - 42

112 57. Use Of Hydrants And Water The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for a supply of water to be used in carrying out the Contract, and shall bear all costs for water and temporary connections unless otherwise specifically provided for in the Contract. The Contractor shall comply with the regulations of the authority supplying the water regarding the use and care of hydrants. Any damage to hydrants caused by the Contractor s operations shall be his responsibility. In the event the Contractor fails to make good such damage the Engineer will have the necessary repairs made and will retain the cost from monies due the Contractor. The Contractor shall bear the cost of all water used in testing and chlorinating of all installations. 58. Setting Out The Engineer will provide the Contractor in writing with bench marks and points of reference to be used by him in setting out the works. The Owner will be responsible only for the correctness of the information so supplied. From these bench marks and points of reference the Contractor will do his own setting out. The setting out by the Contractor shall include but shall not be limited to the preparation of grade sheets, the installation of centre lines stakes, grade stakes, offsets, site rails and screeds. The Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the works and for the correctness of the position, levels, dimensions and alignment of all parts of the works, and for the provision of all necessary instruments and labour in connection therewith. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the correctness of the information supplied by the Engineer as herein provided for. If at any time during the progress of the works any error shall appear or arise in the position, levels, dimensions or alignment of any part of the works, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, rectify such error to the satisfaction of the Engineer, unless such error is based on incorrect data supplied in writing by the Engineer. The checking of the setting out of any line or level by the Engineer shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the correctness thereof and the Contractor shall carefully protect and preserve all bench marks, stakes and other things used in setting out the works. GC - 43

113 59. Assistance The Contractor is to furnish the Engineer or any of his assistants, with any reasonable help which he or they may require at any time in checking the work. He shall also furnish the said parties, or any of the Inspectors, at all times, with convenient means of access to all parts of the works, and also with all required assistance to facilitate thorough examination of the same, and inspection, culling and removal of doubtful or defective material, and for any other purpose required in connection with the said works or in the discharge of their respective duties, for which services no additional allowance will be made. 60. Others Rights The Contractor must afford all necessary and reasonable facilities to the Owner, or any of its employees or workers, as well as to any company, corporation or person owning or operating any railway, tramway, wires, pipes or conduits or works or property, on, along, or near the line of the works, or in their vicinity; he shall notify all such parties before interfering with any of their property, rights or privileges and must work in harmony with them; otherwise he shall notify the Engineer in writing of his failure so to do, or of any difficulty that may at any time arise which he may be unable to overcome, in which case the Engineer shall deal with the matter as in his judgement may seem right or proper, and the Contractor shall abide by the decision and the direction of the Engineer. Any property of such parties which the Engineer orders to be moved by the Contractor must be handled with care, and must be neatly piled up and preserved free from injury or loss, and must be properly and satisfactorily replaced, all of which must be done by the Contractor without extra charge (unless specifically provided for in the Contract) and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Engineer shall have the right, at any time before or during the construction, or after the completion of the work, to open up any portion of the work or works, or the ground or roadway, or to grant permission for such opening to be made or left by the Contractor, as he, the Engineer, may deem advisable, for the purpose of examining, repairing or laying any water, gas or other pipe, sewer, drain, track or other underground or surface construction or to cause any such work as he may deem necessary or advisable to be done, and such permission, or the exercise of such rights, either by the Engineer or by any other person or corporation having the requisite authority (either statutory or otherwise) shall not relieve the Contractor from any of his responsibilities or obligations, nor shall the opening up of any portion of the work for these or any other purposes, or by any other parties, relieve the Contractor of such responsibilities or obligations, except only for the portion of the work actually torn up and destroyed, and then only in case the Contractor applies in writing for such relief at the time the work is being done, or within ten days GC - 44

114 afterwards, and can furnish sufficient cause, in the opinion of the Engineer, why such relief should be granted. 61. Monies Due Owner All monies payable to the Owner by the Contractor under any stipulation herein or to the Workers Compensation Board, may be retained out of any monies then due, or which may become due, from the Owner to the Contractor under this or any other contract with the Owner, or otherwise howsoever, or may be recovered from the Contractor or his surety jointly or severally in any court of competent jurisdiction, as a debt due to the Owner; and the Owner shall have full power to withhold any estimate or certificate, if circumstances arise which may indicate to it the advisability of so doing, though the sum to be retained may be unascertained. 62. Workers Rights All persons in the employ of the Contractor or any Subcontractor or other person doing or contracting to do the whole or any part of the work contemplated by the Contract shall be paid fair wages and shall have hours or work in conformity with the local municipal Fair Wage By-law, if any, in conformity with any Act of the Province of Ontario and any regulations under such Act that relate to wages, hours of work or other labour conditions and in any event shall be paid not less than the rates of wages prevailing in the locality of the work. In case of a dispute as to the rate or amount of wages to be paid under the Contract to any mechanic, worker, labourer, truck owner or driver, the matter shall be referred to the Engineer for a decision. In case the Contractor or his agents fail to pay any mechanic, worker, labourer or truck owner or driver employed by him in the execution of this Contract, (or in case any truck owner so employed by him fails to pay any driver), the rate of wages herein before provided, the Owner may pay any balance necessary to make up this amount, and charge it to the Contractor. The provisions of this section shall not, however, apply to any work which is of necessity done away from the site. So far as is practicable, local labour shall be given preference in carrying out the work under this Contract. The Contractor shall not favour and shall not refuse employment to or otherwise discriminate against any person because of that person s race, ancestry, place of origin, GC - 45

115 colour, ethnic origin, citizenship, creed, sex, sexual orientation, age, marital status, family status, handicap, or because that person is or may become pregnant or because that person has made a complaint or given information with respect to an alleged failure by the Contractor or a Subcontractor to comply with the provisions hereof. 63. Liens The Contractor and his surety, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, (if assignment is approved as herein provided), and any and all other parties in any way concerned, shall fully relieve and indemnify the Owner and all its officers, servants and employees from any and all liability or expenses in respect to any claim which may be made for a lien or charge at law or in equity or to any claim or liability or to any attempted attachment for debt, garnishee, process or otherwise. The Owner shall not in any case be liable to any greater extent than the amount owing by it to the Contractor, his executors, administrators, successors and assigns, pursuant to this Contract. The contractor must also discharge any liens on behalf of the Owner within 48 hours of their application. 64. Removal of Personnel Should any superintendent, foreman, mechanic or worker employed on or about the work or in connection therewith, give any just cause for complaint (of which the Engineer shall be the sole judge), the Engineer may instruct the Contractor to remove such person from the works forthwith. 65. Non-Fulfillment of the Contract If in the opinion of the Engineer and at any time or times prior to the issuance of the Final Certificate, the Contractor neglects or fails to commence work within seven days after the date of the Engineer s written order to commence work, or becomes bankrupt or insolvent, or compounds with his creditors, or commits any act of insolvency, or transfers, assigns or sublets the Contract or any part thereof without the written consent of the Engineer, or has not executed or is not executing the work or any part thereof in a sound and workmanlike manner and in accordance with the Contract, or is not performing the work so as to ensure its completion within the time stipulated in the Contract or has failed to complete the works within the said time, or fails or refuses to take down, rebuild, repair or rectify any imperfect work for which the Contractor is responsible, or fails to remove any condemned material or to replace such material with proper material, or fails to comply with any reasonable order given to him by the Engineer, or abandons the work, or fails to observe or perform any of the provisions of the Contract, then in each and any such case the Engineer shall, after giving the Contractor 48 hours written notice, have the right and GC - 46

116 power, at his discretion without process or action at law, to take possession and control of the whole work, or any part or parts thereof specified in the said notice, from the Contractor, and the Contractor, upon receiving the said notice, shall give possession and control of the said work, or the part or parts thereof specified in the said notice, peaceably to the Engineer, and the Engineer may employ such means as he may deem necessary or advisable to complete the work to his satisfaction with such changes therein as in the Engineer s opinion are necessary or advisable by reason of the Contractor s non-fulfillment of the Contract as set out herein. In the event of an emergency in any manner due to the Contractor s non-fulfillment of the Contract as set out herein, the Engineer shall have the right and power at his discretion without process or action at law or any notice to the Contractor to take possession and control of the works, or any part thereof, from the Contractor and the Engineer may take such measures as he may deem necessary or advisable to deal with the emergency and the decision of the Engineer as to the existence of such an emergency and as to the measures to be taken in regard thereto shall be final. If, in the event of an emergency as aforesaid, the Engineer takes measures in regard there to as provided for above, he shall notify the Contractor thereof as soon after the commencement of the emergency as is practicable. The Contractor and his surety in every case provided for above shall be liable for all loss, damage, expense, expenditures and cost which may be incurred by reason of the Engineer s exercise of the rights and powers provided for herein. If the said loss, damage, expense, expenditure or cost exceeds the sum which would have been payable under the Contract if the same had been completed by the Contractor, the Contractor or his surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner together with the amount of liquidated damages from the date fixed for the completion of the work, and the same may be deducted or collected by the owner as provided for herein. All the powers of the Engineer with respect to the Determination of any doubts, disputes and differences, and the determination of the sum or sums, or balance of money to be paid to or received from the Contractor or his surety in respect of the Contract, shall nevertheless continue in force. The fulfillment by the Contractor of any stipulation in the Contract may be enforced by legal proceedings and judgement, or order of court, without prejudice to any other remedy herein contained. In case possession and control of the work, or any part thereof, is taken from the Contractor as herein provided, the decision of the Engineer with respect thereto shall be final but the relative obligations of the Owner and the Contractor and his surety in respect of the Contract shall not be affected nor shall the completion of the work be delayed; all property, materials, articles and things whatsoever including all machinery, tools, plant and equipment, and all rights, proprietary or otherwise, licenses, powers and privileges, whether relating to or affecting real or personal property, acquired, possessed or provided by the Contractor for the purpose of the work, or by the Engineer under the provisions of this Contract, shall be the property of the Owner and may be used, exercised and employed GC - 47

117 by the Owner as fully as they might have been used, exercised and employed by the Contractor, and the Owner may sell or otherwise dispose of, at public auction or private sale or otherwise, the whole or any portion or number of such property, materials, articles and things, at such price or prices as it may deem fit and retain the proceeds of any sale or disposition and all other amounts then or thereafter due by the Owner to the Contractor, on account of or in part satisfaction of any loss, damage, expense or cost which the Owner may sustain or has sustained by reason aforesaid. If any balance of the contract price, or any other money payable by the Owner hereunder, shall remain in the hands of the Owner upon the completion of the measures taken by the Engineer and the fulfillment of the Contract, the same shall be payable to the Contractor or the person legally representing him, but neither the Owner nor any officer, employee or agent thereof shall be liable or accountable to the Contractor or his surety in any way for the manner in which, or the price at which, the said work or any portion thereof, may have been or may be done or completed by the Engineer. Neither an extension of time for any reason beyond the date fixed herein for the completion for the Contract, nor the payment for any portion of the work shall be deemed to be a waiver by the Engineer or the Owner of their rights under this Contract. 66. Bribery Should the Contractor or any of his agents give or offer any gratuity to, or attempt to bribe or influence, any member of the Council of the Corporation, or any officer or servant of the Agency or of the Council of the Corporation or of the agent of the Engineer, the Owner shall be at liberty to cancel the Contract forthwith, or to direct the Engineer to take the whole or any part of the works out of the hands of the Contractor, under the same provisions as those specified in the preceding section hereof. 67. Claims, Negotiations, Mediation 67.1 Continuance of the Work.1 Unless the Contract has been terminated or completed, the Contractor shall in every case, after serving or receiving any notification of a claim or dispute, verbal or written, continue to proceed with the Work with due diligence and expedition. It is understood by the parties that such action shall not jeopardize any claim it may have. GC - 48

118 67.2 Record Keeping.1 Immediately upon commencing work that may result in a claim, the Contractor shall keep Daily Work Records during the course of the Work, sufficient to substantiate the Contractor's claim, and the Engineer shall keep Daily Work Records to be used in assessing the Contractor's claim, all in accordance with clause GC 51, Books and Records of the Contractor..2 The Contractor and the Engineer shall attempt to reconcile their respective Daily Work Records on a daily basis, to simplify review of the claim, when submitted. If the Contractor and the Engineer fail to reconcile their respective Daily Work Records, then the Contractor shall submit its Daily Work Records as part of its claim, whereby the resolution of the dispute about the Daily Work Records shall not be resolved until there is a resolution of the claim..3 The keeping of Daily Work Records by the Engineer or the reconciling of such Daily Work Records with those of the Contractor shall not be construed to be acceptance of the claim Claims Procedure.1 The Contractor shall give verbal notice of any situation that may lead to a claim for additional payment immediately upon becoming aware of the situation..2 The Contractor shall provide written notice in the standard form "Notice of Intent to Claim" within 7 Days of the commencement of any part of the Work that may be affected by the situation..3 The Contractor shall submit detailed claims as soon as reasonably possible and in any event no later than 30 Days after completion of the work affected by the situation. The detailed claim shall: a. identify the item or items in respect of which the claim arises; b. state the grounds, contractual or otherwise, upon which the claim is made; and c. include the Records maintained by the Contractor supporting such claim. In exceptional cases, the 30 Days may be increased to a maximum of 90 Days with approval in writing from the Engineer. GC - 49

119 .4 Within 30 Days of the receipt of the Contractor's detailed claim, the Engineer may request the Contractor to submit any further and other particulars as the Engineer considers necessary to assess the claim. The Contractor shall submit the requested information within 30 Days of receipt of such request..5 Within 90 Days of receipt of the detailed claim, the Engineer shall advise the Contractor, in writing, of the Engineer's opinion with regard to the validity of the claim Negotiations.1 The parties shall make all reasonable efforts to resolve their dispute by amicable negotiations and agree to provide, without prejudice, open and timely disclosure of relevant facts, information, and documents to facilitate these negotiations..2 Should the Contractor disagree with the opinion given in paragraph GC , with respect to any part of the claim, the Engineer shall enter into negotiations with the Contractor to resolve the matters in dispute. Where a negotiated settlement cannot be reached and it is agreed that payment cannot be made on a Time and Material basis in accordance with clause GC 50, Valuation of Variations he parties shall proceed in accordance with clause GC 67.5, Mediation, or subsection GC 68, Arbitration Mediation.1 If a claim is not resolved satisfactorily through the negotiation stage noted in clause GC 67.4, Negotiations, within a period of 30 Days following the opinion given in paragraph GC , and the Contractor wishes to pursue the issue further, the parties may, upon mutual agreement, utilize the services of an independent third party mediator..2 The mediator shall be mutually agreed upon by the Owner and Contractor..3 The mediator shall be knowledgeable regarding the area of the disputed issue. The mediator shall meet with the parties together or separately, as necessary, to review all aspects of the issue. In a final attempt to assist the parties in resolving the issue themselves prior to proceeding to arbitration the mediator shall provide, without prejudice, a non-binding recommendation for settlement. GC - 50

120 .4 The review by the mediator shall be completed within 90 Days following the opinion given in paragraph GC Each party is responsible for its own costs related to the use of the third party mediator process. The cost of the third party mediator shall be equally shared by the Owner and Contractor Payment.1 Payment of the claim shall be made no later than 30 Days after the date of resolution of the claim or dispute. Such payment shall be made according to the terms of Section GC 52, Payment Rights of Both Parties.1 It is agreed that no action taken under subsection GC 67, Claims, Negotiations, Mediation, by either party shall be construed as a renunciation or waiver of any of the rights or recourse available to the parties, provided that the requirements set out in this subsection are fulfilled. 68. Arbitration 68.1 Conditions of Arbitration.1 If a claim is not resolved satisfactorily through the negotiation stage noted in clause GC 67.4, Negotiations, or the mediation stage noted in clause GC 67.5, Mediation, either party may invoke the provisions of subsection GC 68, Arbitration, by giving written notice to the other party..2 Notification that arbitration shall be implemented to resolve the issue shall be communicated in writing as soon as possible and no later than 60 Days following the opinion given in paragraph GC Where the use of a third party mediator was implemented, notification shall be within 120 Days of the opinion given in paragraph GC The parties shall be bound by the decision of the arbitrator..4 The rules and procedures of the Arbitration Act, 1991, S.O. 1991, c.17, as amended, shall apply to any arbitration conducted hereunder except to the extent that they are modified by the express provisions of subsection GC 68, Arbitration. GC - 51

121 68.2 Arbitration Procedure.1 The following provisions are to be included in the agreement to arbitrate and are subject only to such right of appeal as exist where the arbitrator has exceeded his or her jurisdiction or have otherwise disqualified him or herself: a. All existing actions in respect of the matters under arbitration shall be stayed pending arbitration; b. All outstanding claims and matters to be settled are to be set out in a schedule to the agreement. Only such claims and matters as are in the schedule shall be arbitrated; and c. Before proceeding with the arbitration, the Contractor shall confirm that all matters in dispute are set out in the schedule Appointment of Arbitrator.1 The arbitrator shall be mutually agreed upon by the Owner and Contractor to adjudicate the dispute..2 Where the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on a sole arbitrator within 30 Days of the notification of arbitration noted in paragraph GC , the Owner and the Contractor shall each choose an appointee within 37 Days of the notice of arbitration..3 The appointees shall mutually agree upon an arbitrator to adjudicate the dispute within 15 Days after the last appointee was chosen or they shall refer the matter to the Arbitration and Mediation Institute of Ontario Inc., which may select an arbitrator to adjudicate the dispute within 7 Days of being requested to do so..4 The arbitrator shall not be interested financially in the Contract nor in either party's business and shall not be employed by either party..5 The arbitrator may appoint independent experts and any other persons to assist him or her..6 The arbitrator is not bound by the rules of evidence that govern the trial of cases in court but may hear and consider any evidence that the arbitrator considers relevant..7 The hearing shall commence within 90 Days of the appointment of the arbitrator. GC - 52

122 68.4 Costs.1 The arbitrator's fee shall be equally shared by the Owner and the Contractor..2 The fees of any independent experts and any other persons appointed to assist the arbitrator shall be shared equally by the Owner and the Contractor..3 The arbitration hearing shall be held in a place mutually agreed upon by both parties or in the event the parties do not agree, a site shall be chosen by the arbitrator. The cost of obtaining appropriate facilities shall be shared equally by the Owner and the Contractor..4 The arbitrator may, in his or her discretion, award reasonable costs, related to the arbitration The Decision.1 The reasoned decision shall be made in writing within 90 Days of the conclusion of the hearing. An extension of time to make a decision may be granted with consent of both parties. Payment shall be made in accordance with clause GC 52, Payment. 69. Hours of Operation.1 The contractor is permitted to work on site between the hours of 7:00 am to 7:00 pm only. The regular work hours for the operators is between 7:00 am to 3:30 pm. Therefore, the contractor will only have access to the existing facility between these hours and all work requiring access to the existing facility shall be scheduled accordingly. GC - 53

123 Redwood Estates WTP Upgrades Project No Section E Special Provisions

124

125 Redwood Estates Civil Index WTP Upgrades Page 1 of 2 SECTION NO. TITLE NO. OF PAGES DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Construction Phasing Provision of Drawings Summary of Work Submittals Safety Requirements Environmental Protection Quality Control Temporary Facilities Products/Workmanship Closeout Procedures Closeout Submittals Operation and Maintenance Manuals Equipment Commissioning 10 DIVISION 20 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Mechanical General Requirements Thermal Insulation For Piping Thermal Insulation For Equipment 5 DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Copper Tubing & Fittings Refrigerant Ductless Split Air Conditioning Units 3 DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL Common Work Results for Electrical Control Panels Wire and Lug Connectors V Wire and Cables V Grounding Secondary Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinet Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings 5

126 Town of Hawkesbury Architectural Index Wastewater Treatment Plant Page 2 of 2 Upgrades Contract 2010-DG-04 Project Number SECTION NO. TITLE NO. OF PAGES DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL Cont d Wiring Devices Disconnect Switches Fused and Non-Fused Control Devices 5 DIVISION 44 PROCESS HEATING, COOLING AND DRYING EQUIPMENT POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT Process General Requirements Installation of Thermal Insulation on Cold Process Piping Identification Field Pressure Testing of Process Piping Process Piping System Acceptance Field Engineered Process Pipe Field Engineered Process Pipe Supports Engineered Process Pipe Supports Disinfection and Testing of Water Retaining Structures & Process Piping Seismic Restraints Process Piping 20 Valve List Powered Actuators 6 Instrument Data Sheet 1

127 Redwood Estates Construction Section WTP Upgrades Phasing Page 1 of 3 Project No PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Summary.1 The work under this contract must be constructed in such a manner to allow the Water Treatment Plant (WTP) to continue to distribute safe potable water at all times. It is the General Contractor s responsibility to complete the upgrades at the WTP while maintaining operation of the existing system..2 Schedule and coordinate the work under this contract to comply with the sequencing and schedule restrictions identified in this section and to comply with the overall project schedule..3 The Owner will retain control of the existing Water Treatment Plant (WTP) buildings. All work within these areas shall be coordinated with the Township through the project Engineer, shall comply with the Township s schedule requirements and shall be limited to the hours of operation noted in the General Conditions. 1.2 Related.1 Division 1 General Requirements Sections.2 Division 20 Building Mechanical.3 Division 22 Plumbing.4 Division 23 HVAC.5 Division 25 Integrated Automation.6 Division 26 - Electrical.7 Division 44 Process Equipment and Piping

128 Redwood Estates Construction Section WTP Upgrades Phasing Page 2 of 3 Project No General Requirements.1 Prior to commencing work, prepare a detailed schedule and work plan. Incorporate the recommended sequence of work and schedule restrictions of the various components, as described below, into the construction schedule. Submit the detailed work plan and schedule for owner and engineer s review and approval prior to commencing work..2 Provide a minimum of three weeks notification to the Township and Project Engineer prior to commencing any work within the boundaries of the existing WTP buildings and tankage. All work involving the existing WTP components must be adequately schedule with the Township s operators..3 Once started, perform work in these areas completely and attempt to minimize impacts on the operation of the existing facilities..4 Maintain access for the operators to the existing equipment and keep areas clear of debris and material. Maintain all corridors and provide unobstructed paths of travel for the operators..5 Provide hauled potable water and/or temporary high lift pumping system during periods where the system needs to be shutdown. Plan to provide up to 75 cubic meters per day during plant shutdowns..6 Provide 24hr monitoring of all temporary equipment that is not connected and monitored by the existing WTP SCADA system or an alarm monitoring device as required by the Township s Operators or the Project Engineer..8 Temporary interruptions or shutdown of any utility or electrical/mechanical

129 Redwood Estates Construction Section WTP Upgrades Phasing Page 3 of 3 Project No system shall be in accordance with the Township s shutdown procedure. The contractor will be responsible to monitor and investigate that the shutdown will not adversely affect the operation of the existing WTP. PART 2 PRODUCTS N/A PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Recommend Sequence of Construction.1 By the end of 2016, the Contractor shall accomplish the following work: a) Removal of existing greensand filter media and replacement with new green sand filter media. b) Replacement of control valves on the green sand filters. c) Removal of pressure tank. d) Installation of new control panel for green sand filters..2 The remaining scope shall be completed by March 31, a) Replace high lift motors and add VFD control. b) Replace all bolting with stainless steel bolting. c) Venting of clear well. d) Address humidity.

130

131 Redwood Estates Provision of Drawings Section WTP Upgrades Page 1 of 2 Part 1 - General 1.1 Drawings and.1 Following execution of the Contract, Specifications an Approved for Construction revision of the drawings and specifications, which incorporates all addenda issued during the tendering period, will be prepared by the Engineer and provided to the contractor for their review. The contractor shall review the Approved for Construction drawings and specifications to confirm that all addenda are included and confirm his acceptance in writing to the Engineer..2 The Approved for Construction drawings will be provided to the contractor for his initial review no later than 3 weeks following execution of the contract. No claims for delays by the contractor will be considered relating to this schedule..3 Following acceptance of the Approved for Construction drawings and specifications by the contractor, the Engineer will supply the following items to the contractor:.1 Two (2) full sets of Approved for Construction drawings and specifications..2 A copy of the entire set of Approved for Construction drawings and specifications in PDF format via or FTP site..4 If the contractor requires additional copies of the drawings or specifications, they can be purchased, at the contractor s expense, from the copying company used by the Engineer. Alternatively, the contractor can reproduce the drawings from the PDF version provided.

132 Redwood Estates Provision of Drawings Section WTP Upgrades Page 2 of 2.5 Electronic drawings in Autocad (ACAD) 2010 format are available to the contractor if so requested. Contractor will be responsible to sign a release form provided by the Engineer prior to receiving ACAD drawings. ACAD drawings will only be provided on a case by case basis at the Engineer s discretion and the contractor will be expected to justify the need for the ACAD drawings. Note that some ACAD drawings may require additional Autodesk software to be fully compatible (i.e. Autocad MEP2010, Civil3D 2010, etc.).

133 Redwood Estates Summary of Work Section WTP Upgrades Page 1 of 5 Part 1 - General 1.1 Work Covered By Contract Documents.1 Work of this Contract comprises (in brief):.1 Construct and commission all appurtenances required to upgrade Redwood Estates Water Treatment Plant (WTP) as detailed on the construction drawings. These upgrades include, but are not limited to:.1 Upgrade of green sand filter control system including control valves..2 Replace green sand filter media (and disposal of existing filter media)..3 Addition of VFD s to highlift pumps..4 Replace all bolting with stainless steel bolting..5 Removal of pressure tank..6 Venting of clear well..7 Improvements to address humidity, including,.1 Insulate aboveground piping, valves, pumps, pressure tanks and filter..2 Sealing of building checking doors and windows; louvers; caulking and prime walls with vapour retarding primer..3 Addition of a dehumidifier..4 Addition of a ductless split system..2 Miscellaneous extensions and relocations of mechanical and electrical services to provide services to the new equipment.

134 Redwood Estates Summary of Work Section WTP Upgrades Page 2 of Contract Method.1 Construct the work under a unit contract as outlined in the Form of Tender. 1.3 Work By Others.1 Co-operate with other Contractors in carrying out their respective works and carry out instructions from Engineer..2 Co-ordinate work with that of other Contractors. If any part of work under this Contract depends for its proper execution or result upon work of another Contractor, report promptly to Engineer, in writing, any defects which may interfere with proper execution of Work. 1.4 Work Sequence.1 Construct work in phases in accordance with Section Construction Phasing. 1.5 Contractor Use Of Premises.1 Contractor has restricted use of the site until Substantial Performance has been granted..2 Co-ordinate use of premises under direction of the Engineer..3 Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations under this Contract..4 Remove or alter existing work to prevent injury or damage to portions of existing work which remain..5 Repair or replace portions of existing work which have been altered during construction operations to match existing or

135 Redwood Estates Summary of Work Section WTP Upgrades Page 3 of 5 adjoining work, as directed by the Engineer..6 At completion of operations condition of existing work: equal to or better than that which existed before new work started. 1.6 Partial Owner Occupancy 1.7 Alterations, Additions Or Repairs To Existing Building 1.8 Existing Services.1 Schedule and substantially complete designated portions of Work for Owner's occupancy prior to Substantial Performance of entire Work..1 Execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to public and normal use of premises. Arrange with the Engineer to facilitate execution of work..1 Notify the Engineer and utility companies of intended interruption of services and obtain required permission..2 Where Work involves breaking into or connecting to existing services, give the Engineer 48 hours notice for necessary interruption of mechanical or electrical service throughout course of work. Minimize duration of interruptions. Carry out work at times as directed by governing authorities with minimum disturbance to vehicular traffic..3 Provide alternative routes for vehicular traffic as required..4 Establish location and extent of service lines in area of work before starting Work. Notify Engineer of findings.

136 Redwood Estates Summary of Work Section WTP Upgrades Page 4 of 5.5 Submit schedule to and obtain approval from Engineer for any shutdown or closure of active service or facility including power and communications services. Adhere to approved schedule and provide notice to affected parties..6 Where unknown services are encountered, immediately advise Engineer and confirm findings in writing..7 Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When inactive services are encountered, cap off in manner approved by authorities having jurisdiction..8 Record locations of maintained, rerouted and abandoned service lines. 1.9 Documents Required.1 Maintain at job site, one copy each document as follows:.1 Contract Drawings..2 Specifications..3 Addenda..4 Reviewed Shop Drawings..5 List of Outstanding Shop Drawings..6 Change Orders..7 Other Modifications to Contract..8 Field Test Reports..9 Copy of Approved Work Schedule..10 Health and Safety Plan and Other Safety Related Documents..11 Other documents as specified Permits And Fees.1 Contractor will be responsible for plumbing permits, road cut and boulevard permits, electrical

137 Redwood Estates Summary of Work Section WTP Upgrades Page 5 of 5 Part 2 - Products permits, and any fee or permit required for the construction of the project. 2.1 Not Used.1 Not used. Part 3 - Execution 3.1 Not Used.1 Not used.

138

139 Redwood Estates Submittals Section WTP Upgrades Page 1 of General.1 Refer to General Conditions for additional contractual information concerning submittals..2 Refer to individual sections of specifications, Division 2 to 44 for detailed information on submittal requirements..3 Schedule submissions at least four (4) weeks before dates reviewed submission will be needed..4 Do not proceed with work until relevant submissions are reviewed..5 Shop drawings which have not been requested will be returned to the Contractor with no action taken by the Engineer. Shop drawings to which the Engineer s standard Filed for Records stamp is affixed have not been reviewed by the Engineer. 2. Identification.1 Identify each submittal made with of Submittals project, Owner s, Engineer s, Contractor s, sub-contractor s and supplier s name. Indicate origin and intended use in work, the specification section, subsection, tag number and a contractor member. Submittal to be accompanied by transmittal letter recording the above information. Samples to be permanently identified with the same information. 3.Documentation.1 Insurance Forms. Required Before Construction Start.2 Performance Bond and Labour & Material Payment Bond as called for..3 WSIB Clearance Certificate.

140 Redwood Estates Submittals Section WTP Upgrades Page 2 of Statutory.1 Submit, with each monthly progress Declaration a Statutory Declaration certifying that claim all payments for any liability for which Owner might become responsible if unpaid, have been paid..2 Statutory Declaration shall be in form of that attached to this Tender Package. 5. WSIB.1 Submit with each monthly progress Clearance claim, Workplace Safety and Insurance Certificates Board Clearance Certificate. 6. Construction.1 Within fourteen (14) days of Schedule authorization to proceed, submit two (2) copies of proposed construction schedule for Engineer s approval..2 Schedule shall be in a form acceptable to the Engineer and the Owner. Show clearly proposed progress of all main items. Indicate each trade or operation separately. Order chronologically for beginning of each item of work. Identify first workday of each week. Identity critical sequence of work. Coordinate schedule with Section Construction Phasing..3 Include or show separately shop drawing review, decision dates for allowances, fabrication and delivery lead time. Show dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction including subtrade work, concrete placement, equipment installation and testing..4 Include or show separately delivery dates for equipment and materials which have a critical delivery period.

141 Redwood Estates Submittals Section WTP Upgrades Page 3 of 10.5 Identify work of separate blocks or phases, or other logically grouped activities. Show projected percentage of completion for each item of work as of 1 st day of each month..6 Predicate schedule on basis of substantial performance prior to date stated in agreement..7 Revise or elaborate on schedule if required by the Engineer and submit 6 copies of approved schedule for distribution to Owner..8 Revise and update schedule during construction as requested by the Engineer. 7. Schedule of.1 Itemize separately: individual sections Values of specifications, different phases of the work, bonds & permits, mobilization field supervision and layout, temporary facilities and controls, major equipment, material costs delivered, installation costs, each allowance, clean up, hand over and commissioning..2 Prior to submission of the first progress draw, submit a cash flow of all anticipated progress draw values by month for the entire project duration before deduction of holdback amounts and exclusive of anticipated changes. 8. Shop Drawings.1 The Engineer s review is for conformity and Product Data to the design concept and general arrangement only. The Engineer's review shall not relieve the Contractor, his sub-contractor's and suppliers of their responsibility for errors or omissions, or for the Engineer's failure to observe any

142 Redwood Estates Submittals Section WTP Upgrades Page 4 of 10 deviations in the shop drawings or for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents..2 PREFERRED SUBMISSION METHOD: Submit all shop drawings in digital format, using standard software (word format, excel format, PDF format, AutoCAD format or other format approved by the Engineer). Electronic submissions shall be submitted to Engineer, contact to be provided at the first construction meeting, via electronic mail or another method agreed upon by Owner and Engineer. ALTERNATIVE SUBMISSION METHOD: Submit three (3) paper copies of shop drawings to Engineer..3 For non-custom items of equipment, manufacturer s publications or catalogue excerpts are acceptable if suitably annotated in ink. (if applicable).4 For line drawings maximum 280 x 432mm size, submit one (1) copy only; otherwise submit maximum two (2) copies of which one copy shall be a sepia, mylar, or blueprintable vellum. (if applicable).5 Shop drawings shall be dated and contain name of project, description or names of material and items, specification section and material subsection number, tag numbers, and complete identification of locations of which materials are to be installed..6 Accompany shop drawings by transmittal letter containing project name, Contractor s name, number of drawings,

143 Redwood Estates Submittals Section WTP Upgrades Page 5 of 10 titles, description of drawings, and other pertinent data..7 Shop drawings submitted which have not been thoroughly reviewed, coordinated, stamped, dated and signed by a responsible person in Contractor s office will be returned without review for resubmittal..8 Present submittals in SI metric units; & Product Data if not produced in metric convert all values..9 Individual submissions will not be reviewed until all related information is available. Incomplete submission will be rejected and returned to Contractor and Contractor may be charged for Engineer s time and expense involved..10 Delete product data information not relevant to project..11 Supplement standard information to provide details applicable to project..12 The contractor shall allow the Engineer 28 working days to review the shop drawing after a complete submission has been received by the Engineer. 9. Samples.1 Submit samples requested in various sections of specification and as may be reasonably required by the Engineer..2 Submit samples of adequate size and range of colours or textures to represent material in intended use on project..3 Unless the precise colour and pattern is specifically described in the contract documents, wherever a choice of colour or pattern is available in a

144 Redwood Estates Submittals Section WTP Upgrades Page 6 of 10 specified product, submit accurate colour and pattern charts to the Engineer for selection..4 Material used on project shall match approved samples for quality, colour and texture, finish and performance. Do not proceed with work until samples are approved. 10. Mock-Ups.1 Mock-Up: Field erected example of work complete with specified materials and workmanship..2 Provide mock-ups requested in various sections of specifications and as may be reasonably required by the Engineer..3 Erect mock-ups at locations acceptable to the Engineer..4 Reviewed and accepted mock-ups will become standards of workmanship and material against which installed work will be verified. 11. As-Buit.1 Maintain contract drawings at site Drawings office for record purposes. Record accurately deviations from contract documents caused by site conditions, change orders, site instructions, and addenda. Mark in red ink. Provide one table for this set to be placed on..2 Consult Mechanical and Electrical Divisions for other particular requirements..3 Prior to start of Testing and Commissioning, finalize production of as-built drawings..4 Identify each drawing in lower right hand corner in letters at least 12mm high as follows: - AS BUILT DRAWINGS:

145 Redwood Estates Submittals Section WTP Upgrades Page 7 of 10 THIS DRAWING HAS BEEN REVISED TO SHOW PROCESS SYSTEMS AS INSTALLED" (Signature of Contractor) (date)..5 Submit to Engineer for approval and make corrections as directed..6 Commissioning to be performed using asbuilt drawings..7 Submit completed reproducible as-built drawings with Operating and Maintenance Manuals..8 Submit copies of as-built drawings for inclusion in final Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 12. Progress.1 Contractor shall prepare daily reports Reports of his operations. Daily report shall contain at least the following information: - weather conditions - manpower on the job in each trade - major items of equipment on the job - a brief summary of work accomplished that day - materials, equipment, or ownerfurnished items arriving or leaving site - inspection reports - significant events - any tests made and their final results, if known - any oral instructions received - visitors to the job.2 Contractor shall maintain a file of copies of all daily reports on the site and make it available to Consulting Engineer or Owner upon request.

146 Redwood Estates Submittals Section WTP Upgrades Page 8 of 10.3 The following forms, appended to Sections and , shall be submitted at appropriate times: Form 101 Certificate of Readiness to Install Form 102 Certificate of Satisfactory Installation Form 103 Certificate of Equipment Satisfactory Performance Form 104 Certificate of Process System Satisfactory Performance 13. Manuals of.1 Prior to substantial performance, Instruction and inspection, submit to Consultant, two Maintenance (2) copies of Instruction and Maintenance Manuals as follows:.1 Bind data in 215 x 279mm, vinyl covered three-ring loose-leaf binders..2 Enclose title sheet, labelled Instruction and Maintenance Manual with project name, list of contents, date and names of Owner, Consultant, and Contractor..3 Organize contents into applicable sections of work to parallel project specification breakdown. Mark each section by labelled tabs protected with celluloid covers fastened to hard paper dividing sheets..2 All operation and maintenance manuals to be submitted in English only..3 Neatly type lists and notes. Use clear drawings, diagrams or manufacturer s literature..4 Contents:.1 As called for in individual sections of these specifications..2 Maintenance instructions for exterior and interior floor, wall, and ceiling surfaces as well as all

147 Redwood Estates Submittals Section WTP Upgrades Page 9 of 10 installed fittings as printed by manufacturer..3 Operating and maintenance instructions for mechanical and electrical equipment called for in Division 15 and 16, bound separately..4 Colour schedule; hardware schedule..5 Copies of all guarantees and warranties..6 Complete set of final approved shop drawings, bound separately, indicating corrections and charges made during fabrication and installation..7 Names, addresses, and phone numbers of sub-contractors and suppliers..8 WHMIS Manual described in Section Maintenance.1 Turn over materials and spare parts for Materials items noted in various sections of specifications to Owner s authorized representative and obtain receipt. Submit receipt to Consultant. Submit materials in unbroken cartons or if not available in cartons, strongly packed. Identify colour, room number, unit number or area materials used. 15. Documents.1 Documents required prior to Substantial Required Before Performance include: Substantial.1 Record Drawings. Performance.2 Manuals of Instruction and Maintenance including:.1 Warranties.2 Final approved shop drawings.3 Schedules.4 WHMS Manual..3 Post construction survey drawings.

148 Redwood Estates Submittals Section WTP Upgrades Page 10 of 10.4 Mechanical:.1 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) reports.2 Operation and Maintenance Manual.3 Demonstration and Operating and Maintenance Instruction.4 Individual equipment certification and training session outlined in Mechanical Sections and mechanical process section..5 Electrical.1 Operation and Maintenance Manual.2 Electrical Inspection Certificate.3 F/A verification certificate (where applicable).4 Demonstration and Operating and Maintenance Instruction.6 Process.1 Operation and Maintenance Manual..2 Commissioning and testing reports..3 Air and water balancing reports..4 CAD As-built and/or record drawings..5 Individual equipment certification by the manufacturers..6 Training sessions as outlined by Division 44 have been completed..7 Piping inspection reports..8 Results of cleaning and disinfection.

149 Redwood Estates Safety Requirements Section WTP Upgrades Page 1 of 4 1. Safety.1 The Contractor shall comply with the Regulations latest edition and amending regulations of the following documents, and in the case of conflicts between documents, the more stringent rule shall apply:.1 National Building Code, Part 8: Safety Measures at Construction and Demolition Sites..2 Occupational Health and Safety Regulation for Construction Projects, Revised Statutes of Ontario, Chapter 321, as amended Regulation The Workplace Safety & Insurance Act 1997, and regulations as amended..4 Ontario Building Code 1997 Regulation 403/97 as amended..5 Ontario Fire Prevention & Protection Act; Bill Regulation 309 Environmental Protection Act, revised Ontario Regulation 464/85..7 Bill 79 An Act to amend the Occupational Health and Safety Act, Chapter 29, Statutes of Ontario, Bill C-70, An Act to Amend the Hazardous Projects Act and the Canada Labour Code, June Workers Compensation Board First Aid Regulations (950)..10 The Occupational Health and Safety Act Revised Statues of Ontario, Revised Regulation 692/ Temporary.1 Furnish and maintain all equipment such Stairs, Hoists, as stairs, ladders, ramps scaffolds, Scaffold, Etc. hoists, runways, derricks, chutes, elevators, etc., as required for proper execution of work..2 Construct and maintain scaffolding in rigid, secure and safe manner. Erect

150 Redwood Estates Safety Requirements Section WTP Upgrades Page 2 of 4 scaffolding independent of walls. Remove promptly when no longer required..3 Where such structures are of a complicated nature, employ the services of a Registered Professional Engineer to design such scaffolding, framework, or other temporary supports..4 Provide all necessary temporary barricades, fencing, guardrails, night lights, and barriers as necessary for the work. 3. Safety.1 Enforce use of CSA approved hardhats Equipment and safety boots for all entering or working on construction site. Refuse admission to those refusing to conform to this regulation..2 Provide and maintain adequate lighting where workmen or public may be subject to hazards and in all working areas..3 Comply with the requirements of the Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials, and regarding labelling and the provision of material safety data sheets..1 Establish and maintain a manual for WHMIS. Include all WHMIS data sheets as required above. Turn over the complete manual to Consultant at completion of the work..2 WHMIS manual to include, but not be limited to all: - adhesives - solvents - sealants - sprayed on fireproofing

151 Redwood Estates Safety Requirements Section WTP Upgrades Page 3 of 4 - resilient flooring - carpet, paint, varnish, other coatings - membrane waterproofing and air barriers - special coatings, sealers, waxes - solder, brazing and welding and other metal filler - pressure treated wood and surface treatment of cuts - other products where particles or vapours may become air borne after installation.4 In addition to the requirements of the Occupational Health and Safety Act, and Regulations for Construction Projects, provide temporary safeguards and protection against:.1 Accident or injury to any workmen or other persons on the site, adjacent work and property, roads and walks..2 Damage to any part of the work and to any adjoining or adjacent structure, properties, pavements, walks, services, and other similar items by frost, weather, overloading, and any other cause resulting from the execution of the work..5 Make good with material identical with existing and adjoining surfaces any damage resulting from the execution of the work to any part of the work or any buildings, pavements, landscaping, poles, hydrants, services, etc., on or surrounding.

152 Redwood Estates Safety Requirements Section WTP Upgrades Page 4 of 4.6 Provide continuous fencing and security access control points to enclose and secure all areas of the site and areas impacted by construction activities. Maintain the perimeter secure throughout the duration of construction and remove all control systems at the completion of the work. Provide Town staff and consultants with unrestricted access to the facility and site during the duration of construction activities.

153 Redwood Estates Environmental Section WTP Upgrades Protection Page 1 of 6 Part 1 - General 1.1 Definitions.1 Environmental Pollution and Damage: presence of chemical, physical, biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health and welfare; unfavourably alter ecological balances of importance to human life; affect other species of importance to humankind; or degrade environment aesthetically, culturally and/or historically..2 Environmental Protection: prevention/control of pollution and habitat or environment disruption during construction. Control of environmental pollution and damage requires consideration of land, water, and air; biological and cultural resources; and includes management of visual aesthetics; noise; solid, chemical, gaseous, and liquid waste; radiant energy and radioactive material as well as other pollutants. 1.2 Submittals.1 Submittals: in accordance with Section Submittal Procedures..2 Prior to commencing construction activities or delivery of materials to site, submit Environmental Protection Plan for review and approval by Consulting Engineer Environmental Protection Plan is to present comprehensive overview of known or potential environmental issues which must be addressed during construction..3 Address topics at level of detail commensurate with environmental issue and required construction tasks.

154 Redwood Estates Environmental Section WTP Upgrades Protection Page 2 of 6.4 Environmental protection plan: include:.1 Names of persons responsible for ensuring adherence to Environmental Protection Plan..2 Names and qualifications of persons responsible for training site personnel..3 Descriptions of environmental protection personnel training program..4 Erosion and sediment control plan which identifies type and location of erosion and sediment controls to be provided including monitoring and reporting requirements to assure that control measures are in compliance with erosion and sediment control plan, Federal, Provincial, and Municipal laws and regulations..5 Drawings showing locations of proposed temporary excavations or embankments for haul roads, stream crossings, material storage areas, structures, sanitary facilities, and stockpiles of excess or spoil materials including methods to control runoff and to contain materials on site..6 Traffic control plans including measures to reduce erosion of temporary roadbeds by construction traffic, especially during wet weather. Plans include measures to minimize amount of mud transported onto paved public roads by vehicles or runoff..7 Work area plan showing proposed activity in each portion of area and identifying areas of limited use or non-use. Plan to include

155 Redwood Estates Environmental Section WTP Upgrades Protection Page 3 of 6 measures for marking limits of use areas including methods for protection of features to be preserved within authorized work areas..8 Spill Control Plan: including procedures, instructions, and reports to be used in event of unforeseen spill of regulated substance..9 Non-Hazardous solid waste disposal plan identifying methods and locations for solid waste disposal including clearing debris..10 Air pollution control plan detailing provisions to assure that dust, debris, materials, and trash, do not become air borne and travel off project site..11 Contaminant prevention plan that: identifies potentially hazardous substances to be used on job site; identifies intended actions to prevent introduction of such materials into air, water, or ground; and details provisions for compliance with Federal, Provincial, and Municipal laws and regulations for storage and handling of these materials..12 Waste water management plan that identifies methods and procedures for management and/or discharge of waste waters which are directly derived from construction activities, such as concrete curing water, clean-up water, dewatering of ground water, disinfection water, hydrostatic test water, and water used in flushing of lines..13 Historical, archaeological, cultural resources biological resources and wetlands plan that

156 Redwood Estates Environmental Section WTP Upgrades Protection Page 4 of 6 defines procedures for identifying and protecting historical, archaeological, cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands..14 Pesticide treatment plan: to be included and updated, as required. 1.3 Fires.1 Fires and burning of rubbish is not permitted on site. 1.4 Disposal Of Wastes.1 Do not bury rubbish and waste materials on site unless approved by Engineer..2 Do not dispose of waste or volatile materials, such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner into waterways, storm or sanitary sewers. 1.5 Drainage.1 Provide erosion and sediment control plan that identifies type and location of erosion and sediment controls to be provided. Plan to include monitoring and reporting requirements to assure that control measures are in compliance with erosion and sediment control plan, Federal, Provincial, and Municipal laws and regulations..2 Provide temporary drainage and pumping as necessary to keep excavations and site free from water. Obtain a Permit to Take Water as required (note that a permit to take water application has been submitted to the MOE by the Owner and will be provided to the Contractor once received)..3 Do not pump water containing suspended materials into waterways,

157 Redwood Estates Environmental Section WTP Upgrades Protection Page 5 of 6 sewer or drainage systems..4 Control disposal or runoff of water containing suspended materials or other harmful substances in accordance with local authority requirements. 1.6 Site Clearing And Plant Protection.1 Protect trees and plants on site and adjacent properties where indicated..2 Wrap in burlap, trees and shrubs adjacent to construction work, storage areas and trucking lanes, and encase with protective wood framework from grade level to height of 2m..3 Protect roots of designated trees to dripline during excavation and site grading to prevent disturbance or damage. Avoid unnecessary traffic, dumping and storage of materials over root zones..4 Minimize stripping of topsoil and vegetation. 1.7 Work Adjacent To Waterways.1 Do not operate construction equipment in waterways..2 Do not use waterway beds for borrow material..3 Do not dump excavated fill, waste material or debris in waterways..4 Design and construct temporary crossings to minimize erosion to waterways..5 Do not skid logs or construction materials across waterways.

158 Redwood Estates Environmental Section WTP Upgrades Protection Page 6 of 6.6 Avoid indicated spawning beds when constructing temporary crossings of waterways..7 Do not blast under water or within 100 m of indicated spawning beds. 1.8 Pollution Control.1 Maintain temporary erosion and pollution control features installed under this contract until vegetation has been restored..2 Control emissions from equipment and plant to local authorities' emission requirements..3 Prevent sandblasting and other extraneous materials from contaminating air and waterways beyond application area, by providing temporary enclosures..4 Cover or wet down dry materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust and debris. Provide dust control for temporary roads. Part 2 - Products 2.1 Not Used.1 Not Used. Part 3 - Execution 3.1 Not Used.1 Not Used.

159 Redwood Estates Quality Control Section WTP Upgrades Page 1 of 3 1. General.1 Unless noted otherwise, inspection and testing will be carried out by independent inspection companies appointed by the Owner and invoices will be paid by Owner directly. Inspection and testing required by division 20 to 28 and 44 shall be carried out and paid for by the Contractor..2 Include in contract price all costs associated with coordinating and assisting with testing services. 2. Other Testing.1 Where no testing requirements are specified but Owner decides that testing is required, Owner reserves right to have such testing or inspections performed..2 Payment for extra testing requested by Owner shall be an addition to the contract as outlined in Part 6, Changes in the Work. 3. Scheduling.1 Notify the Engineer at outset of project of requirements for testing services so that requisite testing and inspection activities can be coordinated into work on schedule. 4. Notification.1 Notify the Engineer two weeks in advance of date when the first work will be ready for inspection..2 Notify testing company at least 24 hours before such inspection or test is required..3 When testing laboratory is ready to test according to the above notification, but is prevented from testing or taking specimens due to incompleteness of work, all extra costs for testing attributable to the delay

160 Redwood Estates Quality Control Section WTP Upgrades Page 2 of 3 shall be deducted by Owner from contract price. 5. Cooperation.1 Provide representatives of testing company with access to work at all times. Permit testing laboratory to take materials and specimens required for testing and assist as requested. Deliver samples of material to testing company as specified..2 Make good work disturbed by inspection & test. 6. Reports.1 Testing company shall promptly issue test reports simultaneously and directly to Contractor 1 copy, Owner 1 copy, Project Administrator (OWCA) 1 copy, Engineer 1 copy. 7. Failure to.1 Non-compliance: When initial tests Meet Requirements indicate non-compliance with contract documents, costs of initial test associated with non-compliance shall be deducted by owner from contract price..2 Re-testing: When initial tests indicate non-compliance with the contract documents, all subsequent retesting occasioned by non-compliance shall be performed by same testing company and costs thereof deducted by owner from contract price. 8. Contractual.1 Review of construction by the Responsibility Engineer and inspection and testing by an independent Inspection and Testing Agency, are precautions against oversight or error and to satisfy the Owner that the work is in conformity with the Contract Documents. This is not intended to be the means of quality control. Review, inspection, and

161 Redwood Estates Quality Control Section WTP Upgrades Page 3 of 3 testing, are based on representative samples of the work and do not relieve the Contractor from carrying out his own quality control and for completing all work in accordance with contract documents..2 Costs for uncovering and making good work that is covered before required inspection or testing is completed and approved, are the Contractor s responsibility..3 Contractor shall furnish all labour and facilities and be responsible for:.1 Inspection and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or order of public authority..2 Inspection and testing performed exclusively for Contractor s convenience..3 Testing, adjustment and balancing of conveying mechanical and electrical equipment and systems..4 Mill tests and certificates of compliance..5 Tests specified to be carried out by the contractor..6 Testing, adjustment and balancing of process piping and process systems.

162

163 Redwood Estates Temporary Facilities Section WTP Upgrades Page 1 of 9 1. Construction.1 Provide two weathertight offices of Offices size to accommodate site meetings and (Not Required) furnished with drawing lay-down table, drawing storage rack, filing cabinet, shelving, coat hooks, meeting table, chairs. One trailer will be for the Contractor s use and one will be for a full time Engineer s office..2 Provide adequate heat, electric lighting, ventilation..3 Provide and pay for phone, answering machine, fax machine, and calls until Total Performance. Fax and telephone to be on separate lines..4 Keep clean and orderly. Do not use for storage of construction materials. 2. Storage.1 Provide and maintain, in approved Sheds locations on site, temporary offices (If Required) and sheds for storage of materials, tools and equipment. Construct temporary buildings with raised floors, weatherproof, of neat appearance and subject to Engineer s approval..2 Store materials and equipment in areas on site designated by Engineer. 3. Sanitary.1 Provide temporary lavatory Facilities accommodation and sanitary conveniences, in accordance with Provincial and Municipal regulations, for use of all workers. 4. Hoarding.1 Provide temporary hoarding or fencing wherever required by applicable codes, by-laws and as shown on drawings..2 Construct fencing/hoarding and other protection at least to Municipal and provincial standards.

164 Redwood Estates Temporary Facilities Section WTP Upgrades Page 2 of 9 5. Enclosure.1 Provide temporary enclosures as required by construction operations and to ensure continuous execution of the work..2 Provide temporary weathertight enclosures and protection for exterior openings until permanent exterior doors, windows and roof closures are installed..3 Erect enclosures to allow accessibility for installation of materials and working inside of enclosure..4 Design enclosures to withstand wind pressure. 6. Power and.1 Provide and pay for all temporary power Lighting and lighting for use of trades as required to perform the work except as otherwise permitted..2 Pay for all permits and/or installation costs and make necessary arrangements..3 Electrical power and lighting systems installed under this contract may be used for construction requirements provided that guarantees are not affected thereby. Make good damage. Replace lamps which have been used over a period of 3 months. 7. Water.1 Provide and pay for temporary water Supply supply for use of all trades, except as otherwise permitted..2 Pay for all permits and/or installation costs and make necessary arrangements..3 Permanent water supply system installed under this contract may be used for construction requirements provided that

165 Redwood Estates Temporary Facilities Section WTP Upgrades Page 3 of 9 guarantees are not affected thereby. Make good any damage. 8. Heating and.1 Provide and pay for temporary heat and Ventilating any ventilation required during construction, including costs of installation, fuel, operating, maintenance and removal of equipment. Use of direct-fired heaters discharging waste products into work areas will not be permitted unless prior approval is given by Engineer..2 Provide and pay for temporary heat required to ensure ground below footings or grade beam is not and will not become frozen and to ensure ground is and continues unfrozen under interior concrete slabs..3 Furnish and install temporary heat and ventilation in enclosed areas as required to:.1 Facilitate progress of work.2 Protect work and products against dampness and cold.3 Prevent moisture condensation on surfaces.4 Provide ambient temperatures and humidity levels for storage, installation and curing of materials.5 Provide adequate ventilation to meet health regulations for safe working environment.4 Maintain minimum temperature of 10 C or higher where specified as soon as finishing work is commenced and maintain until take over by the Owner..5 Ventilating:.1 Present hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, mists, vapours or gases in areas occupied during construction.

166 Redwood Estates Temporary Facilities Section WTP Upgrades Page 4 of 9.2 Provide local exhaust ventilation to prevent harmful accumulation of hazardous substances into atmosphere of occupied areas..3 Dispose of exhaust materials in manner that will not result in harmful exposure to persons..4 Ventilate storage spaces containing hazardous or volatile materials..5 Continue operation of ventilation and exhaust system for time after cessation of work process to assure removal of harmful elements..6 Maintain strict supervision of operation of temporary heating and ventilating equipment..1 Enforce conformance with applicable codes and standards..2 Enforce safe practices..3 Prevent abuse of services..4 Prevent damage to finishes..5 Vent direct-fired combustion units to outside..7 Permanent heating systems may be used on the written approval of Owner and the Engineer, and provided provisions relating to guarantee, operation, and maintenance are satisfactory to the Owner and Engineer..8 Activate permanent heating system under direction of Engineer to provide temporary heat after taking precautions to assure proper operation of system..9 Protect duct system with filters, replace as necessary. Finally, vacuum clean entire duct system and renew filters.

167 Redwood Estates Temporary Facilities Section WTP Upgrades Page 5 of 9 9. Streets and.1 Provide all necessary flagmen, detour Traffic signs warning lights, signs and barricades, necessary to direct and protect pedestrian and vehicular traffic during the work..2 Conform to all Provincial, Regional, and Municipal Regulations and requirements..3 Remove mud and clay from vehicles leaving site so as to meet Municipal regulations..4 Provide dust control to meet Municipal regulations..5 There shall be no parking permitted on Main Street or anywhere that obstructs the Owner s access to the site. 10. Access.1 Provide and maintain adequate access to project site..2 Supplement municipal snow clearing operations as required to keep access and work areas and adjacent walkways free of snow and ice..3 Maintain the temporary access in a suitable condition to suit construction and access for automobile and construction vehicle access..4 Provide all additional temporary roads and access around the building to facilitate operations on site. Remove same where requires for landscaping or other finishing operations..5 Permanent road systems may be constructed for temporary access but there must meet specification for final grade, compaction and thickness.

168 Redwood Estates Temporary Facilities Section WTP Upgrades Page 6 of Drainage.1 Provide temporary drainage and pumping as necessary to keep excavations, project site and adjacent properties free from water at all times..2 Protect open excavations against flooding and damage due to surface runoff..3 Dispose of water in a manner not detrimental to public and private property, or any portion of work completed or under construction..4 Use Best Management Practices including flocculation tanks, settling basins, or other treatment facilities as required to remove sediments, suspended solids, pollutants, or other materials which would degrade or impair water quality before discharging to storm sewers, water courses or drainage areas. Monitor regularly to ensure effectiveness at methods and compliance with Provincial/Federal Legislation pertaining to water quality and habitat. 12. Shutdown.1 Should work be stopped for any cause, provide protection for work and all necessary cold weather heating during work stoppage. 13. Pollution.1 Cover or wet down dry materials and Control rubbish to prevent blowing dust and debris. 14. Fire.1 Provide and maintain temporary fire Protection extinguishing equipment until Owner s extinguishing equipment is in place..2 Keep all fire hydrants free of obstructions of all kinds.

169 Redwood Estates Temporary Facilities Section WTP Upgrades Page 7 of 9.3 Maintain fire protection systems in operation at all times except for local area being worked on..4 Organize work to maintain required fire exit paths in safe condition..5 Keep fire routes clear for emergency access. Keep clear of snow and obstructions. Do not store materials nor park vehicles in fire routes..6 Relocate or cover combustible materials in the vicinity during welding, cutting or other hot work including foam plastic insulation, in walls and roofs. 15. Roofing.1 Provide and maintain protection from Protection anything that may damage or be detrimental to the waterproofing qualities of the various membranes. Include protection from construction work such as falling objects, wheel and foot traffic, failure to remove debris, scaffolding, hoisting equipment..2 Minimum Protection: 6mm waferboard over 25mm Type 1 polystyrene over 6 mil polyethylene. 16. Protection of.1 Protect surrounding private and public Off-Site and property from damage during performance Public Property of work..2 Be responsible for damage incurred. 17. Dust Screens.1 As the work progresses erect temporary enclosures to divide off areas of finishing work from other areas. Enclosures to be neatly constructed and dust tight.

170 Redwood Estates Temporary Facilities Section WTP Upgrades Page 8 of Temporary.1 Within 3 weeks of Contract award, Signs supply and install, a construction sign with the Contractor s name and the Engineer s name at the site. Size of sign to be 2440 x 3660mm..2 The exact wording, lettering style, layout and colours shall be approved by the Engineer. Submit drawings for approval..3 Site signs shall be single sided. Locate signs on the site as directed by Engineer..4 Construction: 19mm thick exterior grade, medium density overlaid (MDO) Douglas Fir plywood. All edges shall be sanded and sealed..5 Design: Supporting structure, foundations, and framing to withstand all wind and other loadings. Design so that none of the structure or fastenings show on the face of the board..6 Following completion of the signboard erection, paint the back of the signboard and all supporting members with one coat of exterior primer in colour approved by the Engineer..7 Make good any damage to the board caused during construction..8 No other signs or advertisements other than notices of safety, caution and instructions shall be put up on the work or the site. 19. Removal of.1 Remove all temporary facilities from Temporary site including pre-existing temporary Facilities fencing and roads when directed by the Engineer.

171 Redwood Estates Temporary Facilities Section WTP Upgrades Page 9 of 9.2 Repair or replace items damaged by temporary facilities to Engineer s approval. 20. Security.1 Ensure equipment material and construction on site are protected from theft and vandalism. Provide site security to ensure no delay in the completion of the work, and no additional costs are incurred by owner as a result of such theft or vandalism. 21. Overloading.1 Ensure no part of Work is subjected to loading that will endanger its safety or will cause permanent deformation.

172

173 Redwood Estates Products/Workmanship Section WTP Upgrades Page 1 of 8 1. Codes and.1 Conform to or exceed the minimum Standards requirements of the National Building Code, Ontario Building Code Act, CMHC Residential Standards, Ministry of Housing Guide for Family Housing, and all Provincial and Municipal By-Laws and regulations affecting the work and working conditions. Latest editions and revisions and most conservative provisions, in the opinion of the Engineer, apply..2 Part 9 of the Ontario Building Code shall serve as a minimum quality of work and materials..3 All materials or assembly of materials or manufactured items or tests of these shall conform to applicable requirements of the Canadian Standards Association, the Canadian General Standards Board specifications, or in the absence of these, the standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials..4 Where contract documents exceed these minimum code standards, specified standards, and referenced documents, perform the work in accordance with the additional requirements of the Contract Documents..5 Wherever in this document codes and standards are referenced, the latest addition or amendment in effect at the time of tender, shall apply. 2. Acceptable.1 Means that item named and specified by Materials and catalogue name or number forms parts of Products specification and sets standard regarding performance, quality of material and workmanship, and when used in conjunction with a referenced

174 Redwood Estates Products/Workmanship Section WTP Upgrades Page 2 of 8 standard, shall be deemed to supplement the standard..2 Equipment and products shall be one of the named suppliers. 3. V.O.C. s.1 Adhesives and cleaning agents, shall whenever possible, and consistent with performance requirements, be V.O.C. free or of low V.O.C. content. 4. Uniformity of.1 Unless otherwise indicated in the Source specifications maintain uniformity of manufacture for any particular or like item throughout building..2 Like products visible in the finished work shall be identical in appearance, colour, texture, sheen, configuration, arrangement and other characteristic affecting uniformity of appearance in the work. 5. Trade Names.1 Wherever an item or class of material is specified exclusively by trade names or by names of the maker by catalogue reference, only such items shall be used, unless Consulting Engineer s approval for a substitution is secured in writing during tender period..2 Should the contractor desire to substitute another material for one or more specified by name, he shall apply in writing for such permission and state the credit or extra involved by the use of such material. He shall also provide data or samples for the Engineer s consideration. No such material shall be used unless approved in writing by the Engineer. In no case will be substitution of a product manufactured outside Canada for a Canadian-made product be considered.

175 Redwood Estates Products/Workmanship Section WTP Upgrades Page 3 of 8 6. Manufacturer s.1 All manufactured articles, materials, Directions and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as recommended by the manufacturer..2 Do not rely on labels or enclosures provided with products. Obtain written instructions from manufacturers..3 Notify the Engineer in writing of any conflict between these specifications and manufacturer s instructions. The Engineer will designated which document is to be followed. 7. Workmanship.1 Execute work in accordance with the best standard practice utilizing mechanics skilled in their trades. Adequately brace and anchor with proper provision for expansion shrinkage. Erect work true to lines, levels, dimensions, square and plumb. Finish surfaces to be without perceptible sag, warp or surface defects and suitable for the purpose intended. Work shall conform to site conditions and measurements. 8. Patching.1 In patching and making good, and in extending existing construction match in colour and texture all finishes visible within one area and all items of a similar nature to the full satisfaction of the Engineer. 9. Handling.1 Deliver, store and handle all material and products in a manner to prevent damage and deterioration. Ensure they are not exposed to an environment which would increase their moisture content beyond that specified..2 Package materials and products to protect them from damage or

176 Redwood Estates Products/Workmanship Section WTP Upgrades Page 4 of 8 adulteration. Packaging shall be secure and retained unopened and with labels intact until use. Label packages with manufacturer s name, and to describe contents, quantity, location in building if applicable, and other information as may be specified..3 Handle equipment in accordance with manufacturer s and supplier s recommendations..4 Repair or replace damaged material as directed by the Engineer. 10. Protection.1 Protect all work against damage until takeover by the Owner. Remove and replace, at own expense, any damaged work that cannot be repaired or restored to the Engineer s satisfaction..2 Provide protection against spread of dust and dirt beyond work areas..3 Take particular care of all finished work as construction progresses and cover it with the necessary protective materials. Inspect all surfaces, wash and clean as directed upon removal or protective coverings..4 Note all buried services and take care not to damage them. 11. Confining of.1 All materials and equipment shall be Operations confined so as to prove no hazard to those frequenting the site. It is the responsibility of each trade to ensure that all materials, equipment, plant, tools, etc., that have not been incorporated into the construction are safety stored.

177 Redwood Estates Products/Workmanship Section WTP Upgrades Page 5 of Local.1 Obtain specified construction materials Industry and equipment from suppliers in the same locality as the project in-so-far as possible. 13. Fastenings.1 Supply all fastenings, anchors, supports and accessories required for fabrication and erection work..2 Where exposed use metal fastenings and accessories, etc., of same texture, colour and finish as base metal on which they occur..3 Use metal fastenings of same material as the metal component they are anchoring and of metal which will not set up an electrolytic action which would cause damage to the fastening or metal component under moist conditions. Use isolating material to permanently prevent the occurrence of electrolysis due to materials being fastened. In general, use non-corrosive or hot dip galvanized steel anchors for exterior anchors for windows, sheet metal roofing and anchors occurring on or in exterior walls or slabs..4 Use fastenings of such type and size and install in such a manner to provide positive permanent anchorage of the unit to be anchored in position. Install anchors at required spacing to provide required load bearing or shear capacity..5 Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, evenly spaced and neatly laid out..6 Supply adequate instructions and/or templates, and if necessary, supervise installation where fastenings or accessories are required to be built

178 Redwood Estates Products/Workmanship Section WTP Upgrades Page 6 of 8 into work performed by other subcontractors or suppliers..7 Fastenings shall be of a permanent type. Do not use wood plugs..8 Do not use fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is being made..9 Do not use powder activated fastenings on any portion of the work except in conformance with Occupational Health and Safety Act, the Regulations for Construction Projects..10 Protect all metals from other materials which may cause corrosion or deterioration example, concrete on aluminum. 14. Cleaning:.1 Conduct cleaning and disposal General operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws..2 Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from premises daily..3 Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions..4 Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances..5 Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer or surface to be cleaned, and as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. 15. Cleaning.1 Maintain project grounds and public During properties free from accumulations of Construction waste materials and rubbish.

179 Redwood Estates Products/Workmanship Section WTP Upgrades Page 7 of 8.2 Provide on-site dump containers for collection of waste materials and rubbish..3 Remove waste materials and rubbish from work on a daily basis and remove from site on a regular basis..4 Vacuum clean interior of building areas of dirt when ready to receive finishes and continue vacuum cleaning at least daily until building is ready for substantial completion or occupancy. Sweep floors and pavements clean on a daily basis..5 Schedule cleaning operations so that resulting dust and other contaminants will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. 16. Final.1 In preparation for substantial Cleaning performance or occupancy, conduct inspection of sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces..2 Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials, from sight exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces including glass and other polished surfaces..3 Clean lighting reflectors, lenses, and other lighting surfaces..4 Clean and polish all glass, mirrors, hardware, tile, chrome, aluminum, stainless steel, plastic laminate and plumbing, mechanical and electrical fixtures and equipment..5 Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds.

180 Redwood Estates Products/Workmanship Section WTP Upgrades Page 8 of 8.6 Remove debris and surplus materials from roof areas and accessible concealed spaces..7 Remove snow and ice from all access routes to and exits from building including all fire lanes..8 Replace heating, ventilating and air conditioning filters, clean ductwork and clean coils.

181 Redwood Estates Closeout Procedures Section WTP Upgrades Page 1 of 3 Part 1 - General 1.1 References.1 Follow procedures called for in OAA/OGCA Take-Over Procedures, Document No.100, 1997, except as otherwise required by the Construction Lien Act. 1.2 Inspection And Declaration.1 Contractor's Inspection: Contractor and Subcontractors: conduct inspection of Work, identify deficiencies and defects, and repair as required to conform to Contract Documents..1 Notify Engineer in writing of satisfactory completion of Contractor's Inspection and that corrections have been made..2 Request Engineer's Inspection..2 Project Administrator, Engineer and Contractor will perform inspection of Work to identify obvious defects or deficiencies. Contractor to correct Work accordingly..3 Completion: submit written certificate that following have been performed:.1 Work has been completed and inspected for compliance with Contract Documents..2 Defects have been corrected and deficiencies have been completed..3 Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are fully operational..4 Certificates required by Equipment Manufacturers have been submitted..5 Operation of systems have been demonstrated to Owner's personnel.

182 Redwood Estates Closeout Procedures Section WTP Upgrades Page 2 of 3.6 Work is complete and ready for final inspection..4 Final Inspection: when items noted above are completed, request final inspection of Work by Engineer. If Work is incomplete by Engineer, complete outstanding items and request reinspection. 1.3 Cleaning.1 In accordance with Section Products/Workmanship. 1.4 Occupancy.1 Owner reserves the right to occupy and use portions of work whether partially or entirely completed, or whether completed on schedule or not..2 Partial occupancy shall not imply acceptance of work in whole or in part, nor shall it imply acknowledgement that the terms of Agreement are fulfilled. 1.5 System Demonstration.1 Prior to Substantial Performance:.1 Demonstrate operation of each system to Owner and Engineer..2 Instruct personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of equipment and systems, using provided operation and maintenance data as basis for instruction. 1.6 Warranties.1 Refer to Section for details about extended warranties. 1.7 Submittals.1 Refer to Section for submissions required at project completion. 1.8 Final Cleaning.1 Refer to Section Part 2 - Products 2.1 Not Used.1 Not Used.

183 Redwood Estates Closeout Procedures Section WTP Upgrades Page 3 of 3 Part 3 - Execution 3.1 Not Used.1 Not Used.

184

185 Redwood Estates Closeout Submittals Section WTP Upgrades Page 1 of 6 Part 1 - General 1.1 Related Sections Submittal Procedure Closeout Procedure Equipment 1.2 Submittals.1 Submittals: in accordance with Section Submittal Procedures..2 Prepare instructions and data using personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products..3 Copy will be returned after final inspection, with the Engineer's comments..4 Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal..5 Two weeks prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, submit to the Engineer, four final copies of operating and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section Ensure spare parts, maintenance materials and special tools provided are new, undamaged or defective, and of same quality and manufacture as products provided in Work..7 Furnish evidence, if requested, for type, source and quality of products provided..8 Defective products will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Replace products at own expense..9 Pay costs of transportation.

186 Redwood Estates Closeout Submittals Section WTP Upgrades Page 2 of As-Builts And Samples.1 Maintain, in addition to requirements in General Conditions, at site for the Engineer and Owner one record copy of:.1 Contract Drawings..2 Specifications..3 Addenda..4 Change Orders and other modifications to Contract..5 Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples..6 Field test records..7 Inspection certificates..8 Manufacturer's certificates..2 Store record documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage..3 Label record documents and file in accordance with Section number listings in List of Contents of this Project Manual. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters..4 Maintain record documents in clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use record documents for construction purposes..5 Keep record documents and samples available for inspection by the Engineer. 1.4 Recording Actual Site Conditions.1 Record information on set of black line opaque drawings provided by Consulting Engineer..2 Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colours for each major system, for recording

187 Redwood Estates Closeout Submittals Section WTP Upgrades Page 3 of 6 information..3 Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal Work until required information is recorded..4 Contract Drawings and shop drawings: mark each item to record actual construction, including:.1 Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum..2 Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements..3 Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction..4 Field changes of dimension and detail..5 Changes made by change orders..6 Details not on original Contract Drawings..7 References to related shop drawings and modifications..5 Specifications: mark each item to record actual construction, including:.1 Manufacturer, trade name, and catalogue number of each product actually installed, particularly optional items and substitute items..2 Changes made by Addenda and change orders..6 Other Documents: maintain manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications, field

188 Redwood Estates Closeout Submittals Section WTP Upgrades Page 4 of 6 test records, required by individual specifications sections. 1.5 Materials And Finishes.1 Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: include product data, with catalogue number, size, composition, and colour and texture designations..2 Instructions for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance..3 Moisture-Protection and Weather- Exposed Products: include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance..4 Additional Requirements: as specified in individual specifications sections. 1.6 Spare Parts.1 Provide spare parts, in quantities specified in individual specification sections..2 Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work..3 Deliver to site place and store..4 Receive and catalogue items. Submit inventory listing to Consulting Engineer. Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual.

189 Redwood Estates Closeout Submittals Section WTP Upgrades Page 5 of 6.5 Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment. 1.7 Special Tools.1 Provide special tools, in quantities specified in individual specification section..2 Provide items with tags identifying their associated function and equipment..3 Deliver to site; place and store..4 Receive and catalogue items. Submit inventory listing to the Engineer. Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual. 1.8 Storage, Handling And Protection.1 Store spare parts, maintenance materials, and special tools in manner to prevent damage or deterioration..2 Store in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact..3 Store components subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures..4 Store paints and freezable materials in a heated and ventilated room..5 Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of the Engineer Warranties And Bonds.1 Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to Table of Contents listing..2 List subcontractor, supplier, and

190 Redwood Estates Closeout Submittals Section WTP Upgrades Page 6 of 6 Part 2 - Products manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal..3 Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work..4 Except for items put into use with Owner s permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Certificate of Substantial Performance is determined..5 Verity that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized..6 Co-execute submittals when required..7 Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. 2.1 Not Used.1 Not Used. Part 3 - Execution 3.1 Not Used.1 Not Used.

191 Redwood Estates Operation and Section WTP Upgrades Maintenance Manuals Page 1 of 7 Part 1 - General 1.1 Manual.1 An organized compilation of operating and maintenance data, including detailed technical information, documents and records describing operation and maintenance of individual products or systems as specified in individual sections of Specifications..2 Operation and maintenance manual contents shall be neat and legible. Suppliers information shall be original. Photocopies of colour or shaded brochures will not be allowed in the final copies. 1.2 Assembly.1 Assemble, coordinate, bind and index required data into Operation and Maintenance Manual..2 Submit four (2) draft copies of manual to Engineer at least two (2) months prior to operation and performance verification, as stipulated in Section Submit four (2) final copies before the 14-day commissioning period..4 Organize data into a logical sequence..5 Label each section with tabs protected with celluloid covers, fastened to hard paper dividing sheets..6 Type lists and notes..7 Drawings, diagrams and Contractor s literature must be legible. All drawings greater than 215 and 280 shall be neatly folded. Drawings greater than 280 x 450 shall be placed in plastic binding envelopes.

192 Redwood Estates Operation and Section WTP Upgrades Maintenance Manuals Page 2 of 7.8 All measurements to be in metric or modified to show metric equivalents..9 All information contained in the Operation and Maintenance Manual must be specific to the equipment described. Generic information will not be acceptable. 1.3 Binders.1 Binders: Commercial quality, hardcovered, 3 D ring, loose leaf, sized for 215 x 280mm paper, approved by the Engineer..2 Identify contents of each binder on spine. 1.4 Organization of.1 Provide separately-bound volume(s) for Maintenance Manuals each of the following categories:.1 Architectural.2 Process.3 Mechanical.4 Electrical.5 Instrumentation.2 Provide at the beginning of each manual, the following sheets in plastic pockets:.1 Title page showing:.1 Project Title.2 Handover Date.3 General Contractor.4 Subcontractor.2 Table of Contents.3 List of equipment suppliers, items supplies, addresses and telephone numbers..3 Provide separate sections for each type of equipment supplied and for each equipment supplier..4 Include the following in each section:.1 A copy of the equipment data card included at the end of this section

193 Redwood Estates Operation and Section WTP Upgrades Maintenance Manuals Page 3 of 7 for each piece of equipment supplied. NOTE: Retain and bind all originals separately for submission to the Engineer..2 A copy of the reviewed shop drawings, including any changes requested by the Engineer..3 Manufacturer s product data specified in Section Detailed drawings of the equipment showing each part and corresponding factory part numbers..5 Operating instructions..6 Routine maintenance requirements including procedures and a specific description of consumable items such as filters, lubricants, etc., and listing Canadian sources of supply..7 Description of actions to be taken in event of equipment failure..8 Valves schedule and flow diagram..9 Colour coding chart..10 Symbol and legend description..11 Complete disassembly, inspection, repair and reassembly instructions including required tolerances, fastener preloads, specialty tools and any other information necessary to restore equipment to correct operation..12 Include copies of:.1 All performance test plans and performance test results..2 Calibration certificates of instrumentation devices and devices used to perform testing on the works..3 Instrument loop check reports..4 Project approvals from authorities such as TSSA, ESA, lifting device permits,

194 Redwood Estates Operation and Section WTP Upgrades Maintenance Manuals Page 4 of 7 occupancy permits, pressure vessel certificates, etc..5 Completed forms 101, 102, 103 & Pressure test charts and/or affidavits attesting to the success of pressure tests..7 Records of process drain and building sewer piping CCTV inspection..8 Factory acceptance test reports c/w statements of success/acceptance..9 Site acceptance test reports c/w statements of success/acceptance. 1.5 Related Submissions.1 Provide originals of equipment data cards organized as in above..2 Provide originals of all warranties and guarantees bound in one volume. Arrange to conform to same sequence as project specification..3 Provide two additional copies of warranties and guarantees..4 Provide three copies of lists of spare parts and special tools handed over to Owner. Include certification (transmittal, shopping receipt, etc.) of handover to the Owner. Arrange to conform to same sequence as project specification. 1.6 Shop Drawings.1 Bind separately two complete sets of reviewed shop drawings and product data specified in Section Electrical and control wiring diagrams which are greater than 8½

195 Redwood Estates Operation and Section WTP Upgrades Maintenance Manuals Page 5 of 7 x 11 shall not be punched, but shall be contained in plastic envelopes.

196 Redwood Estates Operation and Section WTP Upgrades Maintenance Manuals Page 6 of 7 EQUIPMENT DATA CARD Equipment Description: Department: Equipment ID: Equipment Location ID: MANUFACTURER DATA Manufacturer: Model Number: Serial Number: Catalogue ID: Drawing ID: Purchase Costs:

197 Redwood Estates Operation and Section WTP Upgrades Maintenance Manuals Page 7 of 7 MOTOR DATA Operation: HP/KW: Volts: AMPS: RPM: Size: Frame: Insul: Ambient Temp.: Phase: Type: Encl.: GN: HZ: SF: Miscellaneous Information:

198

199 Redwood Estates Equipment Section WTP Upgrades Page 1 of 12 Part 1 - General 1.1 Intent.1 This section describes general requirements for process, hoisting, mechanical, and electrical equipment relating to supply, installation, testing, and commissioning; and the verification thereof. 1.2 Definitions.1 Manufacturer: The Manufacturer is the person, partnership, or corporation responsible for the fabrication of equipment provided to the Contractor for the completion of the Work..2 Manufacturer s Representative: A Manufacturer s Representative is a trained serviceman empowered by the Manufacturer to provide installation, testing, and commissioning assistance to the Contractor in his performance of these functions. 1.3 Expertise and.1 The Owner recognizes the expertise Responsibility of the Manufacturers..2 Should the Engineer issue an Addendum, Field Order, Change Order, or oral instruction to change the Work which would, in the opinion of the Contractor, compromise the success or safety of the Work, then it shall be incumbent on the Contractor to promptly notify in writing the Engineer and the Owner to this effect within two days. 1.4 Equipment.1 The Contractor shall be Delivery responsible for receiving, unloading, and storage of all equipment..2 The Contractor shall ensure that he has fully informed himself of precautions to be taken in the unloading of equipment and its subsequent storage.

200 Redwood Estates Equipment Section WTP Upgrades Page 2 of 12.3 The Contractor shall inspect the contents of any equipment delivery to satisfy himself of the contents thereof and damage which may have occurred during transport..4 For equipment being delivered to the site, the Contractor shall advise the Engineer seven days in advance of the arrival of the equipment..5 Where the Contractor identifies damage or deficiencies in the equipment delivered, this damage or deficiency shall be reported to the Engineer and Manufacturer prior to unloading. 1.5 Identification.1 Provide a manufacturer s nameplate of Equipment on each piece of equipment..2 Provide tag numbers on all valves and on each piece of equipment. Include abbreviated descriptions on each piece of equipment. Minimum size 75mm x 35mm x 2.5mm thick laminated plastic with black face and engraved white lettering. Letters to be 6mm high..3 Submit list to Engineer for approval. 1.6 Installation.1 Before commencing installation of Assistance equipment, the Contractor shall arrange for the attendance of the Manufacturer s Representative to provide instructions in the methods, techniques, precautions, and other information relevant to the successful installation of the equipment..2 The Contractor shall inform the Engineer, in writing, of the attendance at the site of any Manufacturer s Representative for installation training at least fourteen days prior to arrival.

201 Redwood Estates Equipment Section WTP Upgrades Page 3 of 12.3 When the Manufacturer s Representative is satisfied that the Contractor is aware of all installation requirements, he shall so certify by completing Form 101 attached to this specification..4 Installation of the equipment shall not commence until the Engineer has advised that he has received the completed Form Installation.1 If necessary, or if so directed by the Engineer during the course of installation, the Contractor shall contact the Manufacturer to receive clarification of installation procedures, direction, or any other additional information necessary to continue or complete the installation in an appropriate manner..2 If it is found necessary, or if so directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall arrange for the Manufacturer s Representative to visit the site to provide assistance during installation, all at no cost to the Owner..3 Prior to completing installation, the Contractor shall inform the Manufacturer and arrange for the attendance at the site of the Manufacturer s Representative to verify successful installation..4 The Contractor shall advise the Engineer in writing, at least seven days prior, of the Manufacturer s Representative schedule arrival..5 The Manufacturer s Representative shall conduct a detailed inspection of the installation including alignment,

202 Redwood Estates Equipment Section WTP Upgrades Page 4 of 12 electrical connections, belt tensions, rotation direction, running clearances, lubrication, workmanship and all other items as required to ensure successful operation of the equipment..6 The Manufacturer s Representative shall identify any outstanding deficiencies in the installation..7 In the presence of the Manufacturer s Representative, the Contractor, and the Engineer, the equipment shall then be given a minimum of one hour trial run..8 If deficiencies noted by the Manufacturer s Representative or which become evident in the trial run prejudice the successful completion of the trial run the deficiencies will be rectified by the Contractor and the Manufacturer s Representative will be required to re-inspect the installation, at no cost to the Owner..9 On successful completion of the trial run in the second or subsequent attempt, the Manufacturer s Representative will certify successful installation by completing Form 102 attached to this specification..10 The completed Form 102 shall be delivered to the Engineer prior to departure of the Manufacturer s Representative form the site..11 Tag the equipment with a 100mm by 200mm blue card stating Equipment Checked. Do Not Run stenciled in large black letters. The Contractor shall sign and date each card.

203 Redwood Estates Equipment Section WTP Upgrades Page 5 of Operation.1 Equipment will be subjected to a and Performance demonstration, running test, and Verification performance tests after the installation has been verified and any identified deficiencies have been remedied..2 The Contractor shall inform the Engineer at least fourteen days in advance of conducting the tests and arrange for the attendance of the Manufacturer s Representative. The tests may be concurrent with the inspection of satisfactory installation if mutually agreed by the Contractor and the Engineer. The contractor shall provide the Engineer with a copy of the performance test plan and list parameters to observe with the acceptable range of the parameters..3 The Manufacturer s Representative will conduct all necessary checks to equipment and if necessary, advise the Contractor of any further checking, flushing, cleaning, or other work needed prior to confirming the equipment is ready to run..4 The Contractor shall then operate the equipment for at least one hour to demonstrate to himself the operation of the equipment and any required ancillary services. Any remedial measures required to ensure satisfactory operation shall be promptly undertaken..5 The Contractor shall then notify the Engineer of his readiness to demonstrate the operation of the equipment. The Engineer shall attend, as expeditiously as possible. The Owner s representative, also shall

204 Redwood Estates Equipment Section WTP Upgrades Page 6 of 12 attend if deemed appropriate by the Owner..6 With the assistance of the Manufacturer s Representative, the Contractor will demonstrate that the equipment is properly installed. Alignment, piping, connections, electrical connections, etc. will be checked and if appropriate, code certifications provided..7 The equipment shall then be run for a minimum of one hour. Detailed equipment specifications may require longer durations than one hour refer to detailed specifications. Local control shall be satisfactorily verified by cycling the equipment through several start-stop operations, modulating its output, or some combination. Operating parameters such as temperature, pressure, voltage, vibration, etc. will be checked to ensure that they are within the specified Manufacturer s recommended limits, whichever is more stringent..8 On satisfactory completion of the demonstration run, the equipment will be stopped and critical parameters, such as alignment, will be rechecked..9 The equipment will be restarted and run for three days, of which the last twenty-four hours shall be consecutive. During this period, as practical, conditions will be simulated which represent maximum or most severe, average, and minimum or least severe conditions. These conditions will be mutually agreed by the Contractor and Engineer on the basis of the information contained in the technical specifications, as well as the methods

205 Redwood Estates Equipment Section WTP Upgrades Page 7 of 12 utilized to create the simulated conditions and the time periods allotted to each..10 Performance tests will be conducted either concurrent with or subsequent to the running test, as practical and agreed between the Engineer and the Contractor..11 Performance tests shall be dictated in the technical specifications for each item of equipment or as reasonably required by the Engineer to prove adherence to the requirements listed in the specification..12 Results of the performance tests shall be documented and summarized by the Contractor in a format acceptable to the Engineer..13 All water, chemicals (unless otherwise noted), temporary power, heating, or any other ancillary service required to complete the initial demonstration, running test and performance tests shall be the responsibility of the Owner..14 Should the initial demonstration, running test or performance tests reveal any defects, then these defects shall be promptly rectified and the demonstration, running tests, and/or performance tests shall be repeated to the satisfied of the Engineer. Additional costs incurred by Contractor, the Engineer, or the Owner, due to repeat demonstration, running tests, and/or performance tests shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

206 Redwood Estates Equipment Section WTP Upgrades Page 8 of On successful completion of the demonstration, running test, and performance tests, Form 103 attached to this specification will be signed by the Manufacturer s Representative, Contractor, and the Engineer. The contractor shall affix to FORM 103 the results of performance test including the data documenting the observed values or characteristics of the performance parameters..16 The Contractor shall affix to the tested equipment a 100mm by 200mm yellow card reading Operable Condition Do not Operate without Contractors Permission stenciled on in large black letter. 1.9 Operator.1 For equipment specified to include Training training, arrange for the attendance of the Manufacturer s Representative to provide classroom training session(s)..2 The final date for the training sessions will be established by the Engineer. The date will not necessarily coincide with testing or installation visits by the Manufacturer s Representatives..3 Coordinate the training session(s) with the supplier..4 Prepare a draft handout taking the form of the relevant sections of the operation and maintenance manual supplemented with any other information needed to fully explain the equipment operation..5 Prepare an agenda, broken into suitable time periods outlining the content of the training sessions. Allow 0.5 hours at the beginning of the first period

207 Redwood Estates Equipment Section WTP Upgrades Page 9 of 12 for the Engineer to provide a summary of the design intent relating to that equipment..6 Submit the draft handout and agenda to the Engineer. Upon obtaining the Engineer s acceptance, prepare fifteen copies of the handout and submit to the Engineer. 30 days prior to training session the contractor shall submit a draft training handout and training agenda for Owner review and comment..7 Inform the Engineer of any requirements for audiovisual aids. All training sessions for equipment and processes that are schedules for turnover to operations in whole or in part must be complete prior to the turnover to operations.

208 Redwood Estates Equipment Section WTP Upgrades Page 10 of 12 CERTIFICATE OF READINESS TO INSTALL FORM 101 I have familiarized the installer of the specific installation requirements related to the equipment listed below and am satisfied that he understands the required procedures. PROJECT ITEM OF EQUIPMENT TAG NO. REFERENCE SPECIFICATION MANUFACTURE S REPRESENTATIVE (DATE)

209 Redwood Estates Equipment Section WTP Upgrades Page 11 of 12 CERTIFICATE OF SATISFACTORY INSTALLATION FORM 102 I have completed my check and inspection of the installation listed below and confirm that it is satisfactory and that defects have been remedied to my satisfaction except any as noted below. PROJECT ITEM OF EQUIPMENT TAG NO. REFERENCE SPECIFICATION OUTSTANDING DEFECTS MANUFACTURE S REPRESENTATIVE (DATE)

210 Redwood Estates Equipment Section WTP Upgrades Page 12 of 12 CERTIFICATE OF EQUIPMENT SATISFACTORY PERFORMANCE FORM 103 We certify that the equipment listed below has been operated for at least three days of which the last twenty-four hours were consecutive and that the equipment operates satisfactorily and meets its specified operating criteria. No defects in the equipment were found. The equipment is therefore classed as conforming. PROJECT ITEM OF EQUIPMENT TAG NO. REFERENCE SPECIFICATION MANUFACTURE S REPRESENTATIVE (DATE) (GENERAL CONTRACTOR S REPRESENTATIVE) (DATE) (REPRESENTATIVE OF THE ENGINEER) (DATE)

211 Redwood Estates Commissioning Section WTP Upgrades Page 1 of 10 Part 1 - General 1.1 Intent.1 This section describes the Contractor s responsibilities in the commissioning and handover of the process, electrical, mechanical, and other miscellaneous systems to be installed as part of this work. 1.2 Related Sections.1 Section Submittals.2 Section O&M Manual.3 Section Equipment.4 Section Mechanical General Requirements.5 Section Electrical General Requirements.6 Section Process General Requirements 1.3 Definitions.1 Acceptable performance: a component or system being able to meet specified design parameters under actual load..2 System: For the purpose of this specification section, a system shall be defined as the equipment, piping, controls, ancillary devices, electrical power, etc. which together perform a specific function at the facility..3 Commissioning Authority: the qualified person, company, or agency, retained by the Contractor, that will plan and carry out the overall commissioning process. This organization shall demonstrate: i. Their experience by providing references for three other projects, of similar size and

212 Redwood Estates Commissioning Section WTP Upgrades Page 2 of 10 scope, for which they commissioned the project; ii. A list of key personnel that will be dedicated to this project, along with resumes. The Engineer and the Owner reserves the right to approve/reject the commissioning authority, prior to the commencement of their work based on their experience and personnel..4 Commissioning Plan: the overall document, prepared by the Commissioning Authority, which outlines the organization, scheduling, allocation of resources, documentation, etc., pertaining to the overall commissioning process..5 Commissioning: For the purpose of this specification section, commissioning shall be defined as the successful operation of a system in accordance with its design requirements for a period of 14 days, the last 7 of which shall be consecutive..6 Functional performance testing: that full range of checks and test carried out to determine if all components, sub-systems, systems, and interfaces between systems function in accordance with the contract documents. In this context, "function" includes all modes and sequences of control operation, all interlocks and conditional control responses, and all specified responses to abnormal emergency conditions..7 Hand-Over: For the purpose of this specification section, hand-over shall be defined as the formal turnover of a system to the Owner for his operation.

213 Redwood Estates Commissioning Section WTP Upgrades Page 3 of 10 This shall occur after the end of commissioning through a formal agreement between the Engineer, the Owner, and the Contractor..8 Manufacturer: The Manufacturer is the person, partnership, or corporation responsible for the fabrication of equipment provided to the Contractor for the completion of the Work..9 Manufacturer s Representative: A Manufacturer s Representative is a trained serviceman empowered by the Manufacturer to provide installation, testing, and commissioning assistance to the Contractor in his performance of these functions. 1.4 Commissioning.1 The Contractor will direct the work and Team will have ultimate authority..2 The work of commissioning will be conducted by a team comprised of personnel from the Commissioning Authority, the Contractor, the Owner and the Engineer..3 The Owner s Staff shall represent process personnel, operating staff, and/or maintenance staff..4 The Contractor shall provide personnel representing the appropriate trades, including control and instrumentation personnel during the commissioning. These personnel shall be skilled workmen, able to expedite any minor repairs, adjustments, etc. as are required to complete commissioning with as few delays as possible. 1.5 Commissioning.1 The Commissioning Authority shall Plan develop a detailed methodology for the commissioning of each system at least

214 Redwood Estates Commissioning Section WTP Upgrades Page 4 of calendar days prior to planned start of commissioning. The plan shall include the following:.1 Detailed Schedule of Events, including but not limited to the schedule for completion of testing of all component parts of the system in accordance with Section prior to commissioning of a system..2 Methods for introducing flow, disposing of partially treated effluent, and disposing of any sludge or other residual solids generated during the commissioning process. The Owner will take responsibility for the implementation of these measures..3 Planned attendance schedule for manufacturer s representatives..4 Contingency plans in the event of a process malfunction..5 Drawings and sketches as required to illustrate the planned sequence of events..6 List and details for all temporary equipment (pumps, etc.) required to facilitate commissioning..7 List of all personnel who the Contractor plans for commissioning and hand-over with information indicating their qualifications for this work..8 Training Plan (describing the extent of plan, expected duration of training, personnel involved, schedule, etc.)..2 The commissioning plan shall be reviewed and agreed by the Owner and Engineer prior to its implementation. The Engineer shall be the final arbiter.

215 Redwood Estates Commissioning Section WTP Upgrades Page 5 of 10.3 The Contractor shall co-ordinate this work in consultation with the Owner and Engineer. 1.6 Equipment.1 All process, mechanical, electrical, control and miscellaneous equipment related to a system shall be successfully installed and tested in accordance with Section and any specific requirements noted in other divisions. Form 103 shall be executed for each item..2 Staff training sessions shall be completed..3 Temporary equipment will be installed and tested as necessary to ensure that it functions reliably and consistently through the commissioning period. 1.7 Controls.1 All controls, shall be installed and tested prior to commissioning. 1.8 Timing.1 Testing of the plant systems may not follow directly following completion of installation due to the various contract components required for the complete plant expansion. It may be necessary for Contractors and suppliers to return to the site, if installation has been completed earlier to the stage of testing, to carry out and complete testing of the systems..2 Additional compensation will not be considered for delays and/or the need to return to site for start-up and/or commissioning.

216 Redwood Estates Commissioning Section WTP Upgrades Page 6 of 10 Part 2 Products 2.1 Plant Utility.1 The Owner shall provide power, Services chemicals, and other ancillary services as necessary to operate the plant through the commissioning period. Provision of these services shall be limited to reasonable levels. 2.2 Manpower.1 Supply all staff required during commissioning as necessary to assist the Owner s staff in the operation of the plant processes on a 24 hour basis..2 Supply competent staff capable of maintaining, repairing and adjusting the equipment and controls to achieve the intended design functions during the commissioning period. 2.3 Operating.1 Operating descriptions will be prepared Descriptions for the plant systems. To some degree, the intent of these has been included in the drawings and technical specifications. Other information outlining the operating requirements is available in preliminary form at the office of the Engineer. The Contractor will review these descriptions and will make himself familiar with the requirements in order that he can undertake commissioning in an appropriate manner. 2.4 Design.1 Design parameters for the systems Parameters to be commissioned shall be as defined in the specifications and/or the operating descriptions; as modified by the Engineer. The Commissioning Authority can identify to the Contractor which parameters shall be modified prior to commissioning and shall be responsible for any subsequent

217 Redwood Estates Commissioning Section WTP Upgrades Page 7 of 10 changes during the commissioning period. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Preparation.1 Each item of equipment included in the system to be commissioned shall be satisfactorily tested and Form 103 completed..2 Piping, wiring and the conduit systems shall be finished and tested..3 Services such as seal water, instrument air, etc. shall be completed and tested prior to the commissioning of any systems which require these services..4 Electrical connections shall be completed and inspected to the satisfaction of the governing authorities..5 Control systems shall be completed and the related control software debugged..6 Architectural finishes, heating and ventilation, and lighting shall be substantially complete..7 Provision shall be put in place to divert sewage, sludge, or other process fluid to the area of the plant to be commissioned. 3.2 Sequence.1 Systems shall be commissioned in a logical manner. Upstream components shall be commissioned first to the degree possible..2 The following sequence of events shall be followed:.1 Draft O&M Manuals shall be available at least two (2) months

218 Redwood Estates Commissioning Section WTP Upgrades Page 8 of 10 prior to the performance tests stipulated in Section Operating Descriptions shall be made available 4 weeks prior to testing..3 Operator training shall be undertaken 3 weeks prior to testing..4 Equipment performance tests shall be conducted successfully..5 Wastewater shall be introduced to the system..6 Start and run system in manual mode..7 Turn separate items of equipment to automatic in a planned and logical manner. Ensure that the control system is operating the equipment in a manner which precludes damage of the equipment and which is consistent with the process operating requirements..8 Commence commissioning period of 14 days. The equipment shall operate continuously and successfully through the last seven days of the commissioning period. Minor failures shall not void the commissioning period. The last seven days of the commissioning period shall be re-started if a critical failure occurs. A critical failure shall be deemed as one which prohibits the process form functioning successfully for an 8 hour period or one which creates a safety hazard. Typically, an equipment failure or malfunction which exceeds the redundancy designed into the system shall be considered a major process failure.

219 Redwood Estates Commissioning Section WTP Upgrades Page 9 of 10.3 The contractor will co-ordinate this work in consultation with the Owner and Engineer. 3.3 Commissioning.1 Wastewater will be introduced to the system in a manner which precludes the damage of any equipment or structures..2 Assist in the operation of the plant to achieve the process objectives..3 All components and systems shall be operated in the automatic/manual and the remote/local modes as required to provide proper operation..4 Ensure all bypasses and backup provisions function satisfactorily..5 All minor and major alarm conditions will be induced to ensure that the process reacts as intended, the applicable alarms are annunciated. 3.4 Acceptance.1 The commissioning of a system shall be considered acceptable when the process has operated in a stable manner, satisfying the design criteria for a period of 14 days, the last 7 of which shall be consecutive..2 When a process system has been commissioned satisfactorily, the process system shall be formally accepted for operation and routing maintenance by Owner s forces.

220 Redwood Estates Commissioning Section WTP Upgrades Page 10 of 10 CERTIFICATE OF PROCESS SYSTEM SATISFACTORY PERFORMANCE FORM 104 We certify that the process system listed below has been operated for at least fourteen (14) consecutive days and that each item of equipment in the process system and all related controls operates satisfactorily, as detailed in the Specifications and Drawings. No defects in the equipment were found. The process system is therefore classed as conforming. PROJECT: PROCESS SYSTEM: Process Equipment Description Tag No MANUFACTURER S REPRESENTATIVE DATE REPRESENTATIVE OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR DATE

221 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 1 of General.1 This section covers items common to all sections of Division 20, 23. Division 20 items apply to Division 20 and Obtain and pay for all required permits and approvals..3 The following codes shall apply:.1 Ontario Building Code; O.B.C..2 Ontario Building Code; Part 7 Plumbing..3 Ontario Fire Code..4 National Fire Protection Association; N.F.P.A..4 All code references shall be the latest edition, including revisions and addenda..5 Materials and equipment to be new and free from blemishes, oxidation, damage, etc.. New materials and equipment to be of proven design and quality, and for which replacement parts are readily available. Use current models of equipment..6 It is the intent of the specification that there be one prime contractor for all of Division 20 and 23 work. The prime mechanical shall be responsible for all Division 20 and 23 subtrades. The prime mechanical shall be responsible for overall coordination and commissioning of systems. Division 20 prime contractor shall coordinate time of commissioning with plan prepared by Division Equipment Installation.1 Unions or flanges: provide for ease of maintenance and disassembly..2 Space for servicing, disassembly and removal of equipment and components: provide as recommended by manufacturer or as indicated..3 Equipment drains: pipe to drains, or funnel floor/hub drains..4 Install equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items parallel to or perpendicular to building lines..5 Provide and install all necessary vibration control

222 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 2 of 24 components..6 Pipe dehumidifiers, and other interior mounted equipment drains, such as fan coils, to funnel floor/hub drains. 1.3 Anchor Bolts And Templates.1 Supply and install anchor bolts and templates for equipment provided by this Division. 1.4 Equipment Usage.1 Engineer may use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance. Supply labour, material, and instruments required for testing. Trial usage to apply to all systems. 1.5 Definitions.1 This definition shall apply to all sections and drawings of Division "CONCEALED" - mechanical services and equipment in hung ceilings and non-accessible chases and furred spaces..2 "EXPOSED" - will mean "not concealed" as defined herein, e.g. Mechanical Rooms, Plant Areas..3 "PROVIDE" - will mean supply, installation and connection..4 "Finished Areas" - will mean areas with finish painted walls and will include Plant Areas and Mechanical Rooms..5 "T.S.S.A." shall mean "Technical Standards and Safety Authority"..6 "E.S.A." shall mean "Electrical Safety Authority". 1.6 Protection Of Openings.1 Protect equipment and systems openings from dirt, dust, and other foreign materials with materials appropriate to system. 1.7 Electrical.1 Electrical work to conform to electrical specifications including the following..2 Provide all controls, disconnects, magnetic starters,

223 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 3 of 24 transformers, relays, wiring and panels for all motors and devices for packaged equipment as indicated in various specification sections..3 Electrical equipment shall bear CSA labels and/or ULC approvals to comply with ESA requirements. Conform to the requirements of the Canadian Electrical Code, Ontario Building Code, local, municipal and provincial authorities..4 Control panels to be complete with barriered numbered terminal strip for interconnecting of conductors between master control panel and remote control panel and associated equipment..5 Controls.1 All power and control wiring, relays, transformers and wiring related to motorized dampers, thermostats, controllers, sensors, control panels, control devices, valves, pressure and limit switches, etc..., which are related to control systems to be provided by Division 20, unless specifically indicated on electrical drawings otherwise. Refer to electrical control schematics..2 All wiring to be run in conduit..3 Control wiring to be copper conductor type RW 90 (XLPE); minimum #14 AWG for power circuits and minimum #18 AWG for control only..4 Conduit to be E.M.T. minimum 20mmC complete with set screw couplings. Provide ground conductor in all conduit runs..5 Use liquid tight flexible conduit for final connection to motorized dampers and vibrating equipment..6 Panels to be complete with required components including but not limited to:.1 One main fused switch suitable current rating for the station load. Pad lockable in both open and closed positions. Mechanically panel interlocked door to prevent opening when handle is in "on" position..7 Ensure that electrical contractor has provided for auxiliary contacts for the building control systems.

224 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 4 of Motors.1 Provide motors for mechanical equipment as specified..2 If delivery of specified motor will delay delivery or installation of any equipment, install motor approved by Engineer for temporary use. Final acceptance of equipment will not occur until specified motor is installed..3 Motors under 0.4kW (1/2HP): speed as indicated, continuous duty, built-in overload protection, resilient mount, single phase, 120V, unless otherwise specified or indicated..4 Motors 0.4kW (1/2HP) and larger: EEMAC Class B, squirrel cage induction, speed as indicated, continuous duty, drip proof, ball bearing, maximum temperature rise 40 C (104 F), 3 phase, 600V, unless otherwise specified or indicated..5 Motor efficiency shall be in accordance with CSA C390. Motors 0.75kW (1HP) and larger to be energy efficient motors conforming to ASHRAE Power factor correction shall apply to all motors with 3.73kW (5HP) rating or more..7 All motor starters for loads with a running ampacity (RLA) greater than 20 amps shall be of the solid state reduced voltage type with current ramp and current limit capability. Current limit shall be set at 4 times RLA and ramped to this value over a period of not less 1½ seconds. 1.9 Equipment Supports.1 Equipment supports supplied by equipment manufacturer: specified elsewhere in Division 20 and Equipment supports not by equipment manufacturer: fabricate from structural grade steel..3 Provide all necessary mechanical equipment vibration control, specified or recommended by equipment manufacturer..4 Size anchor bolts to withstand seismic zone acceleration and velocity forces for region of installation.

225 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 5 of 24.5 Provide seismic restraint of equipment, ducting, piping, tanks and machinery in accordance with Section Seismic Restraints Sleeves.1 Pipe sleeves: at points where pipes pass through masonry, concrete or fire rated assemblies and as indicated..2 Schedule 40 steel pipe..3 Cast iron sleeves or steel sleeves with annular fin continuously welded at midpoint:.1 Through foundation walls..2 Where sleeve extends above finished floor..4 Sizes: maximum 6mm (¼") clearance all around, between sleeve and uninsulated pipe or between sleeve and insulation..5 Terminate sleeves flush with surface of concrete and masonry walls, concrete floors on grade and 25mm (1") above other floors. For equipment room floors, terminate 100mm (4") above floor and provide concrete curb..6 Fill voids around pipes:.1 Caulk between sleeve and pipe in foundation walls and below grade floors with waterproof fire retardant non-hardening mastic..2 Where sleeves pass through walls or floors, provide space for firestopping. Where pipes/ducts pass through fire rated walls, floors and partitions, maintain fire rating integrity..3 Ensure no contact between copper tube or pipe and ferrous sleeve..4 Fill future-use sleeves with lime plaster or other easily removable filler..5 Coat exposed exterior surfaces of ferrous sleeves with heavy application of zinc rich paint to CGSB 1-GP-181M+Amdt..7 This Division shall prepare sleeving drawings indicating the size and locations of openings required in concrete floor slabs, roof slabs/decks and walls for piping, ductwork and equipment. In case of failure to provide information in time (i.e. before the concrete is poured) any extras incurred shall be at the expense of this

226 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 6 of 24 Division Escutcheons.1 On pipes passing through walls, partitions, floors and ceilings in finished areas..2 Chrome or nickel plated brass or type 302 stainless steel, one piece type with set screws. Use cast iron type in equipment rooms..3 Outside diameter to cover opening or sleeve..4 Inside diameter to fit around finished pipe..5 Do not use split-type escutcheon plates..6 Secure to pipe on finished surface but not insulation Tests.1 Give minimum 48h written notice of date for tests..2 Insulate or conceal work only after testing and approval by Engineer..3 Conduct tests in presence of Engineer or authority having jurisdiction..4 Bear costs including retesting and making good..5 Piping:.1 General: maintain test pressure without loss for 4h unless otherwise specified..6 Equipment: test as specified in relevant sections..7 Prior to tests, isolate all equipment or other parts which are not designed to withstand test pressures or test medium..8 Provide written confirmation for each test conducted..9 Provide any equipment required to conduct tests Painting.1 To Section Painting..2 Apply at two coats of corrosion resistant primer paint

227 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 7 of 24 to ferrous supports and site fabricated work..3 Prime and touch up marred finished paintwork to match original..4 Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged too extensively to be merely primed and touched up. Items suffering major damage to finish shall be replaced entirely, if in the opinion of the Engineer, the damage is too extensive to be remedied by touch up..5 Convectors, wall fins, unit heaters, cabinet unit heaters (force flows) and other mechanical equipment exposed in finish areas shall be prime painted by manufacturer, unless specified otherwise Demonstration.1 Refer to additional requirements of Section Equipment..2 Supply tools, equipment and personnel to demonstrate and instruct operating and maintenance personnel in operating, servicing of all systems and equipment during regular work hours, prior to acceptance..3 Where specified elsewhere in Division 20, manufacturers to provide demonstrations and instructions..4 Use operation and maintenance manual, as-built drawings, audio visual aids, etc. as part of instruction materials..5 Instruction duration time requirements as specified in appropriate sections..6 Where deemed necessary, Engineer may record these demonstrations on video tape for future reference..7 Demonstration and Operating and Maintenance Instructions to building operating staff to be completed prior to requesting Certification of Substantial Performance. Provide a written certificate that all training has been completed signed by each manufacturer's representative and the Owner's representative Operation and Maintenance Manual.1 Refer to requirement in Section Closeout

228 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 8 of 24 Submittals. Refer to additional requirements of Section Operation and Maintenance Manual..2 Provide operation and maintenance data for equipment supplied. Faxed copies are not acceptable. Photocopied data must be clear..3 Operation and maintenance manual to be approved by, and final copies deposited with, Engineer before final inspection. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be prepared in English..4 Operation data to include:.1 Control schematics for each system including environmental controls..2 Description of each system and its controls..3 Description of operation of each system at various loads together with reset schedules and seasonal variances..4 Operation instruction for each system and each component..5 Description of actions to be taken in event of equipment failure..6 Colour coding chart..7 Symbol and legend description..5 Maintenance data shall include:.1 Servicing, maintenance, operation and trouble-shooting instructions for each item of equipment..2 Data to include schedules of tasks, frequency, tools required and task time..3 Replacement parts list..4 Warranties..6 Performance data to include:.1 Equipment manufacturer's performance data sheets with point of operation as left after commissioning is complete..2 Equipment performance verification test results..3 Special performance data as specified elsewhere..7 Additional data:.1 Prepare and insert into operation and maintenance manual when need for same becomes apparent during demonstrations and instructions specified above..2 The contact information (name, address, contact,

229 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 9 of 24 telephone number, fax number) of the General Contractor and all suppliers must be included in the manual Shop Drawings and Product Data.1 Refer to Section Submittals..2 Shop drawings and product data shall show:.1 Mounting arrangements..2 Operating and maintenance clearances. eg. access door swing spaces..3 Make model and nameplate data for each piece of equipment..4 Size and capacity of each piece of equipment..5 Electrical characteristics..3 Shop drawings and product data shall be accompanied by:.1 Detailed drawings of bases, supports, and anchor bolts..2 Acoustical sound power data, where applicable..3 Points of operation on performance curves..4 Manufacturer to certify as to current model production..5 Certification of compliance to applicable codes..6 All operating and performance data indicated in relevant specification sections..4 Shop drawings shall be submitted by specification section. Do not combine more than one section into one submission..5 Shop drawings shall indicate clearly the materials and/or equipment actually being supplied, all details of construction, accurate dimensions, capacity, operating characteristics and performance. Each shop drawing shall give the identifying number of the specific pump, fan, etc. for which it was prepared (e.g. fan F-7)..6 Each shop drawing for non-catalogue items shall be prepared specifically for this project. Shop drawings and brochures for catalogue items shall be marked clearly to show the items being supplied..7 Each shop drawing or catalogue sheet shall be stamped and signed by the contractor to indicate that he has checked the drawing for conformance with all requirements of the drawings and specifications, that he has co-ordinated this

230 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 10 of 24 equipment with other equipment to which it is attached and/or connected and that he has verified all dimensions to ensure the proper installation of equipment within the available space and without interference with the work of other trades. Ensure that electrical co-ordination is complete before submitting drawings for review. If shop drawings are submitted without the contractors stamp and initials, or it is apparent that the contractor has not completed their review, the shop drawings will be returned by the Engineer and identified to be resubmitted..8 Installation of any equipment shall not start until after final review of shop drawings by the Engineer has been obtained..9 When requested, shop drawings shall be supplemented by data explaining the theory of operation - for example: a variable speed motor control - the Engineer may also request that this information be added to the maintenance and operating manual..10 Provide a lead sheet with the project name, issue date, issue number, specification section number, title of section and with space for shop drawing review stamps for the Contractor and Engineer..11 One original shop drawing will be returned. All copies required for the trades, suppliers or other consultants will be printed by the Contractor..12 Any equipment data, requested calculations, written certifications or other similar information specified or shown on the drawings shall be included with shop drawing submittals..13 The Contractor shall make notations with respect to the following aspects and any other deviations from the contract documents:.1 Deviation from specified performance, electrical requirements and equipment specified..2 Changes in dimensions from equipment indicated or specified, including confirmation that equipment will fit into space allotted. Contractor shall provide written notation how deviations are being addressed and what coordination with other affected trades has been or will be undertaken.

231 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 11 of Engineer review of shop drawings is for general conformance only, and does not relieve the contractor from meeting all aspects of specification. The contractor is solely responsible for the completeness, correctness, and all information presented on shop drawings. There shall be no additional cost to Project for failure of the contractor to complete a thorough review of shop drawings for compliance. The contractor shall not assume engineer has performed a thorough review and the contractor shall be ultimately responsible for completeness of shop drawings and the equipment conformance with specifications..15 Shop drawings shall be submitted in order of delivery requirements. That is, the items which have long deliveries or are to be installed first shall be submitted first. Not all shop drawings shall be submitted at once. The contractor shall coordinate the sequence of submittals with the Engineer at start of project..16 One (1) copy of each reviewed shop drawing must be included in the operation and maintenance manual. Shop drawings stamped "Rejected" or "Resubmit" are not acceptable for inclusion in the manual Cleaning.1 Clean interior and exterior of all systems including strainers..2 In preparation for final acceptance, clean and refurbish all equipment and leave in operating condition including replacement of all filters in all air and piping systems..3 Upon completion remove temporary protection. Remove stains and smudges from paint work. Wash and polish plumbing fixtures..4 During the course of construction, each Subcontractor shall keep his work tidy and not allow an accumulation of debris resulting from his work..5 Upon completion of this work he shall leave the premises in a broom clean condition..6 Replace broken, damaged or scratched fixtures.

232 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 12 of As-Built Drawings.1 Site records:.1 The Engineer will provide the mechanical contractor with two extra sets of white prints on which the mechanical contractor shall clearly mark, as the job progresses, all changes and deviations from that shown on contract drawings. This shall also include changes to existing mechanical systems, control systems and low voltage control wiring. It will not be sufficient to check off line locations. Definite measurements shall be taken for each service line. Drawings shall be kept up-to-date during construction and in addition to field measurements shall include variation orders, field instructions and all other changes. On completion of the building, the mechanical contractor shall forward to the Engineer the two sets of drawings indicating all such changes and deviations for review by the Engineer..2 On a weekly basis, transfer information to reproducibles, revising reproducibles to show all work as actually installed..3 Use different colour waterproof ink for each service..4 Make available for reference purposes and inspection at all times..2 As-built drawings:.1 Prior to completion of project, finalize production of as-built drawings..2 Identify each drawing in lower right hand corner in letters at least 12mm (1/2") high as follows: AS BUILT DRAWINGS: THIS DRAWING HAS BEEN REVISED TO SHOW MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AS INSTALLED" (Signature of Contractor) (date)..3 Submit to Engineer for approval and make corrections as directed..4 Submit completed reproducible as-built drawings with Operating and Maintenance Manuals..5 As-built drawings to be in English Examination of Site and Information.1 The contractor, before tendering shall examine the site, the building construction and services, the Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical drawings and he shall familiarize himself with the

233 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 13 of 24 building construction and finish in order that his tender may include everything necessary for the proper completion of the work..2 It shall be this contractor's responsibility that material and equipment be brought in such assemblies and sizes as to enter into the spaces where they are to be located and to be small enough to be hoisted onto the building without difficulty. Any cutting, patching, etc. involved in getting large assemblies into place shall be the responsibility of this contractor..3 Immediately inform the Engineer, in writing, of all discrepancies, errors, omissions, contradictions and ambiguities. The necessary Addendum or bulletin will be issued to all Bidders. Include a complete cross-checking of Drawing and Specifications for sizes and quantities to correspond correctly. Data mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on Drawings, and vice-versa, must be interpreted as part of the Work. Oral, telephone or "Telex" instructions are not valid. Bring obvious discrepancies or omissions to the attention of the Engineer during the Tender Period. Questions may be presented by bidders up to time of tender closing. Questions presented near this time may not be answered. Where the contractor is not able to obtain directions on questions, they shall prepare quotation based on specifications or drawings and include all items required to comply. Where discrepancies still exist within the documents, contractors shall allow for the more demanding installation, more stringent requirement or more expensive equipment specification. Contractors shall instruct all suppliers and distributors of this time limitation..4 The drawings and specifications are intended to describe complete working systems including all necessary labour and materials. Where items required to complete working system are not specified or showing on drawings, contractor shall include costs at no additional expense to Project Cutting and Remedial Work.1 Assume full responsibility for laying out mechanical work and for any damage caused by incorrectly located equipment

234 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 14 of Coordination and mechanical services..1 Locate distribution systems, equipment and materials to provide minimum interference and maximum useable space..2 Where interference occurs, Engineer shall approve relocation of equipment and materials..3 This contractor shall notify other Subcontractors who are concerned, of all openings, foundation work, hangers, inserts, anchors, or other provisions necessary in their work for the installation of this work and he shall furnish all information and necessary materials in ample time so that proper provisions can be made for same, and shall supply and correctly and accurately place all inserts, sleeves, anchors, etc..4 Division 20 shall supply inserts, hangers, sleeves, anchors, etc. which must be placed within concrete forms to other subcontractors that are concerned. Division 20 shall inform responsible contractor of locations. Where anchors are required to be drilled and placed, Division 20 shall be responsible for their supply and installation..5 Mechanical contractor is responsible for installation of all valves, wells, dampers, taps, flow stations, etc., provided by electrical for controls Requirements of Inspection Departments.1 All work shall be installed in accordance with all laws and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction in each case, particularly all affected departments of the Municipality and Province. Electrical equipment supplied must conform to the regulations of CSA and the local utility. Anything necessary to make the work comply with these requirements shall be provided by this contractor without additional cost to the Project if reasonably could have been foreseen when tendering..2 The contractor shall prepare drawings in addition to Engineer's drawings as may be required by various Inspection Departments having jurisdiction, and obtain their approval before proceeding with the work.

235 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 15 of 24.3 In the event that the Inspection Department's request deviates from the Engineer's layout, contractor shall consult the Engineer before proceeding with same..4 Provide all inspection certificates prior to request for substantial completion. Include copy of inspection certificates in Operation and Maintenance Manuals Drawings.1 The drawings shall be considered to show the general character and scope of the work and not the exact details of the installation. The installation shall be complete with all accessories required for a complete and operative installation..2 The drawings show the approximate location for the special apparatus and the materials throughout the building. The arrangement shown on the drawings is more or less diagrammatic and as such approximate only, and may be altered, as approved by the Engineer, to meet the requirements of the apparatus, etc., and of the building. Each Subcontractor shall be held responsible for all measurements for his work throughout, and he shall arrange his piping, wiring and apparatus to conform to the Architectural and Structural details in a satisfactory manner and shall cooperate with other contractors to ensure that work shall meet all requirements of diverse Contracts..3 The contractor is particularly cautioned that small scale Engineer's plans must be supplemented by his own detail drawings where necessary for proper coordination of the work..4 Items shown on the drawings but not specified or specified but not shown shall be included..5 Items obviously required to provide a complete working system, but not specified nor shown shall be included..6 In order to show more clearly the arrangement of the work, plans and sections do not show every valve, thermometer, pressure gauge or other system accessory. Refer to the Mechanical Standards details and to the specifications to determine the requirements.

236 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 16 of 24.7 Certain details indicated on the drawings are general in nature and specific labelled detail references to each and every occurrence of use are not indicated, however, such details shall be applicable to every occurrence on the drawings..8 The location and size of existing services shown on the drawings are based on the best available information. The actual location of existing services shall be verified in the field before work is commenced. Particular attention shall be paid to buried services..9 Changes and modifications necessary to ensure co-ordination and to avoid interference and conflicts with other trades, or to accommodate existing conditions, shall be made at no extra cost to the Project..10 Leave areas clear of piping and ducts where space is indicated reserved for future equipment, and equipment for other trades..11 Adequate space and provisions shall be left for removal of coils and servicing of equipment, with minimum inconvenience to the operation of systems..12 Before fabricating piping or ducting for installation, make certain that such items can be installed as shown on the drawings without interfering with the structure or the work of all other trades. Any problems that cannot be solved in agreement with the other trades affected, shall be submitted for decision. If piping or ducting is prefabricated prior to the investigation and reaching of a solution to possible interference problems, necessary changes in such prefabricated items shall be made at no extra cost to the Project..13 Off-sets in piping and ducting may not be indicated in all cases, but are to be included in the contract as required..14 All piping and ductwork in areas with finished ceilings shall be concealed in ceiling spaces and shafts or chased into walls. No exposed piping or ductwork shall be installed in such areas unless specifically reviewed by the Engineer. No piping shall be concealed in outside walls.

237 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 17 of Vent pipes, exhaust hoods or other mechanical equipment mounted on roof, or housing for such equipment, shall not be closer to the edge of roof than 1830mm (6'-0"), unless specifically reviewed by the Engineer..16 The actual location of thermostats, switches, etc. shall be reviewed by the Engineer before installation..17 Where equipment is shown to be 'roughed-in only' obtain accurate information from the Engineer before proceeding with the work Installation, Interference and Setting Drawings.1 Installation, interference and setting drawings dimensioned and to scale, shall be submitted for review to the Engineer, as may be required or requested by the Engineer to make clear the work intended or to show its relation to adjacent work or to the work of other trades. When an alternative piece of equipment is to be substituted for equipment shown, drawings of the area involved shall be prepared by this division. Three copies of such drawings shall be submitted for review, of which one will be retained by the Engineer..2 Installation working drawings to 1:50 scale for the mechanical rooms showing plan and sections of the plant, services, bases, curbs, drains, motor terminals, shall be prepared by this division..3 Interference drawings are required for shafts, ceiling spaces and wherever there is possible conflict in the positioning of mechanical equipment, piping, ductwork subtrades or architectural features..4 The design of the structural framing of the mechanical equipment and major pipe run supports has been based on assumed loadings supplied during the design phase. Well ahead of the construction of the affected areas, prepare and submit drawings for review to the Engineer showing the layout and weights of all finally selected mechanical equipment including details of concrete pads, concentrated pipe loads and point reactions of the equipment onto the structure. Structural design has been based on equipment listed by model number. Alternate equipment shall not exceed weight and dimensions of equipment listed without prior approval of Engineer. If

238 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 18 of 24 alternate equipment is not approved by Engineer, Contractor shall supply equipment listed at no additional cost to Project. If alternate equipment is selected, Contractor shall provide all structural revisions necessary and pay all cost including engineering..5 Pump capacities, control valve sizing, etc., have been based on equipment specified. Upon submission of shop drawings, contractor shall review with consultant all design and equipment changes and where required to accommodate design or equipment changes contractor shall engineer and revise equipment capacities as required. There shall be no extra cost to Project for changes to equipment to accommodate changes discussed above. No installations shall proceed until this coordination has been completed Alternates.1 Tenders shall be prepared only on the basis of specified or listed equivalent material..2 The design, space allocation, orientation, piping, control systems, etc., are arranged to suit the material and equipment named by model number in the text of the specifications and shown on the drawings. Assume responsibility for adjustments or extension of the work of this or other Divisions necessary for the accommodation of equivalent or substitute equipment..3 Structural design has been based on equipment listed by model number. Alternate equipment shall not exceed weight and dimensions of equipment listed without prior approval of Engineer. If alternate equipment is not approved by Engineer, contractor shall supply equipment listed at no additional cost to Project. If alternate equipment is selected, contractor shall provide all structural revisions necessary and pay all cost including engineering Energy Consumption.1 Engineer may reject equipment submitted for approval on basis of performance or energy consumed or demanded.

239 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 19 of Conformance.1 Materials specified by referenced standard, select any material that meets or exceeds the specified standard..2 Materials specified by "Prescriptive" or "Performance" specification, select any material meeting or exceeding specification..3 When materials are specified by a Standard, Prescriptive or Performance specifications, upon request of the Engineer, obtain from manufacturer an independent testing laboratory report showing that the material or equipment meets or exceeds the specified requirements..4 Materials specified by naming one or more materials, select any material named. Where only one name appears in the specification, the tender shall include for the specified equipment. For the purpose of these specifications, the term "Acceptable Material" is deemed to be a complete and working commodity as described by a manufacturer's name, catalogue number, trade name or any combination thereof..5 Manufacturers or subcontractors specified by naming one or more, select any one named. Where only one name appears in the specification, the tender shall include for the specified name Statement of Prices.1 To form a basis for progress payments the successful bidder shall submit a statement of his estimated prices for the various portions of the work, including labour, materials and equipment shown separately. The total price of all portions of the work shall equal the total price of the work covered under the mechanical division..2 The successful bidder shall confer with the Engineer to determine the breakdown of work for this contract. An suitable amount (not less then 2%) shall be allowed for commissioning and closeout documentation..3 Payment for equipment will not be advanced 100% upon delivery or completion of installation. An amount of approximately 10% will not be advanced until such time as the equipment is commissioned and operating in

240 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 20 of 24 accordance with tender documents and all closeout documentation has been submitted Metric Conversions.1 Particular care shall be taken with imperial versus S.I. metric conversions. This applies to all services including, but not limited to, equipment, pipes, ductwork and site services in both new and existing installations..2 When converting from one form of measure to the other, do not round-off numbers ASHRAE All mechanical equipment must meet the minimum efficiency standards set out in ASHRAE Submit all necessary information to substantiate conformance Schedule.1 This contractor shall provide a schedule outlining all aspects of the work in sufficient detail to track the progress of the work. Include all critical dates, including delivery to and return of shop drawings to Engineer, inspection dates, dates for training and commissioning systems. Submit schedule to Engineer for review at start of project..2 Contractor shall review schedule on a regular basis and at each construction meeting. The contractor shall provide additional workers as required to meet the schedule. Update schedule as required in conjunction with General Contractor and Engineer Hoisting and Rigging.1 Provide and arrange for transportation, of all equipment and materials to site, and for the rigging, hoisting, storing and setting in place of equipment Workmanship and Qualifications of Workers.1 Perform the work in a neat and careful manner so that items are installed, and will remain, plumb, square and straight. Items not so installed will be rejected and redone at no extra cost to the Engineer.

241 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 21 of 24.2 When required either by the specifications or manufacturer s instructions, have manufacturer or his accredited agent or the supplier supervise the work..3 Provide qualified tradespeople to perform all the work. Provide an on-site supervisor to supervise the work of Division 20. When requested of the Engineer provide documentation demonstrating experience of tradespeople and supervisor. If tradesperson or supervisor does not have adequate experience or qualifications remove from site and provide suitable replacement. Site supervisor to have minimum of 10 years of experience with demonstrated supervisory experience on similar sized projects. Provide resume of site supervisor to consultant prior to start of project. Engineer has the right to reject or remove at any time any worker or site supervisory if in his opinion the individual does not possess the required experience or qualifications. When a personnel has been removed or rejected provide suitable replacement..4 No horseplay will be tolerated on site at any time. The contractor shall be responsible for putting an immediate end to all horseplay Certificates, Permits & Fees.1 The contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all required permits, and pay all fees, in order that the work herein specified may be carried out, and he shall furnish any certificates needed as evidence that the work installed conforms with the laws and regulations of the Municipality and Province and as approved by the local utility Special Tools.1 Provide one set of special tools required to service equipment as recommended by manufacturers Inspection/Takeover Procedures.1 Conform to Closeout Procedures..2 Contractor's Inspection: The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall conduct an inspection of the Work, identify deficiencies and defects; repair as required. Notify the Engineer in writing of satisfactory completion

242 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 22 of 24 of the contractor's Inspection and that corrections have been made. Request an Engineer's Inspection..3 Engineer's Inspection: Engineer and the Contractor will perform an inspection of the Work to identify obvious defects or deficiencies. The contractor shall correct Work accordingly. If during the Engineer's inspection it is obvious that the work is incomplete, the Engineer will notify the contractor without provision of a deficiency list and the contractor shall complete and correct deficiencies as per item.1.4 Final Inspection: When the items noted above are complete, request a final inspection of the Work by the Engineer. If Work is deemed incomplete by the Engineer, complete the outstanding items and request a reinspection..5 Declaration of Substantial Performance: When the Engineer consider deficiencies and defects have been corrected and it appears requirements of the Contract have been substantially performed, make application for Certificate of Substantial Performance. All other requirements noted elsewhere shall be completed prior to request for Certificate of Substantial Completion..6 Do not apply for substantial performance until:.1 All systems are complete and operation..2 All systems have been commissioned and successfully past testing over the entire range of their operating capacities under automatic control. (Note: seasonal or environmental conditions resulting in the delay of some testing will be accommodated by issuance of conditional certificate)..3 Commissioning and testing reports have been submitted for the Engineer's review..4 "As-built" and/or record drawings have been prepared and submitted for the Engineer's review..5 Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been prepared and submitted to the Engineer..6 The Engineer, operating and maintenance personnel have received training on all systems and equipment and the required certificate has been submitted to the Engineer.

243 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 23 of Schedule, Access, Protection and Clean-up.1 The construction schedule places restrictions on the duration of construction within areas and the duration of shut-down of equipment. Refer to the General Conditions for all requirements..2 Access to the site is limited to location and time of day. Access to areas of the building is limited to location and time of day. Refer to the General Conditions for all requirements..3 Refer to the security and protection requirements in the General Conditions, conform to all requirements. In particular no open flames shall be used without prior written approval of the Engineer. There shall be no smoking, and the site shall be kept clean at all times Cutting and Patching.1 The cost of cutting, patching and finishing is not included in this Division s contract..2 This Division shall advise the trade responsible for cutting, in advance of the time required, of the location and extent of cutting required, and any other pertinent information..3 This Division shall advise the trade responsible for patching and finishing of any pertinent information such as, clearance requirements..4 Refer also to item 21, Coordination and 10, Sleeves for other coordination requirements..5 In case of costs arising to correct work due to failure to provide coordination information on time, incorrect sizes or locations or other incorrect pertinent information, shall not be extra to Project Guarantee.1 This contractor shall guarantee all material and workmanship used in the work to be in strict accordance with the specifications, of best quality and type obtainable to give first-class construction and proper and efficient operation, and free from any defects. Any such defects which may appear in any of the work within

244 Redwood Estates Mechanical General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 24 of 24 one year after written acceptance of this work shall be repaired and replaced by this contractor without additional expense to the Owner. Where such defects occur, this contractor shall be held responsible for all costs incurred in making the defective work good..2 This shall not obsolete any longer warranties on specific items of equipment..3 All injuries to adjacent work particularly plaster, wood finishes or other materials, or damage to other equipment, caused by such Protection of Equipment.1 Temporarily protect all equipment and systems throughout construction from damage as required. Remove measures of protection at end of job..2 Any damaged equipment shall be replaced by contractor at no cost to Owner..3 Do not use equipment or systems as support platforms for work above, provide necessary work platforms as required.

245 Redwood Estates Thermal Insulation Section WTP Upgrades For Piping Page 1 of 7 Part 1 - General 1.1 References.1 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).1 CAN/CGSB-51.2, Thermal Insulation, Calcium Silicate, for Exhaust Piping, Machinery and Boilers..2 CAN/CGSB-51.9, Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation for Piping and Round Ducting..3 CAN/CGSB-51.12, Cement, Thermal Insulating and Finishing..4 CAN/CGSB-51.40, Thermal Insulation, Flexible, Elastomeric, Unicellular, Sheet and Pipe Covering..5 CGSB 51-GP-52Ma, Vapour Barrier Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation..6 CGSB 51.53, Jacketing, Polyvinyl, Chloride Sheet, for Insulating Pipes, Vessels and Round Ducts..2 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC).1 CAN/ULC-S102, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies..3 Manufacturer's Trade Associations.1 Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC): National Insulation Standards..4 American Society of Testing Materials..1 ASTM A167, Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip..2 ASTM C335, Test Method for Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulations. 1.2 Shop Drawings.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section Mechanical General Requirements..2 Submit for approval manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation, fabrication for pipe, fittings, valves and jointing recommendations.

246 Redwood Estates Thermal Insulation Section WTP Upgrades For Piping Page 2 of Qualifications.1 Installer to be specialist in performing work of this section and have at least 3 years successful experience in this size and type of project. Installer to be qualified to standards of TIAC. 1.4 Delivery, Storage And Handling.1 Delivery materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address..2 Protect from weather, construction traffic..3 Project against damage from any source..4 Store at temperatures and conditions required by manufacturer. 1.5 Definitions.1 For purposes of this section:.1 "CONCEALED" - insulated mechanical services in suspended ceilings and non-accessible chases and furred-in spaces..2 "EXPOSED" - will mean "not concealed" as defined herein. 1.6 Samples.1 Provide sample mockup of each type of insulation including mock-up of insulation at pipe supports and valves. Samples shall be reviewed and accepted by Consultant prior to start of installations. Part 2 - Products 2.1 Fire And Smoke Rating.1 In accordance with CAN/ULC-S102:.1 Maximum flame spread rating: Maximum smoke developed rating: 50.

247 Redwood Estates Thermal Insulation Section WTP Upgrades For Piping Page 3 of Insulation.1 Mineral fibre as specified herein includes glass fibre, rock wool, slag wool..2 Thermal conductivity ("k" factor) not to exceed W/m C at 24 C (75 F) mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C Rigid moulded mineral fiber to CGSB-51.9 with factory applied vapour retarder jacket to CGSB-51-GP-52Ma, for use on:.1 All water piping..2 Fan coil and cooling coils condensate drain piping..3 Valves and fittings for above piping systems..4 Thickness:.1 Water Piping:.1 up to NPS 1¼ = 25mm (1 in.) thick..2 NPS 1½ & up = 38mm (1-½ in.) thick..2 Fan coil and cooling coil condensate drain piping:.1 All sizes: 25mm (1 in.) thick..4 Flexible unicellular tubular elastomer for use on:.1 Refrigeration suction and liquid lines..2 Thickness:.1 Suction lines all sizes: 25mm (1 ) thick..2 Liquid lines..1 up to NPS 1: 25mm (1 ) thick..2 NPS 1-1/4 & over: 40mm (1-1/2 ) thick..3 Jacketing:.1 Exterior Piping Jacket:.1 Standard of Acceptance: Flex-Clad Insulation systems shall include all flanges, fittings, unions, and other equipment within piping systems. Insulation systems shall include all valves. Insulation for valves and other equipment requiring regular maintenance shall be easily removable and installed per TIAC standards. 2.3 Insulation Securement.1 Tape: Self-adhesive, aluminum, reinforced, 50mm (2 in.) wide minimum.

248 Redwood Estates Thermal Insulation Section WTP Upgrades For Piping Page 4 of 7.2 Contact adhesive: Quick setting..3 Canvas adhesive: Washable..4 Tie wire: 1.5mm (16 Ga.) diameter stainless steel..5 Bands: Stainless steel, 19mm (3/4 in.) wide, 0.5mm (26 Ga.) thick. 2.4 Vapour Retarder Lap Adhesive.1 Water based, fire retardant type, compatible with insulation. 2.5 Outdoor Vapour Retarder Finish.1 Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation..2 Reinforcing fabric: Fibrous glass, untreated 305 g/m², (9 oz./yd²). 2.6 Jackets.1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC):.1 One-piece moulded type to CGSB with pre-formed shapes as required. One piece moulded preferred shapes to be used for all fitting types including mechanical grooved joint fittings and couplings..2 Colours: white..3 Minimum service temperatures: -20 C (-4 F)..4 Maximum service temperature: 65 C (149 F)..5 Moisture vapour transmission: to ASTM E96..6 Thickness: 0.75mm (0.03 in.)..7 Fastenings:.1 Use solvent weld adhesive compatible with insulation to seal laps and joints..2 Tacks..3 Pressure sensitive vinyl tape of matching colour..8 Special requirements:.1 Outdoor: UV rated material at least 0.5mm (0.02 in.) thick.

249 Redwood Estates Thermal Insulation Section WTP Upgrades For Piping Page 5 of Weatherproof Caulking For Jackets Installed Outdoors.1 Non-shrink, permanently flexible, for applications with insulation systems..2 Service temperature range: -73 C to 149 C (-100 F to 300 F)..3 Average non-volatile: 97% by weight..4 Color: gray. Part 3 - Execution 3.1 Pre- Installation Requirement.1 Pressure testing of piping systems and adjacent equipment to be complete, witnessed and certified..2 Surfaces to be clean, dry, free from foreign material. 3.2 Installation.1 Install in accordance with TIAC National Standards..2 Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and this specification..3 Use two layers with staggered joints when required nominal wall thickness exceeds 75mm (3 in.)..4 Maintain uninterrupted continuity and integrity of vapour retarder jacket and finishes..1 Hangers, supports to be outside vapour retarder jacket..5 Supports, Hangers:.1 Apply high compressive strength insulation (maximum 25.4mm (1 in.) thick polyisocyanurate), suitable for service, at oversized saddles and shoes where insulation saddles have not been provided..6 Install in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 90A and ANSI/NFPA 90B.

250 Redwood Estates Thermal Insulation Section WTP Upgrades For Piping Page 6 of 7.7 Preformed: sectional up to NPS12, sectional or curved segmented above NPS Multi-layered: staggered butt joint construction..9 Vertical pipe over NPS 3: insulation supports welded or bolted to pipe directly above lowest pipe fitting. Thereafter, locate on 5m (15 ft.) centres..10 Expansion joints in insulation: terminate single layer and each layer of multiple layers in straight cut at intervals recommended by manufacturer. Leave void of 25mm (1 in.) between terminations. Pack void lightly with flexible mineral insulation..11 Seal and finish exposed ends and other terminations with aluminum jacket..12 Expansion joints in piping: provide for adequate movement of expansion joint without damage to insulation or finishes..13 Flanges and unions at equipment, expansion joints, valves, other components requiring regular maintenance: omit insulation and bevel away from studs and nuts to permit use of tools without damage to insulation, install insulation and finish to permit easy disassembly and replacement without damage to adjacent insulation and finishes..14 Secure pipe insulation by tape at each end and centre of each section, but not greater than 900mm (36 in.) on centres..15 Apply thermal insulation on heat traced piping only after the heat tracing has been tested and accepted. Obtain written confirmation of heat trace acceptance..16 Insulate underside of roof drain body with flexible elastomeric unicellular sheet pipe covering (CGSB-51.40) held in place with 100% coverage of adhesive..17 Protect insulation from weather throughout installation and replace any insulation which has become wet.

251 Redwood Estates Thermal Insulation Section WTP Upgrades For Piping Page 7 of 7.18 Temporarily protect all equipment and systems when working above. Do not use equipment or systems as support during insulation work, provide necessary work platforms as required. 3.3 Removable Pre-Fabricated, Insulation And Enclosures.1 Design: To permit movement of expansion joint and to permit periodic removal and replacement without damage to adjacent insulation..2 Insulation:.1 Insulation, fastenings, finishes and jackets same as system..3 Removable covers for valves and pump heads shall be installed per TIAC National Standards. 3.4 Piping Insulation Jacket Schedules.1 Finishes:.1 Outdoors: Water-proof Aluminum jacket..2 Exposed indoors: PVC jacket..3 Exposed in mechanical rooms: PVC jacket..4 Concealed, indoors: No further finish. 3.5 Installation Of Elastomeric Insulation.1 Insulation to remain dry at all times. Overlaps to manufacturer s instructions. Ensure tight joints..2 Provide vapour retarder as recommended by manufacturer.

252

253 Redwood Estates Thermal Insulation Section WTP Upgrades For Equipment Page 1 of 5 Part 1 - General 1.1 References.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).1 ASHRAE Standard American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).1 ASTM B 209M, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate..2 ASTM C 335, Test Method for Steady State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation..3 ASTM C 449M, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber-Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement..3 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).1 CAN/CGSB-51.11, Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation Blanket..2 CAN/CGSB-51.12, Cement, Thermal Insulating and Finishing..3 CGSB 51-GP-52Ma, Vapour Barrier, Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation..4 Manufacturer's Trade Associations.1 Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC): National Insulation Standards..5 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC).1 CAN/ULC-S102, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies. 1.2 Product Data.1 Submit Product Data in accordance with Section Mechanical General Requirements. 1.3 Manufacturer's Instructions.1 Submit manufacturer's installation with shop drawing submission.

254 Redwood Estates Thermal Insulation Section WTP Upgrades For Equipment Page 2 of 5.2 Installation instructions to include procedures to be used, installation standards to be achieved. 1.4 Qualifications.1 Installer to be specialist in performing work of this section, and have at least 5 years successful experience in this size and type of project, qualified to standards of TIAC. 1.5 Delivery, Storage And Handling.1 Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address..2 Protect from weather and construction traffic..3 Protect against damage from any source..4 Store at temperatures and conditions required by manufacturer. Part 2 - Products 2.1 Fire And Smoke Rating.1 In accordance with CAN/ULC-S102:.1 Maximum flame spread rating: Maximum smoke developed rating: Insulation.1 Mineral fibre as specified herein includes glass fibre, rock wool, slag wool..2 Thermal conductivity ("k" factor) not to exceed specified values at 24 C (75 F) mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C TIAC Code C-2: Mineral fibre blanket unfaced or faced with factory applied vapour retarder jacket (as scheduled in PART 3 of this section)..1 Mineral fibre: to CAN/CGSB Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma.

255 Redwood Estates Thermal Insulation Section WTP Upgrades For Equipment Page 3 of Cement.3 Maximum "k" factor: to CAN/CGSB Thermal insulating and finish.1 To CAN/CGSB Hydraulic setting or Air drying on mineral wool, to ASTM C Jackets.1 Aluminum:.1 To ASTM B Thickness: 0.50 mm (14 Ga.) sheet..3 Finish: sidewalls: corrugated. Top & bottom: smooth..4 Joining: Longitudinal and circumferential slip joints with 50 mm (2 in.) laps..5 Fittings: 0.5 mm (14 Ga.) thick die-shaped fitting covers with factory-attached protective liner..6 Metal jacket banding and mechanical seals: stainless steel, 19 mm (3/4 in.) wide, 0.5 mm (26 Ga.) thick at 300mm (12 in.) spacing. 2.5 Insulation Securements.1 Tape: Self-adhesive, aluminum, reinforced, 50 mm (2 in.) wide minimum..2 Contact adhesive: Quick setting..3 Canvas adhesive: Washable..4 Tie wire: 1.5 mm (15 Ga.) diameter stainless steel..5 Bands: Stainless steel, 19 mm (3/4 in.) wide, 0.5 mm (26 Ga.) thick. 2.6 Vapour Retarder Lap Adhesive.1 Water based, fire retardant type, compatible with insulation. 2.7 Indoor Vapour Retarder Finish.1 Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation.

256 Redwood Estates Thermal Insulation Section WTP Upgrades For Equipment Page 4 of Custom Insulation Covers.1 Pump suction guides, strainers, filters, pumps heads, and water pressure tanks shall have customized removable covers. Covers to be custom fabricated to suit equipment and fabricated of fiberglass impregnated cloth 907g (32 oz.) and filled with insulation. Insulation shall reduce surface temperature of operating equipment below 38 C (100 F). Insulation covers to have "Velcro" strips to permit easy removal and replacement. Part 3 - Execution 3.1 Pre- Installation Requirements.1 Pressure testing of equipment and adjacent piping systems to be complete, witnessed and certified..2 Surfaces to be clean, dry, free from foreign material. 3.2 Installation.1 Install in accordance with TIAC National Standards.1 Cold equipment: to TIAC code 1703-C and 1704-C..2 Cold Equipment:.1 Apply insulation to sidewalls in block form to equipment with wire or strap fastenings. The insulation shall be fabricated using bevelled lags or curved preformed segments and shall be installed in such a manner as to closely fit the equipment contours without voids. Equipment shall have single layer construction. The entire surface shall be given a coating of vapour barrier coating at the rate of coverage as recommended by the manufacturer, embed a layer of reinforcing membrane and then apply a second coat of vapour barrier coating at the rate of coverage as recommended by the manufacturer..2 Apply insulation to heads, transitions, tapers, etc. in block form applied to equipment with wire, stud or strap attached to float rings or anchor rings. The spacing of wire or strap at rings shall not exceed 300mm (12 in.) on centres. The insulation shall be cut to fit snugly with all joints butted together

257 Redwood Estates Thermal Insulation Section WTP Upgrades For Equipment Page 5 of 5 and bevelled to prevent "V" shaped voids between pieces. Equipment shall have single layer construction. The entire surface shall be given a coat of vapour barrier coating at the rate of coverage as recommended by the manufacturer, embed a layer of reinforcing membrane and then apply a second coat of vapour barrier coating at the rate of coverage as recommended by the manufacturer..3 Provide vapour retarder as recommended by manufacturer..3 Apply materials in accordance with insulation and equipment manufacturers instructions and this specification..4 Use two layers with staggered joints when required nominal wall thickness exceeds 50mm (2 in.)..5 Maintain uninterrupted continuity and integrity of vapour retarder jacket and finishes..1 Hangers, supports to be outside vapour retarder jacket..6 Supports, Hangers:.1 Apply high compressive strength insulation, suitable for service, at oversized saddles and shoes where insulation saddles have not been provided..7 Protect insulation from weather throughout installation and replace any insulation which has become wet..8 Temporarily protect all equipment and systems when working above. Do not use equipment or systems as support during insulation work, provide necessary work platforms as required. 3.3 Equipment Insulation Schedules.1 Customized soft removable covers are required for pump heads, filters and pressure tanks. END OF SECTION

258

259 Redwood Estates Copper Tubing & Section WTP Upgrades Fittings Refrigerant Page 1 of 5 Part 1 - General 1.1 Codes And Reference.1 All work and material to be in accordance with following:.1 ANSI B16.22, Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder - Joint Pressure Fittings..2 ANSI B16.24, Bronze Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150 and ANSI B16.26, Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes..4 ANSI/ASME B31.5, Refrigeration Piping..5 ASTM B88M, Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube..6 ASTM B280, Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service..7 CSA B52, Mechanical Refrigeration Code..8 EPS 1/RA/1, Code of Practice for the Reduction of CFC's (Environment Canada)..9 References shall be the latest update version. Part 2 - Products 2.1 Tubing.1 Provide processed tubing for refrigeration installation, deoxidized, dehydrated and sealed..2 Hard copper tube, type ACR, or L to ASTM B88M..3 Annealed copper tube to ASTM B280, with minimum wall thickness as per CSA B52 and ASME B Fittings.1 Service: design pressure 2070 kpa (300 psig) and temperature 121 C (250 F)..2 Brazed: wrought copper to ANSI B Flanged: bronze or brass, Class 150 and Class 300 to ANSI B Flare: Bronze or brass, for refrigeration, to ANSI B16.26.

260 Redwood Estates Copper Tubing & Section WTP Upgrades Fittings Refrigerant Page 2 of Joints.1 Brazing: silver solder, 45% Ag-15% Cu or copper-phosphorous, 95% Cu-5%P..2 Gaskets: non-metallic to ANSI B Accessories.1 Provide check valves, sight glasses, filter driers, mufflers as recommended by the equipment supplier. 2.5 Valves.1 NPS 3/4 and under: Class 500, 3.5 MPa (500psi), globe or angle non-directional type, diaphragm, packless type, with forged brass body and bonnet, moistureproof seal for below freezing applications, brazed connections..2 Over NPS 3/4: Class 375, 2.5 MPa (375psi) globe or angle type, diaphragm, packless type, back-seating, cap seal, with cast bronze body and bonnet, moistureproof seal for below freezing applications, brazed connections. Part 3 - Execution 3.1 General.1 Install and test in accordance with CSA B52..2 EPS 1/RA/1 and ASME B Do work in accordance with manufacturers recommendations..4 Pipe between ductless split systems evaporators and condensers. Piping layout and sizes to be verified by equipment supplier..5 Connect to equipment with isolating valves and unions..6 Provide space for servicing, dissembly and removal of equipment and components all as recommended by manufacturer..7 Protect all openings in piping against entry of foreign material.

261 Redwood Estates Copper Tubing & Section WTP Upgrades Fittings Refrigerant Page 3 of Brazing Procedures.1 Bleed inert gas into pipe during brazing..2 Remove valve internal parts, solenoid valve coils, sight glass..3 Do not apply heat near expansion valve and bulb. 3.3 Piping Installation.1 General:.1 Soft annealed copper tubing: bend without crimping or constriction. Hard drawn copper tubing: do not bend. Minimize use of fittings..2 Hot gas lines:.1 Pitch at least 1:240 down in direction of flow to prevent oil return to compressor during operation..2 Provide trap at base of risers greater than 2400mm (8 ft.) high and at each 7600mm (25 ft.) thereafter..3 Provide inverted deep trap at top of each riser..4 Provide double risers for compressors having capacity modulation..1 Large riser: install traps as specified above..2 Small riser: size for 5.1m/s (16.7 ft./s) at minimum load. Connect of traps on large riser. 3.4 Pressure And Leak Testing.1 Close valves on factory charged equipment and other equipment not designed for test pressures..2 Leak test to CSA B52 before evacuation to 2 MPa (290psi) and 1 MPa (145psi)on high and low sides respectively..3 Test Procedure: Build pressure up to 35kPa (5psi) with refrigerant gas on high and low sides. Supplement with nitrogen to required test pressure. Test for leaks with electronic or halide detector. Repair leaks and repeat tests. 3.5 Dehydration And Charging.1 Close service valves on factory charged equipment..2 Ambient temperatures to be at least 13 C (55 F) for at least 12 h before and during dehydration.

262 Redwood Estates Copper Tubing & Section WTP Upgrades Fittings Refrigerant Page 4 of 5.3 Use copper lines of largest practical size to reduce evacuation time..4 Use 2-stage vacuum pump with gas ballast on 2nd stage capable of pulling 5 Pa (0.0007psia) absolute and filled with dehydrated oil..5 Measure system pressure with vacuum gauge. Take readings with valve between vacuum pump and system closed..6 Triple evacuate all system components containing gases other than correct refrigerant or having lost holding charge as follows:.1 Twice to 14 Pa ( psia) absolute and hold for 4 h..2 Break vacuum with refrigerant to 14 kpa (2psi)..3 Final to 5 Pa (0.0007psia) absolute and hold for at least 12 h..4 Isolate pump from system, record vacuum and time readings until stabilization of vacuum..5 Submit all test results to Engineer..7 Charging:.1 Charge system through filter-drier and charging valve on high side. Low side charging not permitted..2 With compressors off, charge only amount necessary for proper operation of system. If system pressures equalize before system is fully charged, close charging valve and start up. With unit operating, add remainder of charge to system..3 Re-purge charging line if refrigerant container is changed during charging process..8 Checks:.1 Make all checks and measurements as per manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions..2 Record and report all measurements to Engineer. 3.6 Instructions.1 Post instructions in frame with glass cover in accordance CSA B Registration And Inspection.1 Register refrigeration system with Technical Standards

263 Redwood Estates Copper Tubing & Section WTP Upgrades Fittings Refrigerant Page 5 of 5 and Safety Authority when required by CSA B52 and Technical Standard and Safety Act Apply, pay for and have T.S.S.A. inspect refrigeration system when required by CSA B52 or Technical Standards and Safety Act 2000.

264

265 Redwood Estates Ductless Split Air Section WTP Upgrades Conditioning Units Page 1 of 3 Part 1 - General 1.1 Shop Drawings.1 Submit shop drawings and product and Product Data data in accordance with Section Mechanical General Requirements and Section Submittals. 1.2 Maintenance.1 Provide maintenance data for Data incorporation into manual specified in Section Mechanical General Requirements and Section Closeout Submittals. Part 2 - Products 2.1 General.1 Outdoor-mounted, air-cooled, split system, outdoor section condensing unit suitable for on-the-ground, rooftop, wall hung, balcony, patio, or under deck installation, or units may be stacked. Unit shall consist of a hermetic compressor(s), an air-cooled coil, propeller-type blow-thru condenser fans, full refrigerant charge, and control box. Unit shall discharge air horizontally as shown on the contract drawings. Units shall function as the outdoor component of an air-to-air cooling system. Each compressor circuit shall include a service valve set for connection of one indoor fan coil units. Indoor; wallmounted, direct-expansion fan Coil to be matched with the condensing unit refrigeration circuit. 2.2 Quality.1 Systems shall be rated and certified in Assurance accordance with ARI Standards 210/240 and 270. Units shall be listed in the AR directory as a matched set..2 Unit construction shall comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 latest revision, and with the NEC..3 Units shall be constructed in accordance with UL standards and shall

266 Redwood Estates Ductless Split Air Section WTP Upgrades Conditioning Units Page 2 of 3 carry the UL listing label. Units shall have CSA approval..4 Units shall be listed in the CEC directory..5 Unit cabinet shall be capable of withstanding Federal Test Standard No.141 (method 6061) 500-hour salt, spray test..6 Air-cooled condenser coils shall be leak tested at 241 kpa (350 psig) air pressure with the coil submerged in water. 2.3 Delivery,.1 Units shall be shipped in one piece and Storage and shall be stored and handled per unit Handling manufacturer s recommendations. 2.4 Condensing.1 Factory assembled, single piece, air Unit -cooled condensing outdoor unit. Contained within the unit enclosure shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, compressor(s), full charge of R-410A refrigerant, and special features required prior to field start-up..2 Electrical Requirements.1 Unit shall operate on single-phase, 60 cycle power. Voltage as indicated on drawings.2 Unit electrical power shall be a single point connection..3 Unit control voltage to the indoor fan coil shall be 120 V..4 All power and control wiring shall be installed per NEC and all local building codes..5 Unit shall have low-voltage terminal block connections. 2.5 Fan Coil Units.1 Indoor, direct-expansion, wall-mounted fan coil. Unit shall be complete with cooling coil, fan, fan motor, piping connectors, electrical controls,

267 Redwood Estates Ductless Split Air Section WTP Upgrades Conditioning Units Page 3 of 3 microprocessor control system, and integral temperature sensing. Unit shall be furnished with integral wall-mounting bracket and mounting hardware..2 Electrical Requirements.1 Unit shall operate on 208/230V, single phase, 60 Hz power supply. Power and control connections shall have terminal block connections. 2.6 Capacity.1 Condensing Unit: refer to schedule on drawings..2 Evaporator: refer to schedule on drawings. 2.7 Standard of.1 Refer to schedule on drawings. Acceptance Part 3 - Execution 3.1 Installation.1 Install units in accordance with manufacturers instructions and as indicated..2 Pipe condensate drain on each fan coil to floor drain..3 Install refrigerant piping between outdoor condensing unit and indoor evaporator as per manufacturers instruction and Section Copper Tubing & Fittings Refrigerant..4 Provide control wiring between condenser and evaporator as per manufacturers directions. Install wiring in conduit.

268

269 Redwood Estates Common Work Results Section WTP Upgrades for Electrical Page 1 of 12 Part 1 - General 1.1 General.1 Related Sections:.1 Project Waste Management: Section This section covers items common to Divisions 26, 27 and 28. This section supplements requirements of Division References.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CSA C , Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (22nd Edition), Safety Standard for Electrical Installations..2 Hydro Quebec Livre Bleu, 10th Edition, Electrical and Electronic Manufacturer's Association of Canada (EEMAC).1 EEMAC 2Y , Light Gray Colour for Indoor Switch Gear..3 Institute of Electrical and Electronics (IEEE)/National Electrical Safety Code Product Line (NESC).1 IEEE SP , The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms, 7th Edition. 1.3 Definitions.1 Electrical and electronic terms: unless otherwise specified or indicated, terms used in these specifications, and on drawings, are those defined by IEEE SP Design Requirements.1 Operating voltages: to CAN3-C Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices and equipment to operate satisfactorily at 60 Hz within normal operating limits established by above standard.

270 Redwood Estates Common Work Results Section WTP Upgrades for Electrical Page 2 of 12.1 Equipment to operate in extreme operating conditions established in above standard without damage to equipment..3 Language operating requirements: provide identification nameplates and labels for control items in English. 1.5 Submittals.1 Submittals: in accordance with Section Submittal Procedures..2 Submit for review single line electrical diagrams under plexiglass and locate as indicated..1 Electrical distribution system in WTP..3 Shop drawings:.1 Submit wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure co-ordinated installation..2 Identify on wiring diagrams circuit terminals and indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and interconnection between each item of equipment..3 Indicate of drawings clearances for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices..4 If changes are required, notify Consultant of these changes before they are made..4 Quality Control: in accordance with Section Quality Control..1 Provide CSA certified equipment and material..2 Where CSA certified equipment and material is not available, submit such equipment and material to inspection authorities for special inspection before delivery to site..3 Submit test results of installed electrical systems and instrumentation..4 Permits and fees: in accordance with General

271 Redwood Estates Common Work Results Section WTP Upgrades for Electrical Page 3 of 12 Conditions of contract..5 Submit certificate of acceptance from authority having jurisdiction upon completion of Work to Consultant..5 Manufacturer's Field Reports: submit to Consultant manufacturer's written report, within 3 days of review, verifying compliance of Work and electrical system and instrumentation testing, as described in PART 3 - FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. 1.6 Quality Assurance.1 Quality Assurance: in accordance with Section Quality Control..2 Qualifications: electrical Work to be carried out by qualified, licensed electricians or apprentices in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction..1 Employees registered in provincial apprentices program: permitted, under direct supervision of qualified licensed electrician, to perform specific tasks 1.7 Delivery, Storage And Handling.1 Material Delivery Schedule: provide Contractor with schedule within 2 weeks after award of Contract..2 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal. 1.8 System Startup.1 Instruct Consultant and operating personnel in operation, care and maintenance of systems, system equipment and components..2 Arrange and pay for services of manufacturer's factory service Consultant to supervise start-up of installation, check, adjust, balance and calibrate components and instruct operating personnel.

272 Redwood Estates Common Work Results Section WTP Upgrades for Electrical Page 4 of 12.3 Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits as necessary to put equipment in operation, and ensure that operating personnel are conversant will aspects of its care and operation. 1.9 Operating Instructions.1 Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel..2 Operating instructions to include following:.1 Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and item of equipment..2 Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown procedures..3 Safety precautions..4 Procedures to be followed in event of equipment failure..5 Other items of instruction as recommended by manufacturer of each system or item of equipment..3 Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic..4 Post instructions where directed..5 For operating instructions exposed to weather, provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures..6 Ensure operating instructions will not fade when exposed to sunlight and are secured to prevent easy removal or peeling Voltage Ratings.1 Operating voltages: to CAN3-C (R2006)..2 Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices and equipment to operate satisfactorily at 60 Hz within normal operating limits established by above standard. Equipment to operate in extreme operating conditions established in above standard without

273 Redwood Estates Common Work Results Section WTP Upgrades for Electrical Page 5 of 12 Part 2 - Products damage to equipment. 2.1 Materials And Equipment.1 Provide material and equipment in accordance with Section Common Product Requirements..2 Material and equipment to be CSA certified. Where CSA certified is not available, obtain special approval from supply authority before delivery to site and submit such approval as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS..3 Factory assemble control panels and component assemblies, in CSA approved shop. 2.2 Electric Motors, Equipment And Controls.1 Verify installation and co-ordination responsibilities related to motors, equipment and controls, as indicated..2 Provide and install two replacement motors for the existing High Lift pumps. Inverter / Washdown Duty Motors, 5HP, 230/460 Vac, 60hz, base speed 1800rpm, rated max. speed 6000rpm, Frame 184T, Baldor cat.# IDCSWDM3615T.3 Control wiring and conduit: in accordance with Section Control Devices except for conduit, wiring and connections below 50 V which are related to control systems specified in mechanical sections and as shown on mechanical drawings. 2.3 Warning Signs.1 Warning Signs: in accordance with requirements of authority having jurisdiction. 2.4 Wiring Terminations

274 Redwood Estates Common Work Results Section WTP Upgrades for Electrical Page 6 of 12.1 Ensure lugs, terminals, screws used for termination of wiring are suitable for either copper or aluminum conductors..2 Compression lugs required for all wiring terminations #10 AWG and larger. 2.5 Equipment Identification.1 Identify electrical equipment with nameplates and labels as follows:.1 Nameplates: plastic laminate lamicoid 3 mm thick plastic engraving sheet, black face, white core, mechanically attached with self tapping screws..2 Sizes as follows: NAMEPLATE SIZES Size 1 10 x 50 mm 1 line 3 mm high letters Size 2 12 x 70 mm 1 line 5 mm high letters Size 3 12 x 70 mm 2 lines 3 mm high letters Size 4 20 x 90 mm 1 line 8 mm high letters Size 5 20 x 90 mm 2 lines 5 mm high letters Size 6 25 x 100 mm 1 line 12 mm high letters Size 7 25 x 100 mm 2 lines 6 mm high letters.2 Labels: embossed plastic labels with 6 mm high letters unless specified otherwise..3 Wording on nameplates to be approved by Consultant prior to manufacture. Submit for approval as described in Part 1 Submittals..4 Allow for minimum of twenty-five (25) letters per nameplate..5 Nameplates for terminal cabinets and junction boxes to indicate system and/or voltage characteristics..6 Disconnects, starters and contactors: indicate

275 Redwood Estates Common Work Results Section WTP Upgrades for Electrical Page 7 of 12 equipment being controlled, voltage, and where fed from ie: pump 3P-791, 600V-3ph fed from DP-21 breaker 14/15/16..7 Terminal cabinets and pull boxes: indicate system and voltage..8 Identification to be English..9 Panelboards branch circuit type: indicate panel number as designed on detail sheets. Voltage and source panel, ie panel "B" 120/208V-3Ø-4W fed from panel DP- A, breaker 14/15/ Transformers: indicate capacity, primary and secondary voltages, and where fed from and transformer designation number indicating transformer number..11 Distribution panels to have lamicoid labels indicating the equipment which the circuit breaker is feeding and location of the equipment. 2.6 Wiring Identification.1 Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying markings, numbered or coloured plastic tapes, on both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch circuit wiring..2 Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout..3 Colour coding: to CSA C Use colour coded wires in communication cables, matched throughout system. 2.7 Conduit And Cable Identification.1 Colour code conduits, boxes and metallic sheathed cables..2 Code with plastic tape or paint at points where conduit or cable enters wall, ceiling, or floor, and at 15m intervals.

276 Redwood Estates Common Work Results Section WTP Upgrades for Electrical Page 8 of 12.3 Colours: 25mm wide prime colour. Pre-paint all system boxes and covers, power boxes and covers and conduit couplings to match the following: Prime up to 250 V Black 251V to 600V Fire Alarm Data Telephone/PA System Intrusion Detection Access Control Surveillance Mechanical Controls Brown Red Blue White Yellow Purple Green Orange 2.8 Inspection Certificates.1 Contractor to pay for and arrange permits and fees..2 Notify Consultant of changes required by Supply Authority prior to making changes..3 Furnish certificates of acceptance from authorities having jurisdiction on completion of work to Consultant..4 Electrical and fire alarm certificates are required for occupancy permits. Provide letter or certificate for each phase to Consultant. 2.9 Single Line Electrical Diagrams.1 Provide single line electrical diagrams under plexiglass as follows:.1 Electrical distribution system: locate in WTP..2 Drawings: 600 wide x 800 high minimum size Finishes.1 Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by application of rust resistant primer inside and outside, and at least two coats of finish enamel..1 Paint outdoor electrical equipment "equipment

277 Redwood Estates Common Work Results Section WTP Upgrades for Electrical Page 9 of 12 green" finish..2 Paint indoor switchgear and distribution enclosures light gray to EEMAC 2Y-1..2 Clean and touch-up surfaces of shop-painted equipment scratched or marred during shipment or installation to match original paint..3 Clean and prime exposed non-galvanized hangers, racks and fastenings to prevent rusting. Part 3 - Execution 3.1 Installation.1 Do complete installation in accordance with CSA C22.1 except where specified otherwise..2 Do overhead and underground systems in accordance with CSA C22.3 No.1 except where specified otherwise. 3.2 Nameplates And Labels 1 Ensure manufacturer's nameplates, CSA labels and identification nameplates are visible and legible after equipment is installed. 3.3 Conduit And Cable Installation.1 Install conduit and sleeves prior to pouring of concrete..1 Sleeves through concrete: schedule 40 steel pipe sized for free passage of conduit, and protruding 50mm..2 If plastic sleeves are used in fire rated walls or floors, remove before conduit installation..3 Install cables, conduits and fittings embedded or plastered over, close to building structure so furring can be kept to minimum. 3.4 Location Of Outlets

278 Redwood Estates Common Work Results Section WTP Upgrades for Electrical Page 10 of 12.1 Locate outlets in accordance with Section Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings..2 Do not install outlets back-to-back in wall; allow minimum 150 mm horizontal clearance between boxes..3 Change location of outlets at no extra cost or credit, providing distance does not exceed 3000 mm, and information is given before installation..4 Locate light switches on latch side of doors..1 Locate disconnect devices in mechanical and elevator machine rooms on latch side of floor. 3.5 Mounting Heights.1 Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to centreline of equipment unless specified or indicated otherwise..2 If mounting height of equipment is not specified or indicated, verify before proceeding with installation..3 Install electrical equipment at following heights unless indicated otherwise..1 Local switches: 1100mm..2 Wall receptacles:.1 General: 610mm..2 Above top of continuous baseboard heater: 200mm..3 Above top of counters or counter splash backs: 175 mm..4 In mechanical rooms: 1100mm..3 Panelboards: as required by Code or as indicated..4 Telephone and interphone outlets: 610mm..5 Wall mounted telephone and interphone outlets: 1100mm..6 Fire alarm stations: 1100mm..7 Fire alarm horn/strobes: 2000mm..8 Wall mounted speakers: As indicated on drawings..9 Clocks: unless noted otherwise on drawing..10 Door bell pushbuttons: 1100mm..11 Emergency lights: Not less than 2m above finished floor where practical.

279 Redwood Estates Common Work Results Section WTP Upgrades for Electrical Page 11 of Co-Ordination Of Protective Devices.1 Ensure circuit protective devices such as overcurrent trips, relays and fuses are installed to required values and settings. 3.7 Field Quality Control.1 Load Balance:.1 Measure phase current to panelboards with normal loads (lighting) operating at time of acceptance; adjust branch circuit connections as required to obtain best balance of current between phases and record changes..2 Measure phase voltages at loads and adjust transformer taps to within 2% of rated voltage of equipment..3 Provide upon completion of work, load balance report as directed in PART 1 SUBMITTALS: phase and neutral currents on panelboards, dry-core transformers and motor control centres, operating under normal load, as well as hour and date on which each load was measured, and voltage at time of test..2 Conduct following tests in accordance with Section Quality Control.1 Power distribution system including phasing, voltage, grounding and load balancing..2 Circuits originating from branch distribution panels..3 Lighting and its control..4 Motors, heaters and associated control equipment including sequenced operation of systems where applicable..5 Systems: fire alarm system communications..6 Insulation resistance testing:.1 Megger circuits, feeders and equipment up to 350 V with a 500 V instrument..2 Megger V circuits, feeders and equipment with a 1000 V instrument..3 Check resistance to ground before energizing..3 Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnel

280 Redwood Estates Common Work Results Section WTP Upgrades for Electrical Page 12 of 12 required to conduct tests during and at conclusion of project..4 Submit test results for Consultants review..5 Manufacturer s Field Services:.1 Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer s Field Reports as described in PART 1 SUBMITTALS..2 Provide manufacturer s field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer s instructions..3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE. 3.8 Cleaning.1 Clean and touch up surfaces of shop-painted equipment scratched or marred during shipment or installation, to match original paint..2 Clean and prime exposed non-galvanized hangers, racks and fastenings to prevent rusting. 3.9 Co-Ordination Protective Devices.1 Ensure circuit protective devices such as overcurrent trips, relays and fuses are installed to required values and settings.

281 Redwood Estates Control Panels Section WTP Upgrades Page 1 of 4 Part 1 - General 1.1 Related Sections.1 Section Common Work Results from Electrical.2 Section Submittals. 1.2 Shop Drawings And Product Data.1 Submit Product data as per Section Submittals. 1.3 Scope Of Work.1 Provision of one shop assembled Control Panel, in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications, and all associated control related hardware required to control the speed the two new 3ph, 230Vac motors for existing High Lift Pumps, control the ten new electric actuated valves and the on/off control of the existing starters for the Backwash and Booster Pumps, generate alarms, and to communicate alarms to alarm monitoring panel. 1.4 Operating Personnel Training.1 Provide onsite training by qualified personnel for designated operating personnel prior to final commissioning. Training to be in accordance with training plan approved by Consultant..2 Provide training for 3 designated personal on all routine maintenance procedures, minor set point adjustments, replacement of parts, etc. 1.5 Maintenance Data.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for pumping control panel for incorporation into manual..2 Include in this information:.1 Record drawings, wiring diagrams, electrical schematics of equipment as installed..2 Interconnections with numbers and wire sizes.

282 Redwood Estates Control Panels Section WTP Upgrades Page 2 of 4 Part 2 - Products.3 Part numbers for all control panel components..4 Detailed operation and maintenance instructions..5 Spare parts list comprising a complete schedule clearly identified to facilitate re-ordering. 2.1 Pump and Valve Control Description.1 Sequencing of Backwash System to be programmed consistent with Township of South Glengarry s Standard Operating Procedures. 2.2 Pump Control Panel.1 All components to be CSA approved..2 n.a..3 Panel enclosure 60 H x 36 W x 18 D to be Nema 4X of fabricated 304 stainless steel free standing..4 PLC Control Panel to be complete with required components including but not limited to:.1 1 x Enclosure rated Nema 4x, 304 stainless steel.2 1 x Main 200A-3P Disconnect switch c/w breaker.3 2 x 100A-3P Lockable Pump Disconnect switches.4 2 x ABB ACS550 AC Drive 15HP, 240Vac, 462A.5 2 x Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) Selector switches for pump control.6 10 x Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) Selector switches for backwash valves XV-1A, XV-2A, XV-3A, XV-4A, XV-5A, XV-1B, XV-2B, XV-3B, XV-4B & XV-5B.7 1 x Pump 1 Duty Alternate Pump 2 Duty Selector switch.8 1 x Programmable Controller (PLC) complete with HMI interface on unit for minor modification of set points. PLC to be Rockwell (AB) MicroLogix 1400 c/w required I/O modules. 7 HMI to be AB PanelView 800 touch screen..9 1 x AC Unit 2500 btu/hr NEMA 4x -304 SS x ETA circuit breaker for controls.11 1 x 24-28Vdc 5A, 120W power supply.12 1 x 200 watt heater c/w thermostat

283 Redwood Estates Control Panels Section WTP Upgrades Page 3 of 4.13 Both Line and Load side reactors for the VFD s.14 UPS Sized to run for 30mins at 100% rated load, and to be sized such that peak operating load is less than 50% of rated load..6 Terminal Blocks: Terminal blocks shall be rail mounted Phoenix contact UK Series and labelled as indicated..7 Terminal Wiring: Provide shield twisted stranded copper instrument cable for all analog channels from module terminal to terminal block for all I/O including spare channels. Analog output channels shall be fused at terminal block with fuse status indication. All common supply digital output channels shall be fused at the channel output block..8 Wiring Labels: Label all wires with the corresponding I/O designation (e.g. I:12/07 ). Label commons with corresponding uniquely named labels. Analog cable shall be labelled with their channel designation (e.g. I:7.0) on their jacket with the + or - wires individually labelled. All wiring labels shall be mechanically printed and shall be permanent wiring adhesive strips..9 Wiring Duct: Wiring ducts shall be manufactured of high impact self extinguishing warp resistant PVC, grey in colour. Minimum size 50mm W x 75mm H. Provide with continuous cover and finger slots every 20mm on both sides along entire length of the duct..10 Interposing Relays: Provide 120Vac interposing relays, DIN rail mounted with the following features:.1 Indicating light amp 120Vac contact.11 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor: Provide transient voltage surge suppressor. Use Eaton model AGSHW CH 120N 15 X S DIN rail mounted or equal. Part 3 - Execution 3.1 Installation.1 Install shop manufactured Control Panel as indicated by Division 26.

284 Redwood Estates Control Panels Section WTP Upgrades Page 4 of 4.2 Terminate field wiring on terminal blocks as indicated and provide wiring labels to correspond with wire label to which the field wire is to be connected. All ends of the field wiring shall be labelled (ie. At the field device, junction box and control panel). Typically, the wire label would consist of the input or output designation e.g. I:12/07..3 No wiring shall enter the control panel form the top of the enclosure..4 Electrical inspection of panel shall be carried out and completed prior to installation. Proof of all necessary certification will be provided by the contractor to the Engineer at time of installation..5 Configuration of Programmable Relay application software by panel supplier. Copy of software required for programming to be provided to client as part of final submission. Hard and soft copies of programming to be provided to client as part of final submission..6 Commissioning:.1 Cable shields and network grounds shall be tied to noiseless ground..2 Verify proper function of devices which receive power from control panels..3 Check motor rotations..4 Tune process control loops where applicable..5 Verify that all alarms are correctly delayed, set, acknowledged and reset and that both the General Process Alarm to the Alarm Notification responds correctly.

285 Redwood Estates Wire and Lug Section WTP Upgrades Connectors V Page 1 of 2 Part 1 - General 1.1 References.1 CSA C22.2No Wire Connectors..2 CSA International.1 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.18-98(R2003), Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings..2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.65-03(R2008), Wire Connectors (Tri-National Standard with UL 486A-486B and NMX- J-543-ANCE-03)..3 Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers' Association of Canada (EEMAC).1 EEMAC 1Y , Bushing Stud Connectors and Aluminum Adapters (1200 Ampere Maximum Rating)..4 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 1.2 Action And Informational Submittals.1 Submit in accordance with Section Submittals Procedures..2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for wire and lug connectors and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. 1.3 Closeout Submittals.1 Submit in accordance with Section Closeout Submittals..2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for wire and box connectors for incorporation into manual. 1.4 Delivery, Storage And Handling.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section Common Product Requirements and

286 Redwood Estates Wire and Lug Section WTP Upgrades Connectors V Page 2 of 2 with manufacturer's written instructions..2 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address..3 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials, indoors and in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area..2 Store and protect wire and connectors from nicks, scratches, and blemishes..3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new. Part 2 - Products 2.1 Materials.1 All Fixture and Branch Circuit wiring joints, in junction and outlet boxes shall be made with CSA Certified Pressure Type connectors rated at 600 volts minimum (1,000 volts when enclosed in fixture or sign). Connector body shall consist of a cone-shaped coil spring insert, insulated with a colour-coded, flame-retardant shell which shall be knurled for easy grip and capable of use with an Electrician's Pliers..2 All wiring terminations #10AWG and larger to be by compression lugs. Part 3 - Execution 3.1 Installation.1 Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors and:.1 Install wire-nut connectors. Installation shall meet secureness tests in accordance with CSA C22.2 No.65.

287 Redwood Estates Wires and Cables Section WTP Upgrades V Page 1 of 4 Part 1 - General 1.1 Related Sections.1 Section Wire and Box Connectors V. 1.2 References.1 CSA C22.2 No (R2005), Test Methods for Electrical Wires and Cables. 1.3 Product Data.1 Submit product data in accordance with Section Submittal Procedures. 1.4 General.1 Size wires for 3% maximum voltage drop to farthest outlet based a 15A-120V loaded circuit. Maximum suggested home runs to branch panels at 120V for #12 AWG is 13.2m in length, #10 AWG is 22.9m in length, and #8 is 33.5m in length..2 Colour coding shall be as follows for 120/208V:.1 Phase conductors: red, black, blue..2 Neutral conductors: white..3 Bonding to ground: green..3 In 120/208V distribution wiring destined for branch circuit panels supplying power receptacles as part of the designated load, the neutral conductor shall be one size larger than the ungrounded conductors. The grounding conductor within the same raceway or conduit shall be of the same ampacity and size as the ungrounded conductors..4 In 120/208 branch circuits supplying power receptacles, the common neutral conductor of each 3 circuits or 2 circuit group shall be 1 size larger than the ungrounded conductors until the first 2 of 3 or 1 of 2 circuits have been dropped off. The grounding conductor within each group shall be of the same ampacity and size as the ungrounded conductors throughout.

288 Redwood Estates Wires and Cables Section WTP Upgrades V Page 2 of 4.5 Every 3 circuit group or 2 circuit group of 120/208V, branch circuits must carry a dedicated grounding conductor throughout. Part 2 - Products 2.1 Building Wires.1 Conductors: stranded for 12 AWG and larger. Minimum size: 12 AWG..2 Copper conductors: size as indicated, with 600 V insulation of chemically cross-linked polyethylene material (XLPE) rated RW90 and suitable for -40 C ambient, 90 C maximum conductor temperature. 2.2 Armoured Cables.1 Conductors: annealed copper, stranded, 1000V ratings RW90 cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulation suitable for handling at minus 40 C ambient, 90 C maximum conductor temperature, flame test rated FT4..2 Power cabling: TECK90, CU, 1kV construction..3 Control cabling: TECK90, CU,600V construction..4 Minimum conductor size: Unless otherwise indicated, #12 AWG for power and #14 AWG for controls..5 Bonding conductor: Stranded, soft, base copper in multi-conductor cables..6 Inner jacket of PVC (minus 40 C)..7 Aluminum interlocking armour spirally wound over inner jacket..8 Outer jacket: PVC (minus 40 C), flame-retardant, FT4 flame test rated, low acid gas evolution, outer jacket extruded over the armour.

289 Redwood Estates Wires and Cables Section WTP Upgrades V Page 3 of Instrument Wiring.1 Conductors: #16 AWG, 7 strand minimum, tinned copper, unless otherwise indicated, 300V minimum insulation..2 Construction: Twisted, pair, triad and quad grouping with individual and overall shields. Nominal 50mm staggered and 100% aluminum mylar tape shield with minimum 25% overlap..3 Drain wire: over each group, base #20 AWG minimum, tinned copper, in direct contact with shield..4 Jacket: PVC (-40 C) low acid gas, FT4 rated low flame spread..5 Armour: For exposed or direct buried, aluminum or steel interlocking armour with overall PVC jacket..6 General purpose instrumentation cable: Type #9316 by Belden Wire and Cable..7 RS485 cables: 2 pair, #18 AWG stranded copper, separately twisted pairs, overall 100% aluminum polyester shield, tinned copper stranded drain wire by Belden Wire and Cable. Part 3 - Execution 3.1 Installation Of Building Wires.1 Install wiring as follows:.1 In conduit systems in accordance with Section In cabletroughs in accordance with Section In underground ducts in accordance with Section In surface and lighting fixture raceways in accordance with Section In wireways and auxiliary gutters in accordance with Section

290 Redwood Estates Wires and Cables Section WTP Upgrades V Page 4 of Installation Of Armoured Cables.1 Provide separate raceways for power, control and instrumentation wiring..2 Terminate cables in accordance with Section Wire and Box Connectors V. 3.3 Installation Of Instrumentation Cables.1 Install instrumentation cables in conduit, and cable troughs..2 Ground cable shield at control panel end only..3 Provide control cable with 300V insulation to units without 575, or 600V power, 600V insulation to units with 575 or 600V power requirements..4 Segregate signal wiring from control wiring. Do not intermix categories of control wiring: 120 VAC, 24 Vdc signal, 24 Vdc control, communication wiring.

291 Redwood Estates Grounding-Secondary Section WTP Upgrades Page 1 of 5 Part 1 - General 1.1 Related Sections.1 Section Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal..2 Section Common Work Results - Electrical. 1.2 References.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).1 ANSI/IEEE , IEEE Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding..2 Canada Green Building Council (CaGBC).2 LEED Canada-NC-[2009], LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design): Green Building Rating System for New Construction and Major Renovations Canadian Standards Association, (CSA International). 1.3 Action And Informational Submittals.1 Submit in accordance with Section Submittal Procedures..2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for grounding equipment and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. 1.4 Closeout Submittals.1 Submit in accordance with Section Closeout Submittals..2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for grounding equipment for incorporation into manual.

292 Redwood Estates Grounding-Secondary Section WTP Upgrades Page 2 of Delivery, Storage And Handling.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section Common Product Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions..2 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address..3 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials off ground, or indoors or in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area..2 Store and protect grounding equipment form nicks, scratches, and blemishes..3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new. Part 2 - Products 2.1 Equipment.1 Clamps for grounding of conductor: size as required to electrically conductive underground water pipe..2 Copper conductor: minimum 6m long for each concrete encased electrode, bare, stranded, tinned, soft annealed, size as indicated..3 Rod electrodes: copper clad steel 20mm dia by 3m long..4 Grounding conductors: bare stranded copper, tinned, soft annealed, size as indicated..5 Insulated grounding conductors: green, type RW90..6 Ground bus: copper, size as indicated, complete with insulated supports, fastenings, connectors..7 Non-corroding accessories necessary for grounding system, type, size, material as indicated, including but not necessarily limited to:.1 Grounding and bonding bushings.

293 Redwood Estates Grounding-Secondary Section WTP Upgrades Page 3 of 5 Part 3 - Execution.2 Protective type clamps..3 Bolted type conductor connectors..4 Thermit welded type conductor connectors..5 Bonding jumpers, straps..6 Pressure wire connectors. 3.1 Installation General.1 Install complete permanent, continuous grounding system including, electrodes, conductors, connectors, accessories. Where PVC, conduit is used, run ground wire in conduit..2 Install connectors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions..3 Protect exposed grounding conductors from mechanical injury..4 Make buried connections, and connections to conductive water main, electrodes, using permanent mechanical connectors or inspectable wrought copper compression connectors to ANSI/IEEE Use mechanical connectors for grounding connections to equipment provided with lugs..6 Soldered joints not permitted..7 Install bonding wire for flexible conduit, connected at both ends to grounding bushing, solderless lug, clamp or cup washer and screw. Neatly cleat bonding wire to exterior of flexible conduit..8 Install flexible ground straps for bus duct enclosure joints, where such bonding is not inherently provided with equipment..9 Install separate ground conductor to outdoor lighting standards..10 Connect building structural steel and metal siding to ground by welding copper to steel.

294 Redwood Estates Grounding-Secondary Section WTP Upgrades Page 4 of 5.11 Make grounding connections in radial configuration only, with connections terminating at street side of water pipe. Avoid loop connections..12 Ground secondary service pedestals..13 Bond gas main, incoming telephone cable TV service, lan, main communications and subclosets with #6 bond wire. 3.2 Electrodes.1 Make ground connections to continuously conductive underground water pipe on street side of water meter..2 Install water meter shunt..3 Install concrete encased electrodes in building foundation footings, with terminal connected to grounding network..4 Install rod, electrodes and make grounding connections..5 Bond separate, multiple electrodes together..6 Use size 2/0 AWG copper conductors for connections to electrodes..7 Make special provision for installing electrodes that will give acceptable resistance to ground value where rock or sand terrain prevails. Ground as indicated. 3.3 Equipment Grounding.1 Install grounding connections to typical equipment included in, but not necessarily limited to following list. Service equipment, transformers, switchgear, duct systems, frames of motors, motor control centres, starters, control panels, building steel work, distribution panels, outdoor lighting.

295 Redwood Estates Grounding-Secondary Section WTP Upgrades Page 5 of Communication Systems.1 Install grounding connections for telephone, sound, fire alarm, intercommunication systems as follows:.1 Telephones: make telephone grounding system in accordance with telephone company's requirements..2 Sound, fire alarm, intercommunication systems as indicated. 3.5 Field Quality Control.1 Perform tests in accordance with Section Common Work Results - Electrical..2 Perform ground continuity and resistance tests using method appropriate to site conditions and to approval of Consultant and local authority having jurisdiction over installation..3 Perform tests before energizing electrical system..4 Disconnect ground fault indicator during tests.

296

297 Redwood Estates Hangers and Supports Section WTP Upgrades for Electrical Page 1 of 2 Systems Part 1 - General 1.1 Not Applicable.1 Not Applicable Part 2 - Products 2.1 Support Channels.1 U shape, size 41 x 41mm, 2.5mm thick, surface mounted or suspended. Part 3 - Execution 3.1 Installation.1 Secure equipment to poured concrete with Hilti HIT adhesive system used elsewhere. Hilti HIT system unnecessary for conduit..2 Secure electrical equipment (transformers, disconnect switches, panels, starters, etc.) to concrete masonry walls with minimum 13mm dia. Hilti HY-70 (hollow block location) with 51mm embedment or Hilti HY-200 (grouted block location) with 114mm embedment up to a maximum loading of 150# per anchor. For lightweight electrical components supported off concrete masonry walls use 3/16 Tapcons with 50mm embedment up to a maximum loading of 25# per anchor. For all other equipment supports, for equipment anchors in excess of the above limits, or for alternate fastening systems, approval must be obtained from structural engineer and owner's representative..3 Support equipment, conduit or cables using clips, spring loaded bolts, cable clamps designed as accessories to basic channel members..4 Fasten exposed conduit or cables to building construction or support system using straps..1 One-hole steel straps to secure surface conduits and cables 50mm and smaller..2 Two-hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger than 50mm..3 Beam clamps to secure conduit to exposed steel work.

298 Redwood Estates Hangers and Supports Section WTP Upgrades for Electrical Page 2 of 2 Systems.4 Do not secure directly to roof deck..5 Suspended support systems..1 Support individual cable or conduit runs with 6mm dia threaded rods and spring clips..2 Support 2 or more cables or conduits on channels supported by 6mm dia threaded rod hangers where direct fastening to building construction is impractical..6 For surface mounting of two or more conduits use channels at 1.5m oc spacing..7 Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of support structures where indicated or as required to support conduit and cable runs..8 Ensure adequate support for raceways and cables dropped vertically to equipment where there is no wall support..9 Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure raceways or cables..10 Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for conduit or cable support except with permission of other trade and approval of Engineer..11 Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment cables and conduits, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation recommendations..12 Do not suspend from metal deck..13 Any wall penetrations of conduit to be done neatly through core holes.

299 Redwood Estates Splitters, Junction, Section WTP Upgrades Pull Boxes and Page 1 of 2 Cabinet Part 1 - General 1.1 Shop Drawings And Product Data.1 Submit shop drawings and product data for cabinets in accordance with Section Submittal Procedures. Part 2 - Products 2.1 Splitters.1 Sheet metal enclosure, welded corners and formed hinged cover suitable for locking in closed position..2 Main and branch lugs to match required size and number of incoming and outgoing conductors as indicated..3 At least three spare terminals on each set of lugs in splitters less than 400 A. 2.2 Junction And Pull Boxes.1 Welded steel construction with screw-on flat covers for surface mounting..2 Covers with 25 mm minimum extension all around, for flush-mounted pull and junction boxes. 2.3 Cabinets.1 Type E: sheet steel, hinged door and return flange overlapping sides, handle, lock and catch, for surface mounting..2 Type T: sheet steel cabinet, with hinged door, latch, lock, 2 keys, containing 19 mm sheet steel backboard for surface mounting..3 Type T cabinets for bell telephone, lan, public address and intercom systems shall be minimum 1000H x 600W x 150 deep. Part 3 - Execution 3.1 Splitter Installation

300 Redwood Estates Splitters, Junction, Section WTP Upgrades Pull Boxes and Page 2 of 2 Cabinet.1 Install splitters and mount plumb, true and square to the building lines..2 Extend splitters full length of equipment arrangement except where indicated otherwise. 3.2 Junction, Pull Boxes And Cabinets Installation.1 Install pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations..2 Mount cabinets with top not higher than 2 m above finished floor..3 Install terminal block as indicated in Type T cabinets..4 Only main terminal & junction boxes are indicated. Install pull boxes so as not to exceed 30 m of conduit run between pull boxes. 3.3 Identification.1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section Common Work Results - Electrical..2 Install size 2 identification labels indicating system name voltage and phase.

301 Redwood Estates Outlet Boxes, Section WTP Upgrades Conduit Boxes and Page 1 of 2 Fittings Part 1 - General 1.1 References.1 CSA C , Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1. Part 2 - Products 2.1 Outlet And Conduit Boxes General.1 Size boxes in accordance with CSA C mm square or larger outlet boxes as required for special devices..3 Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped..4 Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices. Identify future use of outlet on back of cover..5 Combination boxes with barriers where outlets for more than one system are grouped. 2.2 Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes.1 Electro-galvanized steel single and multi gang flush device boxes for flush installation, minimum size 76 x 50 x 38mm or as indicated. 100mm square outlet boxes when more than one conduit enters one side with extension and plaster rings as required..2 Electro-galvanized steel utility boxes for outlets connected to surface-mounted EMT conduit, minimum size 100 x 54 x 48mm mm square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixture outlets mm square outlet boxes with extension and plaster rings for flush mounting devices in finished plaster walls. 2.3 Masonry Boxes.1 Electro-galvanized steel masonry single and multi gang

302 Redwood Estates Outlet Boxes, Section WTP Upgrades Conduit Boxes and Page 2 of 2 Fittings 2.4 Concrete Boxes boxes for devices flush mounted in exposed block walls..1 Electro-galvanized sheet steel concrete type boxes for flush mount in concrete with matching extension and plaster rings as required. 2.5 Conduit Boxes.1 Cast FS or FD aluminum/feraloy boxes with factory-threaded hubs and mounting feet for surface wiring of switches and receptacle in mechanical and electrical rooms and unfinished areas. 2.6 Fittings - General.1 Bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats..2 Knock-out fillers to prevent entry of debris..3 Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 32 mm and pull boxes for larger conduits..4 Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes. Part 3 - Execution 3.1 Installation.1 Support boxes independently of connecting conduits..2 Fill boxes with paper, sponges or foam or similar approved material to prevent entry of debris during construction. Remove upon completion of work..3 For flush installations mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster rings to permit wall finish to come within 6 mm of opening..4 Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit and armoured cable connections. Reducing washers are not allowed.

303 Redwood Estates Conduit, Conduit Section WTP Upgrades Fastenings and Page 1 of 5 Conduit Fittings Part 1 - General 1.1 Related Sections Common Work Results - For Electrical. 1.2 References.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CAN/CSA C22.2 No (R2003), Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes, Fittings and Associated Hardware, A National Standard of Canada..2 CSA C22.2 No , Flexible Metal Conduit and Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit..3 CSA C22.2 No. 83-M1985(R2003), Electrical Metallic Tubing..4 CSA C22.2 No M1984(R2003), Rigid PVC (Unplasticized) Conduit. Part 2 - Products 2.1 Location Of Conduit.1 Drawings do not indicate all conduit runs. Those indicated are in diagrammic form only. Provide all conduits from end point to source point as necessary to form complete system. In these cases provide conduit as indicated. Use armored cable where indicated. Coordinate exact routing with General Contractor and submit routing plan to Consultant for approval prior to any installation..2 All conduit runs within the building are to be above grade. Do not run conduits under the slab unless explicitly indicated on drawings. 2.2 Conduits.1 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): to CSA C22.2 No. 83, with couplings..2 Rigid pvc conduit: to CSA C22.2 No Flexible metal conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 56, aluminum liquid-tight flexible metal.

304 Redwood Estates Conduit, Conduit Section WTP Upgrades Fastenings and Page 2 of 5 Conduit Fittings 2.3 Conduit Fastenings.1 One hole steel straps to secure surface conduits 50mm and smaller..1 Two hole steel straps for conduits larger than 50mm..2 Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel work..3 Channel type supports for two or more conduits at 1.5m on centre..4 Threaded rods, 6mm diameter, to support suspended channels. 2.4 Conduit Fittings.1 Fittings: to CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 18, manufactured for use with conduit specified. Coating: same as conduit..2 Ensure factory "ells" where 90 degrees bends for 25mm and larger conduits..3 Set-screws connectors and couplings for EMT. 2.5 Expansion Fittings For Rigid Conduit.1 Weatherproof expansion fittings with internal bonding assembly suitable for 100mm linear expansion..2 Watertight expansion fittings with integral bonding jumper suitable for linear expansion and 19 mm deflection..3 Weatherproof expansion fittings for linear expansion at entry to panel. 2.6 Fish Cord.1 Polypropylene. Part 3 - Execution 3.1 Manufacturer's Instructions

305 Redwood Estates Conduit, Conduit Section WTP Upgrades Fastenings and Page 3 of 5 Conduit Fittings.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets. 3.2 Installation.1 Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and cause minimum interference in spaces through which they pass..2 Conceal conduits except in mechanical and electrical service rooms in unfinished areas..3 Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT), except in cast concrete, for main branch circuit conductor runs. Use from main branch circuit runs for drops to an wiring devices..4 Use rigid pvc conduit underground or in corrosive areas..5 Use flexible metal conduit for connection to motors in dry areas, connection to recessed incandescent fixtures without prewired outlet box, connection to surface or recessed fluorescent fixtures & work in movable metal partitions..6 Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for connection to motors or vibrating equipment in damp, wet or corrosive locations..7 Use explosion proof flexible connection for connection to explosion proof motors..8 Install conduit sealing fittings in hazardous areas..1 Fill with compound..9 Minimum conduit size for lighting and power circuits: 21mm..10 Bend conduit cold:.1 Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more than

306 Redwood Estates Conduit, Conduit Section WTP Upgrades Fastenings and Page 4 of 5 Conduit Fittings 1/10th of its original diameter..11 Mechanically bend steel conduit over 21mm diameter..12 Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw conduits up tight..13 Install fish cord in empty conduits..14 Run 2-25mm spare conduits up to accessible t-bar ceiling space from each flush panel..1 Terminate these conduits in 150 x 150 x 100mm junction boxes in ceiling space or in case of an exposed concrete slab, terminate each conduit in surface type box..15 Remove and replace blocked conduit sections..1 Do not use liquids to clean out conduits..16 Dry conduits out before installing wire..17 Conduit wall penetrations to be performed neatly by core holes. 3.3 Surface Conduits.1 Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines..2 Locate conduits behind infrared or gas fired heaters with 1.5 m clearance..3 Run conduits in flanged portion of structural steel..4 Group conduits wherever possible on surface channels..5 Do not pass conduits through structural members except as indicated..6 Do not locate conduits less than 75mm parallel to steam or hot water lines with minimum of 25mm at crossovers. 3.4 Concealed Conduits.1 Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

307 Redwood Estates Conduit, Conduit Section WTP Upgrades Fastenings and Page 5 of 5 Conduit Fittings.2 Do not install horizontal runs in masonry walls..3 Do not install conduits in terrazzo or concrete toppings. 3.5 Conduits Underground.1 Slope conduits to provide drainage..2 Waterproof joints (pvc excepted) with heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.6 Cleaning.1 Proceed in accordance with Section Cleaning..2 On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.

308

309 Redwood Estates Wiring Devices Section WTP Upgrades Page 1 of 5 Part 1 - General 1.1 Section Includes.1 Switches, receptacles, wiring devices, cover plates and their installation. 1.2 Related Sections.1 Section Submittal Procedures..2 Section Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal..3 Section Common Work Results - Electrical. 1.3 References.1 CSA International.1 CSA C22.2 No.42-10, General Use Receptacles, Attachment Plugs and Similar Devices..2 CAN/CSA C22.2 No (R2009), Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices (Bi-national standard, with UL 514D)..3 CSA C22.2 No.55-M1986 (R2008), Special Use Switches..4 CSA C22.2 No , General-Use Snap Switches (Bi-national standard, with UL 20). 1.4 Action And Informational Submittals.1 Submit in accordance with Section Submittal Procedures..2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for wiring devices an dinclude product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations..3 Shop Drawings:.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Ontario.

310 Redwood Estates Wiring Devices Section WTP Upgrades Page 2 of Closeout Submittals.1 Submit in accordance with Section Closeout Submittals..2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for wiring devices for incorporation into manual. 1.6 Delivery, Storage And Handling.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section Common Product Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions..2 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address..3 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials off ground, indoors or in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area..2 Store and protect wiring devices from nicks, scratches, and blemishes..3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new. 1.7 Shop Drawings And Product Data.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section Submittal Procedures. Part 2 - Products 2.1 Switches.1 20A, 120 V, single pole, double pole, three-way, fourway to: CSA-C22.2 No.55 and CSA-C22.2 No Manually-operated general purpose ac switches with following features:.1 Terminal holes approved for No. 10 AWG wire..2 Silver alloy contacts.

311 Redwood Estates Wiring Devices Section WTP Upgrades Page 3 of 5.3 Urea or melamine moulding for parts subject to carbon tracking..4 Suitable for back and side wiring..5 Ivory toggle..3 Toggle operated locking fully rated for tungsten filament and fluorescent lamps, and up to 80% of rated capacity of motor loads..4 Switches of one manufacturer throughout project. (except as noted). 2.2 Receptacles.1 Duplex receptacles, CSA type 5-15 R, 125 V, 15 A, U ground, to: CSA-C22.2 No.42 with following features:.1 Ivory urea moulded housing..2 Suitable for No. 10 AWG for back and side wiring..3 Break-off links for use as split receptacles..4 Eight back wired entrances, four side wiring screws..5 Triple wipe contacts and rivetted grounding contacts..2 Other receptacles with ampacity and voltage as indicated..3 Receptacles of one manufacturer throughout project..4 Receptacles to be tamper resistant. 2.3 Special Wiring Devices.1 Class A GFCI specification grade 15A-125V, U ground..2 CSA Type 5-20RA, 125V, 20A, U ground for the housekeeping receptacles and any receptacle noted as 20A-120V. Ivory urea molding housing..3 USB Charging Port, 4-Port, 4.2 A, 25W, 120V, Leviton USB4P-W. 2.4 Cover Plates.1 Blank plates for boxes with no wiring devices..2 Cover plates for wiring devices to: CSA-C22.2 No.42.1.

312 Redwood Estates Wiring Devices Section WTP Upgrades Page 4 of 5.3 Cover plates from one manufacturer throughout project..4 Sheet steel utility box cover for wiring devices installed in surface-mounted utility boxes..5 Stainless steel, 1 mm thick cover plates for switches, receptacles and other wiring devices mounted in flushmounted outlet box..6 Cast cover plates for wiring devices mounted in surface-mounted FS or FD type conduit boxes..7 Weatherproof double lift spring-loaded cast aluminum cover plates, complete with gaskets for duplex receptacles or switches..8 Weatherproof spring-loaded cast aluminum cover plates complete with gaskets for single receptacles or switches. Part 3 - Execution 3.1 Installation.1 Switches:.1 Install single throw switches with handle in "UP" position when switch closed..2 Install switches in gang type outlet box when more than one switch is required in one location..3 Mount toggle switches at height in accordance with Section Common Work Results - Electrical and as indicated..2 Receptacles:.1 Install receptacles in gang type outlet box when more than one receptacle is required in one location..2 Mount receptacles at height in accordance with Section Common Work Results - Electrical and as indicated..3 Where split receptacle has one portion switched, mount vertically and switch upper portion..3 Cover plates:.1 Protect stainless steel cover plate finish with paper or plastic film until painting and other work is finished.

313 Redwood Estates Wiring Devices Section WTP Upgrades Page 5 of 5.2 Install suitable common cover plates where wiring devices are grouped..3 Do not use cover plates meant for flush outlet boxes on surface-mounted boxes..4 Install stainless steel coverplates for all flush mounted devices..5 Install cast aluminum coverplates on all exterior devices.

314

315 Redwood Estates Disconnect Switches Section WTP Upgrades Fused and Non-Fused Page 1 of 3 Part 1 - General 1.1 Section Includes.1 Materials and installation for fused and non-fused disconnect switches. 1.2 Related Sections.1 Section Submittal Procedures..2 Section Common Work Results - Electrical. 1.3 References.1 CSA Group.1 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.4-04(R2009), Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (Tri-National Standard, with ANCE NMX-J and UL 98)..2 CSA C22.2 No.39=13, Fuseholder Assemblies. 1.4 Action And Informational Submittals.1 Submit in accordance with Section Submittal Procedures..2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for disconnect switches - fused and non-fused and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. 1.5 Delivery, Storage And Handling.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section Common Product Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions..2 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address..3 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials off ground, indoors or in dry

316 Redwood Estates Disconnect Switches Section WTP Upgrades Fused and Non-Fused Page 2 of 3 Part 2 - Products location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area..2 Store and protect disconnect switches - fused and non-fused form nicks, scratches, and blemishes..3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new. 2.1 Acceptable Manufacturer.1 Square 'D', Cutler Hammer, Siemens. 2.2 Disconnect Switches.1 Fusible and non-fusible, heavy duty disconnect switch in CSA Enclosure Type and size as indicated on drawing..2 Provision for padlocking in on-off switch position by three locks..3 Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in ON position..4 Fuses: size as indicated..5 Fuseholders: to CSA C22.2 No.39 suitable without adaptors, for type and size of fuse indicated..6 Quick-make, quick-break action..7 ON-OFF switch position indication on switch enclosure cover..8 Ensure switch for service entrance is approved for use as service entrance and ka ratings are as indicated on drawings. 2.3 Equipment Identification.1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section Common Work Results - Electrical.2 Indicate name of load controlled on size 4 nameplate.

317 Redwood Estates Disconnect Switches Section WTP Upgrades Fused and Non-Fused Page 3 of Isolation Switches.1 Toggle type..2 Hp rated , 240, 208 or 600V rated or 3 phase to suit motor..4 Padlock provision in off position. 2.5 Service Entrance Fused Switch Single Phase Monitoring.1 Associated with the service entrance rated fused switch provide a Square D solution making use of Carlo Gavazzi 3-Phase Monitoring Relay Cat#DPC01DM69 in general purpose enclosure. Part 3 - Execution 3.1 Installation.1 Install disconnect switches complete with fuses if applicable..2 Install isolation switches at motors as indicated..3 Install service entrance single phase monitoring relay above Electrical Room metering cabinet. Provide 600V inter wiring from relay to load side of service entrance switch. Wiring to PLC cabinet from relay dry contact for single phasing alarm/motor shutdowns is by Electrical Contractor.

318

319 Redwood Estates Control Devices Section WTP Upgrades Page 1 of 5 Part 1 - General 1.1 Section Includes.1 Materials and installation for industrial control devices including pushbutton stations, control and relay panels. 1.2 Related Sections.1 Section Submittal Procedures..2 Section Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal..3 Section Common Work Results - Electrical. 1.3 References.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CSA C22.2 No.14-10, Industrial Control Equipment..2 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).1 NEMA ICS (R2008), Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements..3 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).1 NEMA ICS (R2008), Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements. 1.4 Action And Informational Submittals.1 Submit in accordance with Section Submittal Procedures..2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for control devices and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations..3 Shop Drawings:.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in

320 Redwood Estates Control Devices Section WTP Upgrades Page 2 of 5 Province of Ontario, Canada..2 Include schematic, wiring, interconnection diagrams. 1.5 Quality Assurance.1 CONDUCT TESTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. 1.6 Closeout Submittals.1 Submit in accordance with Section Closeout Submittals..2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for control devices for incorporation into manual. 1.7 Delivery, Storage And Handling.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section Common Product Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions..2 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address..3 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials off ground, indoors, or in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area..2 Store and protect control devices from nicks, scratches, and blemishes..3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new. Part 2 - Products 2.1 Acceptable Manufacturer.1 Square 'D', Cutler Hammer, Siemens, Allen Bradley.

321 Redwood Estates Control Devices Section WTP Upgrades Page 3 of Ac Control Relays.1 Fixed contact type: general purpose low coil current heavy duty with 2 N.O. 2 N.C. poles. Coil rating: 120V, 15VA. Contact rating: 120V, 10A. 2.3 Relay Accessories.1 Standard contact cartridges: normally-open - convertible to normally-closed in field..2 Overlap contact cartridges: normally-open convertible to normally closed in field..3 Mounting strips: indexed strips easily cut to required length and bolted in place. Relays are installed in rows on strip with captive mounting screws. Rows of relays on mounting strip from their own wiring trough. 2.4 Pushbuttons.1 Heavy duty Oil tight. Operator flush type. Black Green, with 1-NO and 1-NC contacts rated at 10A, AC, labels as indicated. Stop pushbuttons coloured red, provision for padlocking in depressed position labelled stop. 2.5 Selector Switches.1 3 position labelled HOA as indicated heavy duty oil tight, operators wing lever contact arrangement as indicated, rated 120V, 10A, AC. 2.6 Indicating Lights.1 Heavy duty Oil tight, full voltage, lens colour: red or as indicated, supply voltage: 120V, LED lamps, labels as indicated. 2.7 Control And Relay Panels.1 CSA Type 12 sheet steel enclosure with hinged padlockable access door, accommodating relays timers, labels, as indicated, factory installed and wired to identified terminals.

322 Redwood Estates Control Devices Section WTP Upgrades Page 4 of Control Circuit Transformers.1 Single phase, dry type..2 Primary: 208 or 600 V as indicated, 60 Hz ac..3 Secondary: 120 V and/or 24V AC as indicated..4 Rating: 50 VA or as indicated..5 Secondary fuse: 1 A..6 Close voltage regulation as required by magnet coils and solenoid valves. 2.9 Thermostat (Line Voltage).1 Wall mounted, for exhaust fan or heater control. 2 stage or 1 stage as indicated..2 Full load rating: 8 A at 120 V, or 20A at 208V-1Ø. Voltage to match equipment voltage requirements..3 Temperature setting range: as indicated on control diagrams or to suit description of operation..4 Thermometer Range: selected to allow for required temperature range..5 Markings in 5 degrees increments..6 Any thermostats indicated on drawings in corridors, gym, cafetorium, shops, washrooms or change rooms are to have guards Safety Technology International model STI Line voltage thermostats are to be standard or reverse acting as indicated on drawings. Part 3 - Execution 3.1 Installation.1 Install pushbutton stations, control and relay panels,

323 Redwood Estates Control Devices Section WTP Upgrades Page 5 of 5 control devices and interconnect as indicated or to suit description of operation. 3.2 Field Quality Control.1 Perform tests in accordance with Section Common Work Results - Electrical..2 Depending upon magnitude and complexity, divide control system into convenient sections, energize one section at time and check out operation of section..3 Upon completion of sectional test, undertake group testing..4 Check out complete system for operational sequencing..5 Submit to Consultant one copy of test results.

324

325 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 1 of 31 Part 1 - General 1.1 General Requirements.1 This section covers items common to all sections of Division Obtain and pay for all required permits and approvals..3 The following codes shall apply:.1 Ontario Building Code; O.B.C..2 Ontario Building Code Part 7 Plumbing..3 National Fire Code, N.F.C..4 National Building Code, N.B.C..5 Ontario Fire Code..4 All code references shall be the latest edition, including revisions and addenda..5 Materials and equipment to be new and free from blemishes, oxidation, damage, etc.. New materials and equipment to be of proven design and quality, and for which replacement parts are readily available. Use current models of equipment..6 It is the intent of the specification that the Contractor is responsible for all of Division 44 work. The Contractor shall be responsible for all Division 44 subtrades. The Contractor shall be responsible for commissioning of Division 44 systems. Division 44 Contractor shall coordinate time of commissioning with plan prepared by Division The project generally includes the supply, installation and

326 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 2 of 31 commissioning of the process systems and equipment..8 Some equipment, systems or suppliers have been preselected by the Engineer and is listed as either "Acceptable Materials", "Acceptable System" or "Acceptable Supplier" or "Preselected Equipment". The tender shall be based on the use of the equipment, system or supplier named. No alternates will be considered. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the extent, terms and conditions of the installation and commissioning requirements. Contractor shall provide all labour, equipment and material required for the preselected equipment or systems, as well as, provide additional labour, equipment and material required to supplement and complete the systems and provide a commissioned and working system or equipment..9 The Contractor shall confirm and coordinate delivery dates for all equipment and systems and shall coordinate the installations based on delivery dates to complete the work as per the project deadlines. No delay claim will be allowed for the Contractor not providing this coordination. 1.2 Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling.1 All materials and equipment shall be delivered, handled and stored subject to the provisions contained herein and according to the manufacturer's recommendations.

327 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 3 of 31.2 Provide temporary storage facilities and heated storage where required for sensitive items such as motors..3 Equipment, including pumps and motors, shall not be placed in temporary or final locations in the WTP before a date approved by the Engineer. The date of delivery into the structure shall be commensurate with the construction progress and the suitability, with respect to temperature, humidity, etc. of the building..4 Take precautions to maintain equipment in good condition and to avoid corrosion or other damage which may affect the equipment's performance. Provide temporary coatings as required to prevent corrosion..5 Leave factory covers in place and prevent entry of foreign materials into working parts of equipment..6 The Contractor shall recognize the time interval required for complete construction before the structure is suitable for equipment installation. If equipment is manufactured before it is required at the site, the Contractor shall provide suitable heated dry storage space for the equipment, to the approval of the Engineer. All equipment and motors shall be rotated at least weekly during the storage period, and after installation, until the equipment is placed in normal use..7 All material damaged or otherwise harmfully affected during delivery,

328 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 4 of 31 storage, handling or installation shall be replaced by the Contractor at his/her own expense. 1.3 Equipment Supports, Anchors, and Bases.1 The Contractor shall provide all structural work required for foundation and support of units, foundation bolts, sleeves, washers, nuts, shims and templates to locate bolts..2 Anchor bolts shall be set in concrete with one end of the bolt hooked as detailed; or sleeved anchor bolts as detailed may be set in concrete. Expansion type bolts drilled into concrete may not be used in lieu of anchor bolts..3 Provide seismic restraint of equipment, ducting, piping, tanks and machinery in accordance with Section , Seismic Restraints..4 Equipment supports not by equipment manufacturer: fabricate from structural grade steel meeting the requirements of Section structural steel. Submit structural calculations with shop drawings..5 Prior to connecting pumping units or other equipment to pipe sections, support complete piping assembly and anchor in perfect alignment with pumping units and sleeves to prevent movement of piping assembly and strain on pumping and equipment..6 Support all valves and risers so that weight of valve or valve assembly is not carried by adjacent horizontal pipe sections.

329 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 5 of 31.7 Do not secure supports to metal decks when supporting piping, ductwork and other equipment. Provide supplementary steel supported from structural members as required to support piping, ductwork and other equipment where suitable structural members do not exist. 1.4 Equipment Installation.1 Follow the recommended installation details and procedures for all equipment as found in the supplier's technical data, supplemented by the shop drawings, the contract drawings and the specifications and the directions of the Engineer..2 For equipment or material of the same type or classification, install only products of one manufacturer..3 Install all equipment with adequate access for inspection and servicing..4 Employ only skilled tradesmen properly licensed by the Province of Ontario, for all work requiring tradesmen with special skill..5 Set equipment in place and install piping, fittings, valves and other items. Make final adjustments in alignment and elevation before securely fastening equipment and other items in place..6 Control alignment so that excess forces are not imposed on equipment when piping connections are tightened..7 Tighten so that there are no

330 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 6 of 31 excessive stresses set up in flanges..8 Unions or flanges: provide for ease of maintenance and disassembly..9 Space for servicing, disassembly and removal of equipment and components: provide as recommended by manufacturer or as indicated..10 Equipment drains: pipe to floor drains, or funnel floor/hub drains..11 Install equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items parallel to or perpendicular to building lines..12 Provide and install all necessary vibration control components. 1.5 Trial Usage.1 The Engineer may use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance. Supply labour, material, and instruments required for testing. Trial usage to apply to all systems. 1.6 Definitions.1 This definition shall apply to all sections and drawings of Division "CONCEALED" - mechanical services and equipment in hung ceilings and non-accessible chases and furred spaces..2 "EXPOSED" - will mean "not concealed" as defined herein, e.g. Mechanical Rooms..3 "PROVIDE" - will mean supply, installation and connection..4 "T.S.S.A." shall mean "Technical Standards and Safety

331 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 7 of 31 Authority"..5 "Finished Areas" will mean areas with finish painted walls and will include Plant Areas and Mechanical Rooms..6 "E.S.A." shall mean Electrical Safety Authority. 1.7 Protection of Openings.1 Protect equipment and systems openings from dirt, dust, and other foreign materials with materials appropriate to system. 1.8 Electrical.1 Electrical work provided under Division 44 is to conform to electrical specifications (Division 26)..2 Provide all controls, disconnects, magnetic starters, transformers, relays, wiring and panels for all motors and devices for packaged equipment as indicated in various specification sections of Division Control panels provided as part of equipment supplied under Division 44 to be complete with barriered numbered terminal strip for interconnecting of conductors between master control panel and remote control panel and associated equipment..4 All process instrument devices shall be provided by Division 44 and wired by Division 26. All power and control wiring for process instrumentation shall be provided by Division 26, unless specified to be provided as part of packaged equipment or systems specified in Division 44.

332 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 8 of 31.5 Panels provided as part of packaged equipment to be complete with required components including but not limited to:.1 One main fused switch of suitable current rating for the station load. Pad lockable in both open and closed positions. Mechanically panel interlocked door to prevent opening when handle is in "on" position..6 Electrical equipment shall bear CSA labels and/or ULC approvals to comply with requirements of electrical utility. Conform to the requirements of the Canadian Electrical Code, Ontario Building Code, local, municipal and provincial authorities. Equipment not complying with above approvals shall have on site inspection by E.S.A., and the Contractor shall provide all necessary work to satisfy E.S.A. requirements in order to obtain approval. All associated fees, cost of material and labour shall be provided by the Contractor. All necessary application or documentation required shall be provided by the Contractor. 1.9 Sleeves.1 Pipe sleeves: at points where pipes pass through masonry, concrete, fire rated assemblies, floors/grating, and as indicated..2 Schedule 40 stainless steel pipe, type 304L..3 Stainless steel (type 304L) sleeves with annular fin continuously (type 304L) welded at midpoint:.1 Through foundation walls.

333 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 9 of 31.2 Where sleeve extends above finished floor..4 Sizes: maximum 6mm clearance all around, between sleeve and uninsulated pipe or between sleeve and insulation..5 Terminate sleeves flush with surface of concrete and masonry walls. Terminate sleeves 100mm above floors..6 Fill voids around pipes:.1 Caulk between sleeve and pipe in foundation walls and below grade floors with waterproof fire retardant non-hardening mastic..2 Where sleeves pass through walls or floors, provide space for firestopping. Where pipes/ducts pass through fire rated walls, floors and partitions, maintain fire rating integrity..3 Ensure no contact between copper tube or pipe and ferrous sleeve..4 Fill future-use sleeves with lime plaster or other easily removable filler..5 Coat exposed exterior surfaces of ferrous sleeves with heavy application of zinc rich paint to CGSB 1-GP-181M+Amdt..7 This Division shall prepare sleeving drawings indicating the size and locations of openings required in concrete floor slabs, roof slabs/decks and walls for piping and equipment. In case of failure to provide information in time (i.e.

334 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 10 of 31 before the concrete is poured) any extras incurred shall be at the expense of this Division..8 Pipe sleeves at points where pipes pass through concrete walls into tanks to be modular mechanical type, complete with stainless steel wall sleeve, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill space between pipe and wall opening. The rubber sealing elements to expand and provide an absolute water tight seal between the pipe and wall opening. Standard of Acceptance to be Link Seal..9 Coordinate all pipe sleeve locations with Division Penetrations through structural walls/floors/etc. that compromise the integrity of the structure, shall be reinforced so that original design loads are maintained Tests.1 Give 24h written notice of date for tests..2 Insulate or conceal work only after testing and approval by the Engineer..3 Conduct tests in presence of the Engineer or authority having jurisdiction..4 Bear costs including retesting and making good..5 Piping: test as specified in relevant sections..6 Equipment: test as specified in relevant sections.

335 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 11 of 31.7 Prior to tests, isolate all equipment or other parts which are not designed to withstand test pressures or test medium..8 Provide written confirmation for each test conducted..9 Provide any equipment required to conduct tests..10 Test water shall be potable water and should be from a municipal system that treats water with chlorination or some other appropriate means to kill bacteria Painting.1 To Section Field Painting Spare Parts.1 Furnish spare parts as specified in relevant sections Drain Valves.1 Locate at low points and at section isolating valves unless otherwise specified..2 Minimum DN 20mm unless otherwise specified with hose end male thread and complete with cap and chain Demonstration and Operating and Maintenance Instructions.1 Refer to additional requirements of Section Equipment and Section Commissioning Operation and Maintenance Manual.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section Operation and Maintenance Manual.

336 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 12 of Shop Drawings and Product Data.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with the requirements of Section Submittals Cleaning.1 Clean interior and exterior of all systems including strainers..2 In preparation for final acceptance, clean and refurbish all equipment and leave in operating condition including replacement of all filters in all air and piping systems..3 Upon completion remove temporary protection. Remove stains and smudges from paint work..4 During the course of construction, each - Subcontractor shall keep his work tidy and not allow an accumulation of debris resulting from his work..5 Upon completion of this work he shall leave the premises in a broom clean condition As-built Drawings.1 Site records:.1 The Engineer will provide the Contractor with two extra sets of white prints on which the Contractor shall clearly mark, as the job progresses, all changes and deviations from that shown on contract drawings. This shall also include changes to existing systems, control systems and low voltage control wiring. Drawings shall be kept up-todate during construction and in addition to field measurements

337 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 13 of 31 shall include variation orders, field instructions and all other changes. On completion of the building, the Contractor shall forward to the Engineer the two sets of drawings indicating all such changes and deviations for review by the Engineer..2 On a weekly basis, transfer information to reproducibles, revising reproducibles to show all work as actually installed..3 Use different colour waterproof ink for each service..4 Make available for reference purposes and inspection at all times..2 As-built drawings:.1 Refer to requirements specified in Section Submittals.3 CAD As-builts.1 Refer to requirements specified in Section Submittals Examination of Site and Information.1 The Contractor, before tendering shall examine the site, the existing building construction and services, the Process, Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical drawings and he shall familiarize himself with the building construction and finish in order that his tender may include everything necessary for the proper completion of the work..2 It shall be this Contractor's responsibility that material and

338 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 14 of 31 equipment be brought into the building in such assemblies and sizes as to enter into the spaces where they are to be located and to be small enough to be hoisted into the building without difficulty. Any cutting, patching, etc. involved in getting large assemblies into place shall be the responsibility of this Contractor..3 Immediately inform the Engineer during Tender Period, in writing, of all discrepancies, errors, omissions, contradictions and ambiguities. The necessary Addendum or bulletin will be issued to all Bidders. Include a complete crosschecking of Drawing and Specifications for sizes and quantities to correspond correctly. Data mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on Drawings, and viceversa, must be interpreted as part of the Work. Oral, telephone or "Telex" instructions are not valid. Bring obvious discrepancies or omissions to the attention of the Engineer during the Tender Period, at least ten working days prior to tender closing. Questions may be presented by bidders up to time of tender closing. Questions presented near this time may not be answered. Where the Contractor is not able to obtain directions on questions, they shall prepare quotation based on specifications or drawings and include all items required to comply. Where discrepancies still exist within the documents, Contractors shall allow for the more demanding installation, more stringent requirement or more

339 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 15 of 31 expensive equipment specification. Contractors shall instruct all suppliers and distributors of this time limitation..4 The drawings and specifications are intended to describe complete working systems including all necessary labour and materials. Where items required to complete working system are not specified or showing on drawings, Contractor shall include costs at no additional expense to Engineer Cutting and Remedial Work.1 Assume full responsibility for laying out work and for any damage caused by incorrectly located equipment and services Co-ordination.1 Locate distribution systems, equipment and materials to provide minimum interference and maximum useable space..2 Where interference occurs, Engineer shall approve relocation of equipment and materials..3 This Contractor shall notify other Subcontractors who are concerned, of all openings, foundation work, hangers, inserts, anchors, or other provisions necessary in their work for the installation of this work and he shall furnish all information and necessary materials in ample time so that proper provisions can be made for same, and shall supply and correctly and accurately place all inserts, sleeves, anchors, etc..4 Division 44 shall supply inserts, hangers, sleeves, anchors, etc.

340 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 16 of 31 which must be placed within concrete forms to other subcontractors that are concerned. Division 44 shall inform responsible Contractor of locations. Where anchors are required to be drilled and placed, Division 44 shall be responsible for their supply and installation. Pipe hangers and supports listed in Section and shall be provided by Division Requirements of Inspection Departments.1 All work shall be installed in accordance with all laws and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction in each case, particularly all affected departments of the Municipality and Province. Electrical equipment supplied must conform to the regulations of CSA and the local utility. Anything necessary to make the work comply with these requirements shall be provided by this Contractor without additional cost to the Engineer..2 The Contractor shall prepare drawings in addition to Engineer's drawings as may be required by various Inspection Departments having jurisdiction, and obtain their approval before proceeding with the work..3 In the event that the Inspection Department's request deviates from the Engineer's layout, Contractor shall consult the Engineer before proceeding with same..4 Provide all inspection certificates prior to request for substantial

341 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 17 of 31 completion. Include copy of inspection certificates in Operation and Maintenance Manuals..5 All fittings, valves and components used in compressed air systems shall have Canadian Registration Number (CRN) and shall be registered as required for use in Ontario by the T.S.S.A. Anything necessary to make the work comply with these requirements shall be provided by this Contractor without additional costs to the Engineer..6 The Contractor shall coordinate all required inspections by T.S.S.A. and fill out all forms required by T.S.S.A. for the inspections. The Contractor shall pay for all inspection fees Drawings.1 The drawings shall be considered to show the general character and scope of the work and not the exact details of the installation. The installation shall be complete with all accessories required for a complete and operative installation..2 The drawings show the approximate location for the special apparatus and the materials throughout the building. The arrangement shown on the drawings is more or less diagrammatic and as such approximate only, and may be altered, as approved by the Engineer, to meet the requirements of the apparatus, etc., and of the building. Each Subcontractor shall be held responsible for all measurements for his work throughout, and he shall

342 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 18 of 31 arrange his piping, wiring and apparatus to conform to the Architectural and Structural details in a satisfactory manner and shall cooperate with other contractors to ensure that work shall meet all requirements of diverse Contracts..3 The Contractor is particularly cautioned that small scale Engineer's plans must be supplemented by his own detail drawings where necessary for proper coordination of the work..4 Items shown on the drawings but not specified or specified but not shown shall be included..5 Items obviously required to provide a complete working system, but not specified nor shown shall be included..6 In order to show more clearly the arrangement of the work, plans and sections do not show every valve, thermometer, pressure gauge or other system accessory. Refer to the standards details, piping and instrument diagrams and to the specifications to determine the requirements..7 Certain details indicated on the drawings are general in nature and specific labelled detail references to each and every occurrence of use are not indicated, however, such details shall be applicable to every occurrence on the drawings..8 All piping in finished areas with ceilings shall be concealed in

343 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 19 of 31 ceiling spaces and shafts or chased into walls. No exposed piping or ductwork shall be installed in such areas unless specifically reviewed by the Engineer. No piping shall be concealed in outside walls..9 Equipment mounted on roof, or housing for such equipment, shall not be closer to the edge of roof than 1.83m, unless specifically reviewed by the Engineer..10 The actual location of switches, control devices, etc. shall be reviewed by the Engineer before installation..11 The location and size of existing services shown on the drawings are based on the best available information. The actual location of existing services shall be verified in the field before work is commenced. Particular attention shall be paid to buried services..12 Changes and modifications necessary to ensure co-ordination and to avoid interference and conflicts with other trades, or to accommodate existing conditions, shall be made at no extra cost to the Engineer..13 Leave areas clear of piping and ducts where space is indicated reserved for future equipment, and equipment for other trades..14 Adequate space and provisions shall be left for removal of parts requiring regular maintenance and servicing of equipment, with minimum inconvenience to the operation of

344 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 20 of 31 systems..15 Where equipment is shown to be 'roughed-in only' obtain accurate information from the Engineer before proceeding with the work..16 Before fabricating piping for installation, make certain that such items can be installed as shown on the drawings without interfering with the structure or the work of all other trades. Any problems that cannot be solved in agreement with the other trades affected, shall be submitted for decision. If piping is prefabricated prior to the investigation and reaching of a solution to possible interference problems, necessary changes in such prefabricated items shall be made at no extra cost to the Engineer..17 Off-sets in piping may not be indicated in all cases, but are to be included in the contract as required Installation, Interference and Setting Drawings.1 Installation, interference and setting drawings dimensioned and to scale, shall be submitted for review to the Engineer, as may be required or requested by the Engineer to make clear the work intended or to show its relation to adjacent work or to the work of other trades. When an alternative piece of equipment is to be substituted for equipment shown, drawings of the area involved shall be prepared by this division. Three copies of such drawings shall be submitted for review, of which one will be retained by the Engineer.

345 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 21 of 31.2 Installation working drawings to 1:50 scale for each equipment room showing plan and sections of the plant, services, bases, curbs, drains, motor terminals, shall be prepared by this division..3 Interference drawings are required for shafts, ceiling spaces and wherever there is possible conflict in the positioning of equipment, piping, ductwork subtrades or architectural features..4 The design of the structural framing of the equipment rooms and pipe spaces and major pipe run supports has been based on assumed loadings supplied during the design phase. Well ahead of the construction of the affected areas, prepare and submit drawings for review to the Engineer showing the layout and weights of all finally selected equipment including details of concrete pads, concentrated pipe loads and point reactions of the equipment onto the structure. Structural design has been based on equipment listed by model number. Alternate equipment if permitted shall not exceed weight and dimensions of equipment listed without prior approval by Engineer. If alternate equipment is not approved by Engineer, Contractor shall supply equipment listed at no additional cost to Project. If alternate equipment is approved, Contractor shall provide all revisions necessary and pay all costs including engineering.

346 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 22 of 31.5 Pump capacities, control valve sizing, etc., have been based on equipment specified. Upon submission of shop drawings, Contractor shall review with Engineer all design and equipment changes and where required to accommodate design or equipment changes Contractor shall engineer and revise equipment capacities as required. There shall be no extra cost to Engineer for changes to equipment to accommodate changes discussed above. No installations shall proceed until this coordination has been completed Use of Alternate Equipment.1 Drawings have been prepared only on the basis of the specified material, equipment or systems..2 The design, space allocation, orientation, piping, control systems, etc., are arranged to suit the material and equipment named in the text of the specifications or shown on the drawings. The contractor assumes all responsibility for adjustments or extension of the work of this or other Divisions necessary for the accommodation of material, equipment or systems other than that named in the specifications or shown on the drawings..3 Alternate or substitute equipment is only permitted when allowed as described in item 34, Conformance Energy Consumption.1 Engineer may reject equipment submitted for approval on basis of performance or energy consumed or demanded.

347 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 23 of Conformance.1 Materials specified by referenced standard, select any material that meets or exceeds the specified standard. Materials specified by referenced standard are identified by the term "Standard of Acceptance"..2 Materials specified by "Prescriptive" or "Performance" specification, select any material meeting or exceeding specification..3 When materials are specified by a Standard, Prescriptive or Performance specifications, upon request of the Engineer, obtain from manufacturer an independent testing laboratory report showing that the material or equipment meets or exceeds the specified requirements..4 Materials, equipment or systems specified by naming one or more materials, select any material, equipment or system named. Materials, equipment or systems specified in this manner are identified by the term "Standard of Acceptance". Where only one name appears in the specification, the tender shall include for the specified equipment. For the purpose of these specifications, the term "Acceptable Material" is deemed to be a complete and working commodity as described by a manufacturer's name, catalogue number, trade name or any combination thereof..5 Manufacturers or subcontractors specified by naming one or more, select any one named. Where only one name appears in the specification,

348 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 24 of 31 the tender shall include for the specified name Statement of Prices.1 To form a basis for progress payments the successful bidder shall submit a statement of his estimated prices for the various portions of the work, including labour, materials and equipment shown separately. The total price of all portions of the work shall equal the total price of the work covered under this division..2 The successful bidder shall confer with the Engineer to determine the breakdown of work for this contract Metric Conversions.1 Particular care shall be taken with imperial versus S.I. metric conversions. This applies to all services including, but not limited to, equipment, pipes, ductwork and site services in both new and existing installations..2 When covering from one form of measure to the other, do not roundoff numbers Schedule.1 This Contractor shall provide a schedule outlining all aspects of the work in sufficient detail to track the progress of the work. Include all critical dates, including delivery to and return of shop drawings to Engineer, inspection dates, dates for training and commissioning systems. Submit schedule to Engineer for review at start of project.

349 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 25 of 31.2 Contractor shall review schedule on a regular basis and at each construction meeting. The Contractor shall provide additional workers as required to meet the schedule. Update schedule as required in conjunction with General Contractor and Engineer Pipe Troughs.1 Avoid running piping above electrical, telephone and server rooms. If unavoidable provide pipe troughs beneath piping..2 Provide galvanized steel troughs below all pipes or groups of pipes passing over electrical, telephone and server rooms..3 Troughs to be fabricated from 1.0mm (20 ga.) galvanized steel, formed wide enough to catch drips from piping..4 Troughs to be adequately supported and sloped for positive drainage. Provide low point drain and pipe to nearest funnel floor drain, hub drain or janitor sink Hoisting and Rigging.1 In accordance with the construction schedule provide and arrange for transportation, of all equipment and materials to site, and for the rigging, hoisting, storing and setting in place of equipment. Include for offloading. Obtain from suppliers all weights for equipment and provide Crane equipment of adequate capacity for hoisting. Protect all surfaces and structure during hoisting and rigging. Provide heavy metal plates to protect

350 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 26 of 31 surfaces. Do not overload structure Workmanship and Qualifications of Workers.1 Perform the work in a neat and careful manner so that items are installed, and will remain, plumb, square and straight. Items not so installed will be rejected and redone at no extra cost to the Engineer..2 When required either by the specifications or manufacturer s instructions, have manufacturer or his accredited agent or the supplier supervise the work..3 Provide qualified tradespeople to perform all the work. Provide a full time on site supervisor to supervise the work of Division 44. When requested of the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide documentation demonstrating experience of tradespeople and supervisor. If tradesperson or supervisor does not have adequate experience or qualifications remove from site and provide suitable replacement. Provide resume of site supervisor to Engineer prior to start of project. Engineer has the right to reject or remove at any time any worker or site supervisory if in his opinion the individual does not possess the required experience or qualifications. When personnel has been removed or rejected provide suitable replacement..4 No horseplay will be tolerated on site at any time. The Contractor shall be responsible for putting an immediate end to all horseplay.

351 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 27 of Certificates, Permits & Fees.1 The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all required permits, and pay all fees, in order that the work herein specified may be carried out, and he shall furnish any certificates needed as evidence that the work installed conforms with the laws and regulations of the Municipality, Province, and the local utility..2 The Contractor shall apply and pay for the registration of the compressed air piping with the T.S.S.A. The Contractor shall pay all T.S.S.A. registration fees Special Tools.1 Provide one set of special tools required to service equipment as recommended by manufacturers Inspection/ Takeover Procedures.1 Contractor's Inspection: The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall conduct an inspection of the Work, identify deficiencies and defects; repair as required. Notify the Engineer in writing of satisfactory completion of the Contractor's Inspection and that corrections have been made. Request a Engineer's Inspection..2 Engineer's Inspection: Engineer and the Contractor will perform an inspection of the Work to identify obvious defects or deficiencies. The Contractor shall correct Work accordingly. If during the engineers inspection it is obvious that the work is incomplete, the engineer will notify the Contractor without provision of a deficiency list and

352 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 28 of 31 the Contractor shall complete and correct deficiencies as per item.1.3 Final Inspection: When the items noted above are complete, request a final inspection of the Work by the Engineer. If Work is deemed incomplete by the Engineer, complete the outstanding items and request a reinspection..4 Declaration of Substantial Performance: When the Engineer considers deficiencies and defects have been corrected and it appears requirements of the Contract have been substantially performed, make application for Certificate of Substantial Performance. All other requirements noted elsewhere shall be completed prior to request for Certificate of Substantial Completion..5 Do not apply for substantial performance until:.1 All systems are complete and operation..2 All systems have been commissioned and successfully past testing over the entire range of their operating capacities under automatic control. (Note: seasonal or environmental conditions resulting in the delay of some testing will be accommodated by issuance of conditional certificate)..3 Commissioning and testing reports have been submitted for the Engineer's review..4 Air and water balancing has been completed and reports have been submitted for the Engineer's review.

353 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 29 of 31.5 "As-built" and/or record drawings have been prepared and submitted for the Engineer's review..6 Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been prepared and submitted for the Engineer's review..7 The Owner, operating and maintenance personnel have received training on all systems and equipment and the required certificate has been submitted to the Engineer Existing Systems.1 Connections into existing systems to be made at time approved by Engineer. Request written approval of time when connections can be made. Include for any overtime and premium charges..2 Be responsible for damage to existing plant by this work..3 Where connections are made to existing services, existing insulation shall be made good under this division Schedule, Access, Protection and Clean-up.1 The construction schedule places restrictions on the duration of construction within areas and the duration of shut-down of equipment. Refer to the General Conditions and Phasing for all requirements..2 Access to the site is limited to location and time of day. Access to areas of the building is limited to location and time of day. Refer to the General Conditions for all requirements..3 Refer to the security and protection requirements in the General

354 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 30 of 31 Conditions, conform to all requirements. There shall be no smoking, and the site shall be kept clean at all times Abandoned Services 1.40 Cutting and Patching.1 Within the work areas of the existing building unknown abandoned services may be encountered. Obtain clarification from the owner regarding these services and remove any sections of services from the work areas as directed..1 The cost of cutting, patching and finishing is not included in this divisions contract..2 This division shall advise the trade responsible for cutting, in advance of the time required, of the location and extent of cutting required, and any other pertinent information..3 This division shall advise the trade responsible for patching and finishing of any pertinent information such as, clearance requirements..4 Refer also to item 28, Coordination and 12, Sleeves for other coordination requirements. It is the intent that in new construction all holes and openings are to be sleeved and that cutting and patching be limited..5 In case of costs arising to correct work, due to failure to provide coordination information on time, incorrect sizes or locations or other incorrect pertinent

355 Redwood Estates Process General Section WTP Upgrades Requirements Page 31 of 31 information, shall not be extra to Engineer Delivery Handling and Storage.1 Deliver materials to designated areas off the site working area..2 Inspect fabricated material for damage in transit..3 Replace materials found to be defective in manufacture or damaged in handling after delivery. Include furnishing of material and labour required for replacement of installed material found to be defective..4 Load and unload materials so as to avoid shock or damage..5 Handle pipe and fittings so that coatings and linings will not be damaged. Replace or repair to satisfaction of Engineer damaged pipes or fittings..6 Place materials in safe storage to satisfaction of Engineer. Keep interiors of pipe, fittings, and other accessories clean. Store valves in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing Cleaning &.1 The Contractor will internally Disinfection clean, flush and disinfect all water retaining structures and process piping cleaned in accordance with , Disinfection and Testing of Water retaining structures & process piping.

356

357 Redwood Estates Installation of Section WTP Upgrades Thermal Insulation Page 1 of 8 on Cold Process Piping Part 1 - General 1.1 Scope.1 This standard defines materials and insulation methods to be used for insulating piping in cold service..2 Jacket material shall be aluminum, unless otherwise noted. 1.2 General Requirements.1 Contractors shall submit with their proposals information on intended practices and application methods specifically not covered in this specification. The following are typical items and details that shall be included, where applicable: a. Removable insulation housing. b. Additional insulation supports. c. Expansion joints in insulation..2 Insulation shall be new and undamaged, dry, free of foreign contaminants and delivered to the site in unopened factory-sealed cartons. Contractor shall ensure that all materials are protected from damage..3 Unless otherwise specified on drawings or in this standard, all insulation materials, accessories and finishes shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer s currently-published recommendations and instructions..4 Insulators shall be experienced and use the Thermal Insulation Association of Canada Standards where not covered by this specification, purchase documents and manufacturer s recommendations..5 Threaded fittings or connections are to be insulated before straight pipe sections are covered. Flange shall be covered after pipe is covered..6 Insulation materials must be protected from the weather at all times. Each day's work shall be weatherproofed before being left for the night. Insulation that

358 Redwood Estates Installation of Section WTP Upgrades Thermal Insulation Page 2 of 8 on Cold Process Piping becomes wet or damaged during application must be removed and replaced at Contractor's expense..7 Preformed elbows shall be used instead of mitered pieces, unless specifically approved by Owner. 1.3 Shop Drawings.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Section Process General Requirements and Section Submit for approval manufacturer s catalogue literature related to installation fabrication for pipe, fittings, valves and jointing recommendations MATERIALS Aluminum Jackets.1 Aluminum jackets shall be as follows: Aluminum Jacket Alloy 3003, or mm thickness with moisture barrier (laminated polyethylene and 40#, min., virgin kraft paper) on inside, smooth finish, weatherproof z type longitudinal joint. Alloy 3003, 0.5mm thickness, with 50mm minimum straight end section for overlapping adjacent jacketing and with moisture barrier (laminated polyethylene and 40#. Min., virgin kraft paper) on inside. Alloy 1100, 0.5mm minimum thickness with extension (to weatherproof complete flange assembly area), with 50mm minimum straight end sections for overlapping adjacent jacketing and with moisture barrier (laminated polyethylene and kraft paper) on inside. Preformed Aluminum seal strap 40mm minimum width and 0.4mm minimum thickness. Use Jacketing for straight pipe up to 600mm O.D. Elbows and Fittings Flanges and Valves Sealing of Circumferential joints

359 Redwood Estates Installation of Section WTP Upgrades Thermal Insulation Page 3 of 8 on Cold Process Piping 2.2 Miscellaneous Material.1 Miscellaneous materials used shall be as follows: Miscellaneous Material Aluminum Flashing Alloy 3003 Use Sealing openings for nozzles Emulsion Mastic Wing Seals, 8mm Minimum of 9.5mm minimum width Type 302 or 304 (A.J. Gerrand 200-SS Techalloy or Owner approved equal may be preinstalled on bands. Coating and sealer per insulation manufacturer s recommendation. Tightening Bands 2.3 Band Material.1 Band materials shall be as follows: Band Material Type 302 or 304 stain less steel 9.5mm (1) min. width and 0.4mm min. thickness. NOTE (1): For final outer diameters of 300mm and larger use 12mm min. width. Securing single or outer layer of insulation. 2.4 Thermal Insulation.1 The material shall be foamed resin combined with elastomers to produce a flexible cellular material..2 Thermal Conductivity Maximum Conductivity Mean temperature, C BTU-in/Ft 2 - F-hr Water absorption: 5% by weight

360 Redwood Estates Installation of Section WTP Upgrades Thermal Insulation Page 4 of 8 on Cold Process Piping.4 Water vapour Permeability: 0.1 perm/in..5 Flame Spread Rate 25 or less (per ASTM E84 and CAN/ULC - S102 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies ).6 Smoke Development 50 or less (per ASTM E84 and CAN/ULC - S102 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies ).7 Standard of Acceptance:.1 Armstrong AP Armaflex Pipe Insulation and Rubatex..8 Thickness: As indicated on piping and instrument drawings. 2.5 Flashing Compound.1 Non-shrink, permanently flexible, for applications with insulation systems..2 Service temperature range: 0 C to 50 C..3 Average non-volatile: 97% by weight..4 Color: gray..5 Standard of Acceptance: (CP-70) Chil-Joint or equal. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Preparation.1 Contractor shall apply the insulation only after the piping system has been inspected and tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and approval to proceed has been given..2 Contractor shall wipe or brush clean all surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, etc. Surfaces must be dry when insulation installation starts and remain so during installation.

361 Redwood Estates Installation of Section WTP Upgrades Thermal Insulation Page 5 of 8 on Cold Process Piping.3 Insulation materials must be protected from the weather at all times. Each day s work shall be weatherproofed before being left for the night. Insulation that becomes wet or damaged during application must be removed and replaced. 3.2 Installation.1 Insulation shall be dry and free of foreign matter when installed..2 The Contractor shall furnish and install all supports and anchorage, beyond those shown on the drawings and not provided by others, that may be required to adequately support the insulation. Permission for welding of clips, studs or other insulation supports must be obtained prior to welding. Only qualified welders using qualified welding procedures shall be used. Attachments shall conform to the applicable piping code, specifications and contract drawings. Engineer shall be notified prior to installation of additional support elements..3 Insulation shall be installed so as to fit snugly against the piping..4 Where single layer insulation is used, the insulation will be applied with butt joints staggered and all joints tightly butted and coated with joint sealer. A finish shall then be applied in a manner specified in this standard. For factory-applied jacketing, lap edges shall be sealed per manufacturer's recommendations.5 On multiple-layer insulation, the additional layer or layers shall be applied with side and end joints staggered over joints of preceding layer..6 Only the joints of the outer layers of multiple-layer applications shall be coated with specified joint sealer before installation. The joints shall be drawn together when inner insulation layers are applied so that only a very thin vapor seal separates the sections of insulation..7 Insulation shall be applied with all joints fitted to eliminate voids. Large voids 5mm and larger shall not

362 Redwood Estates Installation of Section WTP Upgrades Thermal Insulation Page 6 of 8 on Cold Process Piping be filled with coating, but eliminated by refitting or replacing insulation..8 Install vapor stops at locations as shown on the detail drawings..9 Each layer of pipe insulation shall be secured in place with stainless steel bands spaced on 229mm centers (except for insulation having outside diameters of less than 300mm, which shall have bands spaced at 150mm centers)..10 The bands shall be tightened with a mechanical tightening tool and secured with steel wing seals..11 Contraction joints shall be installed in both horizontal and vertical straight run piping when the differential contraction between the pipe and insulating material exceeds 9.6mm per 30m of run..1 Joints shall be loosely filled with cushioning material..2 Contraction should be provided by and in the flanged cover of flanged joints when they occur in the line..12 Insulation on fittings shall consist of prefabricated fitting covers of the material and thickness specified..1 Fitting covers shall be applied in the same manner as pipe insulation. Insulation straps shall be so located that maximum strength and securement shall be obtained. Fitting fillers are not necessary, provided all joints are properly sealed..2 Protruding metal parts shall be thoroughly sealed..3 Piping is to be supported per drawing details. Piping supported on shoes or resting on structural members shall be insulated at the support, but shall have a vapor stop on either side of the support. The stop shall be similar to the detail drawings and shall end 50mm on either side of the support..4 Outer surface of fitting covers shall be reinforced and finished in the same manner as

363 Redwood Estates Installation of Section WTP Upgrades Thermal Insulation Page 7 of 8 on Cold Process Piping specified for pipe insulation. Care shall be exercised that reinforcing cloth overlaps connecting pipe insulation a distance of not less than 150mm..13 On horizontal piping, the jacket and insulation longitudinal joints shall be located on the side of the pipe - and in weather-wise position. Joints between mitered pieces, where approved by Owner, shall be sealed with a weatherproof sealing compound secured with preformed bands and clips..14 Finish.1 Aluminum jackets shall be used, unless otherwise noted..2 Joints shall be staggered (a minimum of 75mm) with respect to insulation joints. Joints on horizontal lines shall be at 3 or 9 o clock position..3 Longitudinal joints on outdoor insulation shall be located away from the worst prevailing weather conditions. All lapped joints shall be assembled so as to shed water..4 The closures for all exposed wires and bands shall be located so as to reduce the possibility of injury to personnel specifically, closure on pipe which is adjacent to ground or walkway level, shall be on bottom or side away from the traffic..5 Field-applied jackets with continuous longitudinal friction-type joints, and sealing strips and bands for circumferential joints shall be applied per the manufacturer s instructions. Additional bands shall be installed to secure the jackets on a maximum of 229mm centers..6 Field-applied jackets cut from rolls (or with sharp longitudinal edges) shall have the longitudinal edge given a 12mm inch fold to conceal the cut edge. They shall fit tightly to the insulation with a minimum 50mm longitudinal lap sealed with weatherproof flashing compound. Circumferential joints shall be lapped a minimum

364 Redwood Estates Installation of Section WTP Upgrades Thermal Insulation Page 8 of 8 on Cold Process Piping of 75mm, sealed with weatherproof flashing compound, and secured with bands per paragraph 2.3. Additional bands shall be installed to secure the jackets on a maximum of 229mm centers. All other cutouts shall have the sharp edges rolled over to conceal the cut edge..7 On vertical piping, 300 series stainless steel Z clips (maximum spacing of 600mm) shall be used on successive jackets..15 Prior to requesting acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall inspect the completed installation to ensure that there are no open punctures, cracks, abraded areas, or areas where both sides of metal laps are not in contact ( fishmouths ). The areas in which these are found shall be refinished per the prescribed finish procedures. Small fishmouths may be closed with self-tapping screws..16 Z-clips, J-clips and bond seals shall be formed such that the raw edge of the metal is folded inside such that edges will not present a cutting hazard to personnel.

365 Redwood Estates Identification Section WTP Upgrades Page 1 of 7 Part 1 - General 1.1 References.1 CGSB 1-GP-60M-78, Enamel, Interior, Gloss, Alkyd Type..2 References shall be the latest update version..3 Standard for pipe identification in Water and Wastewater Treatment Plants, MOE, Samples.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section Submittals..2 Submit samples and lists of proposed wording for approval before engraving for the following:.1 Nameplates..2 Pipe markers..3 Valve tags. 1.3 Product Data.1 Submit product data in accordance with Section and Part 2 - Products 2.1 Manufacturers Nameplates.1 Provide metal nameplate on each piece of equipment, mechanically fastened complete with raised or recessed letters..2 Indicate size, equipment model, manufacturer's name, serial number, voltage, cycle, phase and power of motors. 2.2 System Nameplates.1 Colour:.1 Hazardous: red letters, white background..2 Elsewhere: black letters, white background (except where required otherwise by applicable codes).

366 Redwood Estates Identification Section WTP Upgrades Page 2 of 7.2 Construction:.1 3 mm thick, laminated plastic or white anodized aluminum, matte finish, square corners, letters accurately aligned and machine engraved into core..3 Sizes:.1 Conform to following table: Size Dimensions No. of Letter # (mm x mm) Lines Height (mm) 1 10 x x x x x x x x x Use average of 25 letters/numbers (maximum) per nameplate..3 Use size #6 for terminal cabinets and control panels..4 Use size #9 for equipment in equipment rooms..5 Use size #9 for tanks. 2.3 Piping.1 General:.1 To CGSB 24-GP-3a..2 Identify medium by lettered legend, classification by primary and secondary colours, direction of flow by arrows..3 Complete painting of all ferrous piping, valves and fittings plus labelling every 3m meters..4 Non-ferrous materials will be colour banded maximum every 3 meters rather than completely

367 Redwood Estates Identification Section WTP Upgrades Page 3 of 7 painted..2 Sizes:.1 Legend: block capitals to following table: Outside Dia. of Size of Pipe or Insulation Letters mm mm Over Primary colour bands:.1 At valves and fittings: 500 mm long..2 Elsewhere: 1000 mm long..3 Secondary colour bands: 50 mm wide, 75 mm in from one end of primary colour band..4 Arrows:.1 Outside diameter of pipe/insulation 75 mm and greater: 150 mm long x 50 mm high..2 Outside diameter of pipe/insulation less than 75 mm: 100 mm long x 50 mm high..3 Use double headed arrows where flow is reversible..3 Material:.1 Paint: to CGSB 1-GP-60M..2 Legend markers, arrow colour bands: plastic coated cloth material with protective overcoating and waterproof contact adhesive undercoating, suitable for 100% RH and continuous operating temperature of 150 C and intermittent temperature of 200 C. Apply to

368 Redwood Estates Identification Section WTP Upgrades Page 4 of 7 prepared surfaces. Wrap tape around pipe or pipe covering with ends overlapping one (1) pipe diameter..3 Waterproof and heat resistant plastic marker tags: for pipes and tubing 20 mm nominal and smaller..4 Colours:.1 Where not covered by table below, submit legend colours to Engineer for approval. Entire system to be painted with prime colour except stainless steel where bands shall be applied for primary and secondary colours..5 Background colour marking and legends for piping systems: Legend Marking DRAIN PIPING & VALVES POTABLE WATER PIPING & VALVES SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE SOLUTION VENT Background colour Grey with black hand -wheels Blue with red handwheels Yellow Green 2.4 Valves and Controllers.1 Brass tags with 12 mm lettering and numbers..2 Furnish Engineer with six identification flow diagrams of approved size for each system. Include valve tag schedule, designating number, service, function and location of each tagged item and normal operating position of valves.

369 Redwood Estates Identification Section WTP Upgrades Page 5 of Controls Identification.1 Identify all systems, equipment, components, controls and sensors..2 Inscription to identify function and, (where applicable) fail-safe position. 2.6 Equipment.1 Provide equipment nameplates for each piece of equipment. Part 3 - Execution.2 Equipment nameplates shall contain lettering 100mm high and be mounted on equipment in a location visible from normal passage/approach. 3.1 General.1 Do identification work in accordance with CGSB 24-GP-3a except where specified otherwise..2 Provide ULC and or CSA registration plates, as required by respective agency..3 Provide identification only after all painting has been completed. 3.2 Location of Nameplates.1 In conspicuous location to facilitate easy reading from operating floor and to properly identify equipment and/or system..2 Provide stand-offs for nameplates on hot surfaces and insulated surfaces..3 Do not insulate or paint over plates. 3.3 Piping.1 Locations:.1 On long straight runs in open areas..2 Adjacent to all changes in direction, exceeding 3m.

370 Redwood Estates Identification Section WTP Upgrades Page 6 of 7.3 At least once in each small room through which piping passes..4 On both sides of visual obstruction or where run is difficult to follow..5 On both sides of any separation such as walls, floors and partitions..6 Where piping is concealed in pipe chase, ceiling space, or other confined space, at entry and leaving points and adjacent to each access opening..7 At beginning and end points of each run and at each piece of equipment in run..8 At point immediately upstream of major manually operated or automatically controlled valves. Where this is not possible, place identification as close to valve as possible, preferably on upstream side..9 Legend to be easily and accurately readable from usual operating areas and all readily accessible points..10 Plane of legend to be approximately at right angles to most convenient line of sight with consideration of operating positions, lighting conditions, reduced visibility of colour or legends caused by dust and dirt and risk of physical damage..2 Application:.1 Complete painting of all ferrous piping, valves and fittings plus labelling every linear 3 metres maximum identifying the contents and the direction of flow (comply with Occupational Health and

371 Redwood Estates Identification Section WTP Upgrades Page 7 of 7 Safety Act (OHSA) 66(1)(a), (b) and (c);.2 For all non-ferrous material, piping will be colour banded every linear 3 metres maximum rather than completely painted. 3.4 Valves and Controllers.1 Secure tags with non-ferrous chains or closed "S" hooks for valves and operating controllers at plain sight of equipment they serve. Number valves as per drawings.

372

373 Redwood Estates Field Pressure Section WTP Upgrades Testing of Process Page 1 of 6 Piping Part 1 - General 1.1 Scope.1 This specification covers hydrostatic testing and pneumatic testing of piping after erection and prior to initial operation..2 References.1 All references to codes and standards shall be to the latest edition of the following including addenda, etc.1 American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME) B31.1 Power Piping and B31.3 Process Piping..3 Applicable codes including ANSI/ASME B31.1, B31.3, and standards shall apply. All references to codes and standards shall be to the latest issue of the same..4 In the event repairs or additions are made following the pressure tests, the affected piping shall be retested, using the test procedures applied to the original system..5 All piping shall be hydrostatic tested..6 All piping shall be tested as required by the T.S.S.A..7 Acceptance of system under test shall follow Section , Piping System Acceptance. 1.2 Responsibility And Records.1 Construction Contractor shall be responsible for all testing. Contractor shall see that all required tests are made in accordance with this specification and shall arrange for tests to be witnessed by Engineer..2 The Contractor shall see that adequate records are maintained. These shall include test pressure, temperature, duration, date and time of day test fluid, and signatures of Engineer's and Contractor s representatives who witnessed the test, identification of piping system tested. Contractor shall provide a

374 Redwood Estates Field Pressure Section WTP Upgrades Testing of Process Page 2 of 6 Piping test plan and schedule to Engineer at start of work. The format of these records shall be approved by the Engineer before field pressure testing begins..3 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, in accordance with the Engineer s instructions, to ensure that no equipment or piping is subjected to a higher pressure than indicated in the test requirement documents furnished by the Engineer..4 Test procedures shall be reviewed with Engineer as part of the normal safety review. Part 2 - Products Not Applicable. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Preparation For Testing.1 Piping that is not to be tested shall be isolated. If isolation is impractical, the test conditions shall be determined by agreement with Engineer's representative..2 Lines (not intended to carry liquids) which are spring or counterweight supported shall be temporarily blocked up if hydrostatic tested, in order to sustain the weight of test fluid. Blocks shall be removed immediately after the system is drained..3 All valves within the system to be tested, except as described in Paragraphs 3.1.4, and 3.1.6, shall be in an open position..4 Shut-off valves in instrument lead lines from process lines and equipment shall be closed and instruments disconnected..5 All dirt, debris or loose foreign materials shall be removed by flushing from piping prior to hydrostatic testing..6 Relief valves and safety valves shall be blanked off at the inlet flange of the valves. Screwed relief and safety valves shall be removed and replaced with plugs or caps..7 All flanges, threaded joints and field welds shall be left bare of insulation and free of all visual obstructions. All

375 Redwood Estates Field Pressure Section WTP Upgrades Testing of Process Page 3 of 6 Piping underground pipe joints, except those encased in concrete anchors, if any, shall be left exposed. Underground lines shall be adequately shored to prevent pull-out of joints..8 The Contractor shall supply all materials (blanks, plugs, vents, gaskets and drain valves) necessary for testing. Blank flanges, blank plates, etc., shall be selected to withstand the test pressure. After tests the materials shall remain the property of Contractor, except drain valves which shall remain in place..9 Blank flanges, blank plates, etc., shall have handles painted a bright color to make them readily identifiable for removal prior to start-up operations..10 After testing is completed, piping shall be blown out with plant air to remove all debris..11 All welded attachments (such as pipe supports and hangers) shall be made before testing..12 Piping and equipment shall be thoroughly vented of air before the final hydrostatic test pressure is applied. Vent connections shall be located at high points of system..13 Insulation is not to be applied over any joints in the piping prior to completion of test..14 All instrument floats not rated for the test pressure shall be removed before hydrostatic testing..15 Control valves not resistant to the test pressure shall be removed from the piping system prior to test..16 Expansion joints shall be provided with restraints to withstand the added pressure load under test, or shall be removed or isolated from the test..17 Precautions shall be taken by opening vents or by other means to prevent building up excessive pressure in equipment adjacent to portions of the piping under tests..18 Restrictions to flow, such as orifice plates and mixing nozzles, shall not be installed or shall be removed. Where necessary, items removed shall be replaced with temporary spool pieces provided by Contractor.

376 Redwood Estates Field Pressure Section WTP Upgrades Testing of Process Page 4 of 6 Piping.19 Lines containing check valves shall have the source of pressure on the upstream side of the valve. If this is impossible, the check valve shall be blanked off or removed..20 If the test fluid in the system is subject to thermal expansion, precautions shall be taken to avoid excessive pressure..21 All pipe runs and interconnecting branch lines subject to the same test conditions, shall preferably be tested at the same time. Equipment shall be isolated from testing unless authorized by the Engineer. 3.2 Hydrostatic Test Pressure.1 The hydrostatic test pressure shall meet the ASME/ANSI B31.1 Piping Code Requirements for compressed air systems. Other piping systems hydrostatic test pressures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.3 for Normal Fluid Service..2 Generally, the hydrostatic test pressure shall be determined within the following guidelines:.1 Non metallic piping shall be tested as required by ASME B31.3 but within manufacturer's limitations. 3.3 Test Procedure.1 All testing must be scheduled and coordinated with Engineer s representative..2 Hydrostatic pressure shall be applied by means of a suitable test pump which shall not be connected to the pipe line until ready to test. An approved operator shall constantly attend the pump whenever it is connected to the pipe line. The pump shall be disconnected whenever the pump operator or the inspector leaves the pump or test site for any reason..3 The pump shall be disconnected or suitable block and bleed valves operated during the period the test pressure is being held..4 At least two indicating test gauges shall be provided, one on the pump or air source and one on the piping to be tested. The gauges are to be checked frequently against a standard gauge or dead weight tester and should read between 1½ times (min) to 3 times (max) the test pressure.

377 Redwood Estates Field Pressure Section WTP Upgrades Testing of Process Page 5 of 6 Piping.5 The piping under test shall be held at full test pressure for at least ½ hour without leaks..6 Clean water shall be used as the testing medium when hydrostatic testing materials other than stainless steel. Other liquids may be used when necessary and upon approval by Owner..7 When water is used in cold weather, it shall be heated or protected by inhibited antifreeze to avoid freezing. Water temperature during testing shall be a minimum of 15.5 C. Prior approval shall be obtained from the Engineer s representative for the use of antifreeze..8 Retesting of lines after repair shall be done at pressures originally specified for the test..9 Underground pressure lines shall be tested before backfilling..10 Instruments shall be tested in accordance with the recommendations of Engineer s Instrument Engineer. 3.4 Draining After Hydrostatic Testing.1 All lines shall be drained after the hydrostatic test..2 After pump suction and discharge lines have been drained, the piping shall be reassembled. It is imperative that a temporary strainer be installed in the pump suction at this time. 3.5 Final Procedures After Pressure Testing.1 Replace all control valves and check valve action for proper direction..2 Remove all temporary blocks from spring or counter-weight supported pipelines..3 Replace all orifice plates and mixing nozzles, and other inline instrumentation..4 Connect all instruments removed for the testing operation..5 Remove all temporary blanks and blinds.

378 Redwood Estates Field Pressure Section WTP Upgrades Testing of Process Page 6 of 6 Piping.6 Use all new gaskets when replacing control valves, orifice plates, blanks, blinds, etc..7 Valves which were closed for pressure testing and/or draining shall be returned to the proper position..8 Temporary piping supports shall be removed..9 Replace all relief valves and safety valves..10 Remove any restraints that may have been provided for expansion joints..11 Disconnect test equipment, test pump, test gages and test safety valves.

379 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades System Acceptance Page 1 of 5 Field Engineered Process Pipe Part 1 General 1.1 Scope.1 This specification defines the requirements for testing and acceptance of construction of piping systems. 1.2 Purpose.1 A procedure for inspecting, testing and accepting completed process, utility, and other miscellaneous piping systems after installation by a construction Contractor..2 The procedure develops the essential features based on the three phases of a testing program, namely: 1. Pretest requirements 2. Test requirements 3. Post-test requirements.3 An organization routing from inception to acceptance is also described. 1.3 Applicable Specification Sections.1 This procedure is to be used with the following specification sections which establish the design criteria for the tests. Section Process Piping Part 2 - Products Not Applicable

380 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades System Acceptance Page 2 of 5 Field Engineered Process Pipe Part 3 - Execution 3.1 Piping Testing Procedure.1 The focal point is the pipe test package, which is an accumulation of information about the pipeline system to be tested. For each test made, there is a particular package describing, through drawings and specifications, what is required to make that piping system complete. The pipe test package is separated into three phases, defined as follows: Pretest - Pipeline system completed to the point that is physically ready for a test and that each component in the system can withstand the potentially greater than normal weights and pressures of the test. All radiographic examinations are complete and documented. Test - The piping system is filled with test media, pressurized, tested to specific requirements and witnessed. Post-Test - Test blinds and test medium have been removed and all items have been installed. The piping is now ready for precommissioning. The exceptions to this system are "in-service" tests where the basic elements of this total procedure are followed, except that the proposed pressure test is deferred until after the service has been turned on. 3.2 Documentation.1 Pipe inspection, testing and acceptance require the preparation of a master testing plan for the systems. Piping test numbers are assigned and these documents are cross referenced to insure that all pipe lines to be constructed are included within the pipe test master plan..2 The Contractor shall assemble individual test packages containing:.1 P&ID - P&ID highlights the pipelines to be included in the test system and establishes the in-line devices, line and equipment isolation that must be accomplished prior to the initiation of the test.

381 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades System Acceptance Page 3 of 5 Field Engineered Process Pipe.2 Piping Inspection and Acceptance Record - This form provides the pipe test descriptions. Sign-off locations are provided for pre-test inspection approval, hydrotest witness and post test acceptance..3 Inspection Punch list Sheet - Used to highlight incomplete and/or incorrect installation found during inspection. Same sheet is used for sign-off of the inspection punch list after completion..3 Upon completion of the Piping Systems Acceptance Package, the Contractor shall prepare a progress tracking system based on the number of packages and the status of inspection, testing and acceptance. 3.3 Organizational Responsibilities.1 The piping test package must be routed through the organizations involved with construction and operation of the piping systems. Any change or deficiency found during the pipe test and inspection process is best located and identified as soon as possible. Then the change or deficiency can be corrected without an additional and costly hydrostatic test..2 The following outline shows the flow of the test package throughout the construction organization..1 Pre-Test a. Contractor prepares pipeline master testing plan. b. Contractor assembles test packages. c. Inspection by Contractor and sign-off of pretest mechanical inspection or preparation of a punchlist list and correction before submitting to Engineer..2 Engineer Inspection Activities a. Inspection by Engineer's Construction & Operations Group(s) and preparation of a punchlist. b. Engineer's Construction Group identifies punchlist items requiring completion prior to test. Returns punctilist list to Contractor.

382 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades System Acceptance Page 4 of 5 Field Engineered Process Pipe Contractor completes critical punch list items and returns to Engineer's Construction Group. c. Engineer's Construction Group then checks that all punchlist items have been completed prior to signing the approval for test..3 Contractor Activities a. Works off punchlist list items and resubmits to Engineer for approval for hydrotest. b. Prepares for test..4 Test.1 Contractor Activities a. Fills system to be tested with water or other test medium as noted on line list. b. Applies test procedure according to line list or as amended by Engineer's Construction Group. c. Tightens lines as needed. d. Holds pressure for at least one-half hour before calling Engineer to witness..5 Engineer's Construction Activities a. Witness hydrotest. b. Sign-off test inspection portion of Piping Inspection and acceptance Record..6 Contractor Activities (when applicable) a. Route copy of signed test package to mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, insulation and painting Contractors as a signal that pipeline system is now cleared for other work to proceed; i.e., final alignment of pumps, prime painting of welds, topcoating coating of insulated and uninsulated lines..3 Post-Test.1 Contractor Activities a. Vent lines Remove blinds Plug vents and drains Replace instruments and specialty items Remove temporary supports

383 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades System Acceptance Page 5 of 5 Field Engineered Process Pipe Check off and sign post-test check list b. Rechecks the pipeline system to be sure line is mechanically complete..2 Engineer's Construction Activities a. Engineer's Construction Group shall reinspect the pipeline system to make sure that all elements are complete except for heat tracing and insulation. b. Engineer's Construction Group then submits a post-test punchlist list or signs-off as complete and accepted..4 Final Disposition.1 Contractor Activities a. The Contractor transmits test packages to Engineer's Construction Group after each package is accepted by Engineer. b. Punchlist list items preventing completion of a test package due to material deliveries are considered complete if those punchlist list items are transferred to the master project punchlist list.

384

385 Redwood Estates Field Engineered Section WTP Upgrades Process Pipe Page 1 of 10 Supports Part 1 - General 1.1 Codes and References.1 Perform work and material to be in accordance with the following:.1 ANSI/ASME B31.1, Power Piping, (SI Edition)..2 MSS-SP-58, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer..3 MSS-SP-69, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Erection and Application. 1.2 Shop Drawings and Product Data.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section Process General Requirements and Section Submit shop drawings and product data for following items:.1 Upper attachment..2 Middle attachment..3 Pipe attachment..4 Riser clamps..5 Shields and saddles. 1.3 Maintenance Data 1.4 Design Requirements.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section Construct pipe hanger and support to manufacturer's recommendations utilizing equipment manufacturer's regular production components, parts and assemblies..2 Design hangers and supports to support systems under all conditions of operation, allow free expansion and contraction, prevent excessive stresses from being introduced into pipework or connected equipment.

386 Redwood Estates Field Engineered Section WTP Upgrades Process Pipe Page 2 of 10 Supports.3 Provide for vertical adjustments after erection and during commissioning..4 Ensure that supports, guides, anchors do not transmit excessive quantities of stress or heat to building structure..5 Base maximum load ratings on allowable stresses prescribed by ASME B31.1 or MSS-SP Scope.1 This specification covers the design, selection, application, fabrication and installation procedures for field engineered pipe supports for pipe sizes 50mm in diameter and smaller, unless noted otherwise. PART 2 - PRODUCTS.2 Refer to line list on drawings for lines which are to have field engineered pipe supports. 2.1 General.1 Fabricate hangers, supports and sway braces in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and MSS-SP Support from structural members, where structural bearing does not exist or inserts are not in suitable locations, provide supplementary structural steel members. Do not suspend from metal deck..3 All supplementary structural members and supports shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. All steel hangers and rods shall be hot dipped galvanized. All supports beneath liquid levels in tanks shall be type 304L stainless steel.

387 Redwood Estates Field Engineered Section WTP Upgrades Process Pipe Page 3 of 10 Supports.4 Provide seismic bracing of piping in accordance with Section Seismic Restraints..5 Provide 1.5mm thick bondable teflon isolation material to isolate stainless steel piping from galvanized steel supports where not insulated overlap at least 10mm, either side of support..6 Provide rubber hose over threaded rod on all pipe clamps. 2.2 Upper Attachments.1 Upper Attachments:.1 Concrete:.1 Hollow core block concrete: Adhesive material applied with screen tube..1 Acceptable material: Hilti Hit Adhesive Anchors, HY Coordinate minimum embedment of adhesive anchors with anchor manufacturer..2 Solid cast in place concrete or hollow core slabs: Adhesive material fastened into solid base..1 Acceptable material: Hilti Hit Adhesive Anchors, HY Coordinate anchor locations with precast slab supplier so that anchor locations provide adequate concrete thickness..3 Coordinate spacing of hangers with precast slab supplier so that support loads do not exceed slab

388 Redwood Estates Field Engineered Section WTP Upgrades Process Pipe Page 4 of 10 Supports capacities. Provide supplementary steel as required so that supports can be placed where required if adequate bearing does not exist..4 Coordinate minimum embedment of adhesive anchors with anchor manufacturer..5 Submit anchor manufacturer's embedment and precast slab suppliers recommendations for anchoring to structural engineer prior to drilling for supports..2 Steel beam (bottom flange):.1 Cold piping DN 50mm and under: malleable iron C clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 19. ULC listed. Complete with restraining clip..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig Steel beam (top):.1 Cold piping DN 50mm and under: malleable iron "top of beam" C clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 19. ULC listed. Complete with restraining clip..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvilfig Steel joist:.1 Cold piping DN 50mm and under: steel washer plate with double locking nuts..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig.60.

389 Redwood Estates Field Engineered Section WTP Upgrades Process Pipe Page 5 of 10 Supports.5 Steel channel or angle (bottom):.1 Cold piping DN 50mm and under; malleable iron C clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 23. ULC listed. Complete with restraining clip..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig Steel channel or angle (top):.1 Cold piping DN 50mm and under; malleable iron "top of beam" C clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 19. ULC listed. Complete with restraining clip..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig Middle Attachment (rod).1 Carbon steel threaded rod electro-galvanized..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig Ensure that hanger rods are subject to tensile loading only..3 Provide linkages where lateral or axial movement of pipework is anticipated. 2.4 Pipe Attachment.1 Cold piping, steel or cast iron: hot piping steel, with less than 1 inch horizontal movement; adjustable clevis to MSS-SP-58, type 1. ULC listed. Galvanized finish..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig Suspended hot piping, steel and copper, with horizontal movement in excess of 1 inch; pipe roller to MSS-SP-58, type 43. Galvanized finish..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig.174 and fig.171.

390 Redwood Estates Field Engineered Section WTP Upgrades Process Pipe Page 6 of 10 Supports.3 Bottom supported hot piping, steel and copper: pipe roller stand to MSS-SP-58, type Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig Pipe hangers and supports on all cold pipework and hot pipework above DN 25mm must be oversized to accommodate thermal insulation and to avoid penetrating the vapour barrier. 2.5 Riser Clamps.1 Steel: galvanized carbon steel to MSS-SP-58, type 42. ULC listed..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig Saddles and Shields.1 Cold piping DN 32mm and over: protection shield with 25mm maximum thickness of polyisocyanurate insulation under shield with uninterrupted vapor barrier..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig Hot piping DN 32mm and over: protective saddle with insulation under saddle..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig.160 to Tack weld protective saddle to pipe. 2.7 Seismic Restraints.1 Provide seismic restraints of piping and equipment to Section Seismic Restraints. 2.8 Finish.1 Fabricated support material shall be hot dipped galvanized. Support material submerged and/or in tanks shall be type 304L stainless steel.

391 Redwood Estates Field Engineered Section WTP Upgrades Process Pipe Page 7 of 10 Supports Part 3 - Execution.2 Bolt threads in assembled components shall be painted. Stainless steel or other corrosion-resistant material need not be painted..3 Supplementary and structural steel shall be hot dipped galvanized. Supplementary and structural steel materials submerged and/or in tanks shall be type 304L stainless steel. 3.1 Installation.1 Install in accordance with:.1 Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations..2 Vibration Control Devices:.1 Install on piping systems at pumps, boilers, chillers, cooling towers, elsewhere as indicated..3 Clamps on riser piping:.1 Support independent of connected horizontal pipework using riser clamps and riser clamp lugs welded to riser..2 Bolt-tightening torques to be to industry standards..3 Steel pipes: Install below coupling or shear lugs welded to pipe..4 Cast iron pipes: Install below joint..4 Clevis plates:.1 Attach to concrete with 4 minimum concrete inserts, one at each corner..5 Provide supplementary structural steelwork where structural bearings do not exist or where concrete inserts are not in correct locations.

392 Redwood Estates Field Engineered Section WTP Upgrades Process Pipe Page 8 of 10 Supports.6 Use approved constant support type hangers where:.1 Vertical movement of pipework is 13mm or more, transfer of load to adjacent hangers or connected equipment is not permitted..7 Use variable support spring hangers where:.1 Transfer of load to adjacent piping or to connected equipment is not critical..2 Variation in supporting effect does not exceed 25% of total load..8 Support plastic piping as per manufacturer recommendations. 3.2 Hanger Spacing.1 Spacing and middle attachment (rod) diameter as specified in paragraphs below or as in table below, whichever is more stringent..2 Copper piping: up to DN 12mm: every 5 ft..3 Within 300mm of each horizontal elbow..4 Non metallic piping per manufacturer's instructions. Maximum Maximum Pipe Rod Spacing Spacing Size: DN Diameter up to 32mm 10mm 2.1m 38mm 10mm 2.7m. 50mm 10mm 3.0m 3.3 Hanger Installation.1 Install hanger so that rod is vertical under operating conditions..2 Adjust hangers to equalize load.

393 Redwood Estates Field Engineered Section WTP Upgrades Process Pipe Page 9 of 10 Supports.3 Support from structural members. Where structural bearing does not exist or inserts are not in suitable locations, provide supplementary structural steel members..4 Do not suspend from metal deck..5 Anchoring of piping shall be as per manufacturers recommendations. Submit anchorage system for review before installation..6 The use of perforated band, wire chain, or solid ring type hangers will not be accepted..7 Prior to connecting pumping units or other equipment to pipe sections, support complete piping assembly and anchor in perfect alignment with pumping units and sleeves to prevent movement of piping assembly and strain on pumping units or equipment..8 Support all valves and risers so that weight of valve or valve assembly is not carried by adjacent horizontal pipe sections. 3.4 Horizontal Movement.1 Angularity of rod hanger resulting from horizontal movement of pipework from cold to hot position not to exceed 4 from vertical..2 Where horizontal pipe movement is less than 13mm, offset pipe hanger and support so that rod hanger is vertical in the hot position. 3.5 Final Adjustment.1 Adjust hangers and supports..1 Ensure that rod is vertical under

394 Redwood Estates Field Engineered Section WTP Upgrades Process Pipe Page 10 of 10 Supports operating conditions..2 Equalize loads..2 Adjustable clevis..1 Tighten hanger load nut securely to ensure proper hanger performance..2 Tighten upper nut after adjustment..3 C-clamps..1 Follow manufacturer's recommended written instructions and torque values when tightening C-clamps to bottom flange of beam. Provide restraining clip..4 Beam clamps:.1 Hammer jaw firmly against underside of beam. 3.6 Seismic Restraints.1 Provide bracing of piping and equipment in accordance with Section Seismic Restraint.

395 Redwood Estates Engineered Process Section WTP Upgrades Pipe Supports Page 1 of 15 Part 1 General 1.1 Scope.1 This standard covers the fabrication, and installation procedures for engineered pipe supports. This generally applies to piping 65mm diameter and larger, unless noted otherwise..2 Refer to drawing for lines which require engineered pipe supports. 1.2 Codes.1 Standards and Specification Sheets: The codes, standards, and specification/data sheets listed shall be the latest edition. CAN3-S16.1 ASME B31.1 MSS-SP-58 MSS-SP-69 MSS-SP-89 ANSI B ANSI B ANSI B1.1 ANSI/ASME CSA W47.1 ASME B31.3 Steel Structures for Buildings Power Piping Pipe Hanger and Support - Materials, Design and Manufacture Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Square and Hex Nuts Unified Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Forms) Pipe Threads, General Purpose B Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures. Process Piping

396 Redwood Estates Engineered Process Section WTP Upgrades Pipe Supports Page 2 of Pipe Supports Design.1 Contractor shall engineer and design pipe support systems for piping of 65mm dia and larger in accordance with ASME B31.3 for Normal Fluid Service. Pipe supports shall be engineered and certified by a Professional Engineer licensed to practice in Ontario..2 Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review all support details..3 Operating and installation loads, direction and amount of movement shall be shown on the detail drawings..4 Supplementary steel required for attachment to roof, wall or floor structure shall be engineered and supplied by the Contractor. Supplementary steel for rod hangers shall be engineered and supplied by the Contractor. All supports and supplementary steel shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. All supports and supplementary steel submerged in tanks shall be type 304L stainless steel..5 All field welds and shop welds of non-catalog items will be indicated on the detail drawing using American Welding Society standard welding symbols..6 The location of a particular support assemblies shall be shown on the drawings issued to Engineer for review..7 Support loads shall not exceed building elements design loadings. Contractor shall review with structural Engineer building loads and shall space or design supports so that building elements design loads are not exceeded.

397 Redwood Estates Engineered Process Section WTP Upgrades Pipe Supports Page 3 of 15.8 Provide bracing of piping in accordance with Section Seismic Restraint..9 Construct pipe hanger and support to manufacturer's recommendations utilizing equipment manufacturer's regular production components, parts and assemblies..10 Design hangers an supports to support systems under all conditions of operation, allow free expansion and contraction, prevent excessive stresses from being introduced into pipework or connected equipment..11 Provide for vertical adjustments after erection and during commissioning..12 Ensure that supports, guides, anchors do not transmit excessive quantities of stress or heat to building structure..13 Maximum rod length to be 1.5m. Pipes requiring supports with rod lengths greater then 1.5m shall have supplementary steel attached to structure to reduce rod length to less than 1.5m..14 Pump suction/discharge headers shall be supported from below utilizing supplementary steel support racks which have base plates secured to floor..15 All supports to be arranged to provide maximum access to valves and other equipment requiring access..16 Do not weld directly to stainless steel pipes with steel supports. Provide

398 Redwood Estates Engineered Process Section WTP Upgrades Pipe Supports Page 4 of 15 clamps with bondable teflon sheet between clamp and stainless steel pipe. 1.4 Dimensional Tolerances.1 This section covers maximum tolerances in fabricated pipe supports except for cast or forged products..2 Tolerances for raw materials such as strip, sheet, bar, plate, pipe, tubing, structural and bar size shapes shall be in accordance with recognized standards and specifications. Tolerances for casting and forgings shall be in the individual manufacturers standards..3 Manufacturing Tolerances:.1 Cut Lengths - Linear.1 Hanger rods ± 12mm.2 Structural shapes, pipe, tubing ± 3mm..3 Plates & bars ± 3mm.2 Threads:.1 Screw threads to ANSI B1.1, Class 1A, 2A and 2B.2 Pipe threads to ANSI/ASME B Weld Sizes - All welds plus only, no minus.4 Angularity - all manufacturing methods to ± 4 degrees.5 Holes - Drilled or Punched Only.1 Location - center to edge, or center to center, ± 1.6mm.2 Diameter - plus.2 times metal thickness or minus 0.8mm 1.5 Shop Drawings.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Section Submittals. 1.6 Qualification of Workmanship.1 Use organizations approved under the Canadian Welding Bureau to the

399 Redwood Estates Engineered Process Section WTP Upgrades Pipe Supports Page 5 of 15 Part 2 Products requirements of CSA W47.1, Division 2, to undertake welding operations using welders qualified to perform the type of welds required. 2.1 General.1 Fabricate hangers, supports and sway braces in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and MSS-SP Support from structural members, where structural bearing does not exist or inserts are not in suitable locations, provide supplementary structural steel members. Do not suspend from metal deck. Anchoring of piping and equipment shall be to manufacturers recommendations. Submit anchorage system, arrangement and type of hangers supports with calculations for review. Supplemental steel to be galvanized after fabrication..3 Finishes:.1 Hangers and supports: galvanized after manufacturer..2 Use electro-plating galvanizing process..3 Ensure steel hangers in contact with copper piping are epoxy coated..4 Provide seismic bracing of piping in accordance with Section , Seismic Restraints..5 Use components for intended design purpose only. Do not use for rigging or erection purposes..6 Steel sections (except tube sections) and plates: to CSA G40.21, type 300W.

400 Redwood Estates Engineered Process Section WTP Upgrades Pipe Supports Page 6 of 15.7 Welding Materials: to CSA W Upper Attachments.1 Upper Attachments:.1 Concrete:.1 Hollow core block concrete: Adhesive material applied with screen tube..1 Acceptable material: Hilti Hit Adhesive Anchors, HY Coordinate minimum embedment of adhesive anchors with anchor manufacturer..3 Submit anchor manufacturer's recommendations for anchoring to structural engineer prior to drilling for supports..2 Solid cast in place concrete or hollow core slabs: Adhesive material fastened into solid base..1 Acceptable material: Hilti Hit Adhesive Anchors, HY Coordinate anchor locations with precast slab supplier so that anchor locations provide adequate concrete thickness..3 Coordinate spacing of hangers with precast slab supplier so that support loads do not exceed slab capacities. Provide supplementary steel as required so that supports can be placed where required if

401 Redwood Estates Engineered Process Section WTP Upgrades Pipe Supports Page 7 of 15 adequate bearing does not exist..4 Coordinate minimum embedment of adhesive anchors with anchor manufacturer..5 Submit anchor manufacturer's embedment and precast slab suppliers recommendations for anchoring to structural engineer prior to drilling for supports..2 Steel beam (bottom flange):.1 Cold piping DN 50mm and under: malleable iron C clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 19. ULC listed..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig Cold piping DN 65mm and larger and all hot piping: malleable iron beam clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 28 or 29. ULC listed..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig Steel beam (top):.1 Cold piping DN 50mm and under: malleable iron "top of beam" C clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 19. ULC listed..1 Standard of acceptance; Anvil fig Cold piping DN 65mm and larger and all hot piping: steel jaw, hook rod with nut, spring washer and plain washer, to MSS-SP-58, type 25. ULC listed..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig.227.

402 Redwood Estates Engineered Process Section WTP Upgrades Pipe Supports Page 8 of 15.4 Steel joist:.1 Cold piping DN 50mm and under: steel washer plate with double locking nuts..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig Cold piping DN 65mm and larger and all hot piping: steel washer plates with double locking nut, carbon steel clevis and malleable iron socket..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil: washer plate fig.60; clevis, fig.66; eye nut, fig Steel channel or angle (bottom):.1 Cold piping DN 50mm and under; malleable iron C clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 23. ULC listed..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig Cold piping DN 65mm and larger and all hot piping; universal channel clamp. ULC listed..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig Steel channel or angle (top):.1 Cold piping DN 50mm and under; malleable iron "top of beam" C clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 19. ULC listed..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig Cold piping DN 65mm and larger and all hot piping: steel jaw, hook rod with nut, spring washer and plain washer, to MSS-SP-58, type 25. ULC listed..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig.227.

403 Redwood Estates Engineered Process Section WTP Upgrades Pipe Supports Page 9 of Middle Attachment (rod).1 Carbon steel threaded rod electro-galvanized finish..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig Ensure that hanger rods are subject to tensile loading only..3 Provide linkages where lateral or axial movement of pipework is anticipated. 2.4 Pipe Attachment.1 Cold piping, steel or cast iron: hot piping steel, with less than 25mm horizontal movement; adjustable clevis to MSS-SP-58, type 1. ULC listed. Galvanized finish..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig Uninsulated Cold copper piping; uninsulated hot copper piping with less than 25mm horizontal movement; adjustable clevis to MSS-SP-58, type 1. Copper plated..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig.ct Suspended hot piping, steel and copper, with horizontal movement in excess of 25mm; pipe roller to MSS-SP-58, type 43. Galvanized finish..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig.174 and fig Bottom supported hot piping, steel and copper: pipe roller stand to MSS-SP-58, type Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig Pipe hangers and supports on all cold pipework and hot pipework above DN 25mm must be oversized to accommodate thermal insulation and to avoid

404 Redwood Estates Engineered Process Section WTP Upgrades Pipe Supports Page 10 of 15 penetrating the vapour barrier..6 Do not weld supports directly to stainless steel pipes. Provide clamps welded to support plates. Provide bondable teflon sheet between clamps and stainless steel pipes. 2.5 Riser Clamps.1 Steel or cast iron pipe: galvanized carbon steel to MSS-SP-58, type 42. ULC listed..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig Copper pipe: carbon steel copper finished to MSS-SP-58, type Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig.ct Provide bondable 1.5mm thick teflon sheet between clamps and stainless steel pipes. Overlap min. 10mm either side of support. 2.6 Saddles and Shields.1 Cold and hot piping DN 32mm and over: protection shield with high density insulation (25.4mm thick polyisocyanurate) under shield with uninterrupted vapour barrier..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig Hot piping DN 32mm and over: protective saddle with insulation under saddle..1 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil fig.160 to Tack weld protective saddle to carbon steel pipe. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Fabrication.1 Fabricate hangers, supports and sway braces in accordance with ANSI B31.1, B31.3 and MSS-SP-58.

405 Redwood Estates Engineered Process Section WTP Upgrades Pipe Supports Page 11 of 15.2 This section covers fabrication of pipe support components and assemblies..1 Material of construction shall be CSA G40.21, type 300W unless otherwise noted. Plates, rods, bars, etc. which are used for the fabrication of support assemblies may be cut to shape or size by shearing, sawing, machining, grinding or thermal cutting..2 Thermal cutting processes shall be suitable for the material to which it is applied. After thermal cutting, slag shall be removed prior to further fabrication or use. Discolouration remaining on the flame cut surface is not considered to be detrimental oxidation..3 Drilling and punching shall be performed as required by drawings and specifications..4 Screw threads shall be in conformance with ANSI B1.1 Class 1A, 2A and 2B for coarse thread series and Class 2A & 2B for the eight thread series..5 Pipe threads shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B either straight or tapered as required..6 All threaded rod shall be hot-dip galvanized.7 Welding shall be performed where indicated on the detail drawings in accordance with the welded joint requirements specified in the CAN3-S16.1. When welding any attachment to a pressure pipe, such welding shall to the specific applicable welding procedures which have been qualified in accordance with Section IX of the

406 Redwood Estates Engineered Process Section WTP Upgrades Pipe Supports Page 12 of 15 ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code and T.S.S.A. Pressure Vessels branch requirements. A copy of the fabricator's procedures and weld qualification record shall be submitted for owner review and record..8 Fabricate supports in accordance with ASME B31.1, Power Piping. 3.2 Finish - (Painting/ Galvanizing.1 Fabricated support material shall be hot dipped galvanized. Support material submerged in tanks shall be type 304L stainless steel..2 Bolt threads in assembled components shall be painted. Stainless steel or other corrosion-resistant material need not be painted..3 Supplementary and structural steel shall be hot dipped galvanized. Supplementary and structural steel materials submerged in tanks shall be type 304L stainless steel. 3.3 Inspection.1 There will be an inspection program to ensure that all aspects of work performed comply fully with specified requirements. The owner may elect to conduct inspection during fabrication. 3.4 Marking.1 When pipe supports are to be shop fabricated, each pipe support shall have its identifying mark number painted on with water-proof paint in letters at least 20mm high. 3.5 Pipe Support 1installation.1 Engineered pipe supports shall be located in strict accordance with the pipe support location drawing supplied by the Contractor and certified. Relocation and reorientation of any pipe support from the specified

407 Redwood Estates Engineered Process Section WTP Upgrades Pipe Supports Page 13 of 15 location shall not be permitted without written permission of the Contractors design engineer..2 Installed pipe supports shall be used only for their intended purpose. They shall not be used for rigging or erection purposes..3 The contractor is responsible for developing an installation sequence giving priority to major components and groups of piping closest to the supporting structure..4 Prior to connecting pumping units or other equipment to pipe sections, support complete piping assembly and anchor in perfect alignment with pumping units and sleeves to prevent movement of piping assembly and strain on pumping units or equipment..5 Support all valves and risers so that weight of valve or valve assembly is not carried by adjacent horizontal pipe sections..6 Provide heavy rubber material between pipe and galvanized supports..7 Provide plastic hose material over all threaded rods used as part of pipe clamps..8 All material in contact with the supported pipe shall be of the same material unless separated by suitable means..9 All material welded to the supported pipe shall be of the same material as the pipe.

408 Redwood Estates Engineered Process Section WTP Upgrades Pipe Supports Page 14 of Clamps on riser piping:.1 Support independent of connected horizontal pipework using riser clamps and riser clamp lugs welded to riser..2 Bolt-tightening torques to be to industry standards..3 Steel pipes: Install below coupling or shear lugs welded to pipe..4 Cast iron pipes: Install below joint..5 Provide bondable teflon sheet between clamps and stainless steel pipes..11 Use approved constant support type hangers where:.1 vertical movement of pipework is 13mm or more, transfer of load to adjacent hangers or connected equipment is not permitted..12 Use variable support spring hangers where:.1 transfer of load to adjacent piping or to connected equipment is not critical..2 variation in supporting effect does not exceed 25% of total load..13 Provide support within 300mm (12") of each horizontal elbow..14 Space supports for non-metallic pipe as per manufacturer s instructions. 3.6 Hanger Installation.1 Install hanger so that rod is vertical under operating conditions..2 Adjust hangers to equalize load..3 Do not suspend from metal deck.

409 Redwood Estates Engineered Process Section WTP Upgrades Pipe Supports Page 15 of Horizontal Movement.1 Angularity of rod hanger resulting from horizontal movement of pipework form cold to hot position not to exceed 4 from vertical..2 Where horizontal pipe movement is less than 13mm (½") offset pipe hanger and support so that rod hanger is vertical in the hot position. 3.8 Final Adjustment.1 Adjust hangers and supports..1 Ensure that rod is vertical under operating conditions..2 Equalize loads..2 Adjustable clevis:.1 Tighten hanger load nut securely to ensure proper hanger performance..2 Tighten upper nut after adjustment..3 C-clamps:.1 Follow manufacturer's recommended written instructions and torque values when tightening C-clamps to bottom flange of beam..4 Beam clamps:.1 Hammer jaw firmly against underside of beam. 3.9 Seismic Restraint.1 Provide seismic restraint of systems in accordance with Section Seismic Restraint.

410

411 Redwood Estates Disinfection and Section WTP Upgrades Testing of Water Page 1 of 8 Retaining Structures & Process Piping Part 1 - General 1.1 References.1 This Section covers the flushing, testing and disinfection of water retaining structures; in-plant potable water process piping; and the dechlorination and discharge of chlorinated water..2 The Contractor shall employ MOE Certified specialists to flush, test and sterilize all installed structures and pipe work in such lengths or sections as approved by the Consultant and the Township, and provide all labour, water, chemicals and chemical metering equipment, pumps, gauges, caps, stoppers, air release cocks, backflow preventers, pipe work and any other apparatuses required in order to complete the tests..3 If bacteriological test results on samples taken from the water retaining structures or process piping show incomplete disinfection, the procedure will be repeated, as directed by the Consultant, at no additional cost to the Township..4 The Contractor is advised that the Township currently utilizes free chlorine to maintain residual disinfection in the water distribution system..5 All disinfection procedures shall be performed in the presence of, and to the satisfaction of, the Consultant and the Township. 1.2 Submittals.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant for review, a detailed description of the Work procedure for both hydrostatic testing and disinfection of all water retaining structures and process piping, a minimum of 14 Days prior to commencing any Work. Permission to

412 Redwood Estates Disinfection and Section WTP Upgrades Testing of Water Page 2 of 8 Retaining Structures & Process Piping proceed will be granted in writing by the Consultant..2 The Contractor shall advise the Consultant of the estimated quantity of water to be required. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to conservation of water. 1.3 Payment.1 The cost for flushing, disinfection and hydrostatic testing of water retaining structures and process piping as described herein shall be included in the Contract Price. The Contractor shall be responsible for any additional samples required due to failed test results. Part 2 - Products 2.1 Products.1 The Contractor shall furnish all disinfecting chemicals, mixing equipment, temporary service connections, testing plugs or caps, pressure pumps, pipe connections, isolation valves, pressure gauges, thrust supports, valves for expelling air (automatic and/or manual), pumping to the required test pressure, dewatering the line or structure and flushing, all other required equipment and all labour required for hydrostatic testing, flushing, draining and disinfecting pipes and reservoirs..2 The Township will provide, free of charge, the quantity of water required for one hydrostatic test and disinfection. Any water required for further testing or re-testing will be at the Contractor's expense..3 The Contractor is responsible for providing all disinfection chemicals required to complete the Work.

413 Redwood Estates Disinfection and Section WTP Upgrades Testing of Water Page 3 of 8 Retaining Structures & Process Piping Part 3 - Execution.4 The Contractor shall provide chemicals to neutralize chlorinated water prior to its disposal. 3.1 Disinfection of Water Retaining Structures.1 The Contractor shall notify the Consultant at least a minimum of ten (10) Working Days before disinfection is carried out in order to allow for inspection by the Consultant..2 Disinfection shall not commence until all components have been cleaned and thoroughly flushed..3 Disinfection of water retaining structures shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C Standard for Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities. There are three (3) disinfection methods provided in the Standard, however only Method 1 or 2 is to be used by the Contractor..4 Prior to placing any water retaining structures into service, the Contractor shall disinfect all water retaining structures. All disinfection operations shall be supervised by the Consultant..5 After the disinfection procedure is completed and before the facilities are placed in service, water shall be sampled and tested for coliform organisms in accordance with AWWA Standard C and O. Reg 170/03..6 The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe disposal of all water from disinfection procedures. 3.2 Bacteriological.1 Before a water storage facility or process Sampling and Testing piping is placed into service,

414 Redwood Estates Disinfection and Section WTP Upgrades Testing of Water Page 4 of 8 Retaining Structures & Process Piping bacteriological sampling and testing shall be performed in accordance with the above-noted AWWA Standard C and O. Reg.170/03..2 The water samples for bacteriological testing shall be taken by qualified, licensed Township personnel only..3 The Township shall be responsible for sending the samples to a registered laboratory for testing. 3.3 Piping Sterilizing Methods.1 General Requirements:.1 All current Ministry of Environment Standards and Regulations on Drinking Water including AWWA C651 and O. Reg. 170/03 must be met while completing the swabbing and disinfection and chlorine residual and bacteriological testing of the process piping..2 All connection points between the existing process piping and new process piping shall be kept physically separated until the new process piping has successfully passed all pressure, leakage, chlorine residual and bacteriological tests..3 Suggested Sequence:.1 Charge piping..2 Swab (minimum three (3) swabs per section of pipe).3 Hydrostatic pressure test.4 Hydrostatic leakage test.5 Disinfection (chlorination).6 Flushing and dechlorination.4 The Contractor shall employ a qualified specialist experienced in swabbing and disinfection of process piping, and who is otherwise acceptable to the Consultant, to perform the swabbing, disinfection

415 Redwood Estates Disinfection and Section WTP Upgrades Testing of Water Page 5 of 8 Retaining Structures & Process Piping and flushing Work described herein..5 Tests shall be performed in the presence of, and to the satisfaction of, the Consultant and the Township..2 Swabbing.1 The following shall be used as a guideline in swabbing newly installed piping: Type of Swab Open cell polyurethane foam having a density of 24 kg/m 3 (1.5 lb/ft 3 ) Length of Swab 1.5 x swab diameter Diameter of Swab Flow Rate Minimum No. of Swabs for a New Piping (diameter of pipe) + 50 mm 0.5 to 1.0 m/s using potable water 3 new foam swabs (after 3 rd swab, the water should be clear; if not, additional swabbing is required at the Contractor s expense).2 Only new swabs will be permitted for use and under no circumstances will used swabs be allowed..3 All swabs must be inspected prior to their insertion and immediately after they exit the main to ensure that they have remained intact and that pieces of the foam do not stay in the pipe..4 The Contractor shall discharge water to an approved outlet ensuring all required dechlorination measures, as detailed herein, are followed..3 Disinfection.1 After the successful completion of swabbing operations and pressure and leakage testing, disinfection of the

416 Redwood Estates Disinfection and Section WTP Upgrades Testing of Water Page 6 of 8 Retaining Structures & Process Piping new piping shall proceed using liquid sodium hypochlorite, pitchlor, H.T.H., or any other chlorine compound acceptable to the Township in sufficient quantity to obtain a free chlorine residual of 50 mg/l, after a period of 24 hours from the time of its introduction into the pipe..2 Flushing and disinfecting operations are to be conducted in the presence of the Consultant. Notify the Consultant at least five (5) Working Days in advance of the proposed date when disinfection operations are to commence..3 The Consultant may permit or require flushing to be carried out in stages as sections of the system are completed. Ensure that no unwanted matter is allowed to enter into any sections which have been flushed..4 Leave the system charged with 50 ppm chlorine solution for 24 hours..5 Operate all valves during this 24 hour period..6 Test the chlorine residual in the section after 24 hours..7 If tests indicate a chlorine residual of not less than 25 ppm, flush the section completely and recharge with potable water. If the test does not meet the requirements, repeat the chlorination procedure until satisfactory results are obtained..8 After the system has been recharged, the Township will take samples for bacteriological tests. If there is contamination, the Contractor must repeat the disinfection procedure. The water samples will be tested in accordance with AWWA C651 and O.Reg.170/03.

417 Redwood Estates Disinfection and Section WTP Upgrades Testing of Water Page 7 of 8 Retaining Structures & Process Piping.4 Flushing.1 After successful disinfection, the piping shall be thoroughly flushed by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Consultant. All wasted water used for flushing operations shall be dechlorinated prior to its disposal as detailed herein. 3.4 Dechlorination.1 Safely dispose of all chlorinated water and Discharge of from draining operations or used for Chlorinated Water testing, flushing or disinfecting waterworks..2 Do not discharge any untreated chlorinated water into any storm sewer, drainage ditch, watercourse or sanitary sewer..3 In all cases, the wasted water must be neutralized to provide a total chlorine residual of less than mg/l at the outfall where detrimental effects may be suffered by plants and/or animals in the natural environment. The Contractor is responsible for monitoring the discharge of all wastewater in the presence of the Consultant. Should tests show a residual of greater than mg/l, the discharge shall be ceased immediately and the procedure modified to meet the requirement of less than the mg/l..4 Discharge sites which are within 100 metres of natural drainage, or with direct discharge to a body of water, should be considered high risk. In such instances, the Township may request a dechlorination plan along with contingency and mitigation plans in the event that the chlorine residuals exceed those specified herein..5 Where no other options are available, the Contractor may be permitted to discharge wastewater into an existing sanitary sewer

418 Redwood Estates Disinfection and Section WTP Upgrades Testing of Water Page 8 of 8 Retaining Structures & Process Piping only with the prior, written approval of the Township. The Township may direct the Contractor to dechlorinate to a specified chlorine residual prior to discharge or limit the discharge rate. The Contractor is responsible for monitoring the discharge of wastewater to ensure that the chlorine residual and discharge limits are not exceeded, in the presence of the Consultant..6 Approved dechlorinating agents are as follows:.1 Hydrogen Peroxide.2 Sulphur Dioxide.3 Sodium Bisulphite.4 Sodium Metabisulphite.7 The Contractor shall notify the following authorities regarding the method to be used to discharge the flush water and obtain approval from the Consultant prior to discharging any chlorinated water:.1 For receiving waters, notify the MOE..2 For drainage ditches and storm sewers, notify the Township..8 The cost for discharging or flushing chlorinated water, including the supply of chemicals and temporary provisions as described herein and as required to complete the Work, shall be included in the lump sum Contract Price.

419 Redwood Estates Seismic Restraints Section WTP Upgrades Page 1 of 4 Part 1 - General 1.1 Shop Drawings and Product Data.1 Submit descriptive data and shop drawings in accordance with Section and Section Descriptive Data.1 Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and specific restraints detailing compliance with the specification..2 Detailed schedules of flexibly and rigidly mounted equipment, showing vibration isolators and seismic restraints by referencing numbered descriptive drawings..3 Shop Drawings.1 Submit fabrication details for equipment bases, including dimensions, structural member sizes, and support point locations..2 Provide all details of suspension and support for equipment hung from the ceiling..3 Where walls, floors, slabs, or supplementary steel work are used for seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, conduit, and pipe must be included and approved before the condition is accepted for installation. Restraint manufacturers' submittals must include spacing, static loads, and seismic loads at all attachment and support points..4 Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size, and locations for each piece of equipment.

420 Redwood Estates Seismic Restraints Section WTP Upgrades Page 2 of Design Requirements.1 The contractor shall retain a specialty consultant or equipment manufacturer to develop a seismic restraint system and perform seismic calculations in accordance with the Ontario Building Code and local codes and additional requirements specific in this section. Calculations, restraint selections, and installation details shall be done by a professional engineer experienced in seismic restraint design and installation and licensed in the Province of Ontario. Base seismic designs on a "Post Disaster Building"..2 The seismic restraint design, consisting of calculations, restraint selection, installation details, and other documentation, shall be submitted. This submittal shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer, as stated above..3 The seismic restraint design shall clearly indicate the attachment points to the building structure and all design forces (in X, Y, and Z direction) at the attachment points. The seismic restraint engineer shall coordinate all attachments with the building's structural engineer of record, who shall verify the attachment methods and the ability of the building structure to accept the loads imposed. The seismic restraint design shall be based on actual equipment data (dimensions, weight, center of gravity, etc.) obtained from submittals or the manufacturers. The equipment manufacturer shall verify that the attachment points on the equipment can accept the combination of seismic, weight, and other loads imposed.

421 Redwood Estates Seismic Restraints Section WTP Upgrades Page 3 of 4.4 Analysis should include calculated dead loads, static seismic loads, and capacity of materials utilized for the connection of the equipment or system to the structure. Analysis should detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment, and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices should be designed to accept, without failure, the forces through the equipment or system's center of gravity..5 All seismic restraints and combination isolator/restraints should have verification of their seismic capabilities. Manufacturers may verify their capabilities by testing that is witnessed by an independent professional engineer..6 Engineering Design Criteria.1 Design system in accordance with Ontario Building Code..2 Seismic design must be considered for machinery, equipment, ducts, tanks and pipes. Part 2 - Products N/A Part 3 - Execution 3.1 General Notes.1 All seismic restraint systems should be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and all certified submittal data..2 Installation of seismic restraints should not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork, resulting in stresses or misalignment.

422 Redwood Estates Seismic Restraints Section WTP Upgrades Page 4 of 4.3 No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure should be made that degrade the noise and vibration-isolation system specified..4 The contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, duct, or conduit that makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. "Building" includes, but is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs, and walls..5 Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building..6 Any conflicts with other trades that will result in rigid contact with equipment or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions should be brought to the engineer's attention prior to installation..7 Prior to installation, bring to the engineer's attention any discrepancies between the specifications and the field conditions or changes required due to specific equipment selection..8 Overstressing of the building structure should not occur because of overhead support of equipment. Contractor should submit loads to the structural engineer of record for approval. Generally, bracing may occur from:.1 flanges of structural beams,.2 upper truss cords in bar joist construction, and.3 concrete anchors.

423 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 1 of 20 Part 1 General 1.1 References (All references shall be the latest edition including all addenda).1 ANSI/ASME B31.1 Power Piping and B31.3 Process Piping..2 ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:.1 Section 1: Power Boilers..2 Section V: Nondestructive Examination..3 Section IX: Welding and Brazing Qualifications..4 Section XIII, Division 1: Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels..3 CSA W47.2, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Aluminum..4 CSA W48 series, Electrodes..5 CSA B51, Boiler, Pressure Vessel and Pressure Piping Code..6 CAN/CSA-W117.2, Safety in Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes..7 CSA W178.1, Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations..8 CSA W178.2, Certification of Welding Inspectors..9 CAN/CGSB-48, Spot Radiography of Welded Butt Joints in Ferrous Materials..10 AWS B3. 0, Welding Procedures and Performance Qualifications..11 AWS C1.1-66, Recommended Practices for Resistance Welding..12 AWS W1, Welding Inspection..13 Technical Standards and Safety Authority, Pressure Vessels Branch. (T.S.S.A.)..14 Ontario Boilers and Pressure Vessels Act..15 ASTM A53, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot- Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.

424 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 2 of CSA W47.1, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures..17 ASTM A193/A193M, Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service..18 ASTM A182, Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High- Temperature Service..19 ASTM A403, Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings..20 ASTM A312, Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes..21 AWWA C500, Metal Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service..22 AWWA C504, Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves..23 AWWA C508, Swing Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 in. to 24 in. NPS..24 AWWA C509, Resilient Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service..25 AWWA C510, Double Check Valve, Backflow Preventer Assembly..26 AWWA C511, Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention Assembly..27 AWWA C540, Power Actuating Devices for Valves and Sluice Gates..28 AWWA C550, Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants..29 AWWA C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints..20 AWWA C800, Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings.

425 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 3 of AWWA C540 Power Actuated Devices for Valves and Sluice Gates. 1.2 Welders Qualifications.1 Welding qualifications to be in accordance with CSA B51, T.S.S.A., B31.1 and Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code..2 Use qualified and licensed welders possessing certificate for each procedure to be performed from T.S.S.A..3 Furnish welder s qualifications to Engineer..4 Each welder to possess identification stamp issued by T.S.S.A..5 Certification of companies for fusion welding of aluminum to be in accordance with CSA W Inspectors Qualifications.1 Inspectors to be qualified to CSA W178.2, and T.S.S.A. 1.4 Welding Procedures.1 Registration of welding procedures in accordance with CSA B51 and T.S.S.A..2 Copy of welding procedures to be available for inspection at all times..3 Safety in welding, cutting and allied processes to be in accordance with CAN/CSA-W Shop Drawings.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section Process General Requirements and Section Submittals. Part 2 Products 2.1 General.1 All products for use in compressed air piping systems shall be registered by the Technical Standards and

426 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 4 of 20 Safety Authority, Pressure Vessels Branch, for use in a pressure piping system..2 All products shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.1, Power Piping" for compressed air system; and ASME B31.3 for other piping systems for "Normal Fluid Service"..3 Products shall be new, clean, and identifiable..4 Screwed couplings shall be full length. (Half coupling are not permitted, unless specifically called for on the drawings)..5 Mill test reports and material certifications shall be available for the Engineer's review, and shall be provided to the Engineer if requested..6 Reducing fittings used to join pipe or other components will be sized to have the heavier wall thickness..7 All butt welding elbows shall be long radius, unless otherwise specified on the drawings..8 Ball and plug valves on insulated lines will be supplied with extension stems to provide 50mm minimum clearance outside insulation..9 Dimensions and construction of various classes of piping components, ie: fittings, flanges and valves shall be in accordance with the appropriate ANSI, API or MSS standards listed below: All codes and standards shall be the latest edition. Industry Standards: ANSI-B16.34 Valves - Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End API-598 Valve Inspection and Test ANSI B16.10 Face -to-face and End-to-End Dimensions of Valves API607 Fire Test for Soft Seated Quarter Turn Valves MSS SP-25 Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and Unions ANSI B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

427 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 5 of 20 ANSI B16.10 Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Valves ANSI/ASME Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges - B16.20 Right Joint, Spiral-Wound and Jacketed ANSI/ASME Power Piping B31.1 ANSI/ASME Building Services Piping B Electrodes shall be in accordance with CSA W48 series. Select the appropriate electrode and filler for the piping being welded. Submit selections to Engineer as part of shop drawing submissions..11 All piping components including pipe, couplings, flanges, mechanical grooved couplings, nuts, bolts, supports, valves, valve actuators, etc., submerged in liquids and/or within 2 meters above the highest liquid level shall be stainless steel..12 All valves, gates, etc. installed on potable water piping shall be AWWA compliant and NSF certified and be suitable for potable water applications.

428 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 6 of Stainless Steel Piping (SA1) (Vent Line) ANSI RATING: Class 150 RF PIPING MATERIA LS: TP 304L Stainless Steel SERVICE LIMITS: C to 38 C C CORROSI ON ALLOWAN CE: 0.00mm ITEMS DIAMETER NOMINAL (DN) RATING ENDS TRIM DESCRIPTION TAG NO FROM TO PIPE S/10S BE ---- Electric fusion welded stainless steel, A312 TP304L, Joint Eff. =.80. Flange (Welded) FF SS, A182 Gr. F304L Fitting S/10S BE ---- Butt weld, SS. A403 Gr. WP 304L Bolting Alloy stud bolts, A193 Gr. B8 with heavy hex nuts A194 Gr Gasket Notes: 1 6mm (1/8 ) thick, full face, neoprene rubber or EPDM, punched holes to match class of flanges as required. 1AP NOTES: 1. Gaskets referenced are acceptable, as noted, for all fluids contained in SA1 piping.

429 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 7 of PVC Piping (PA7) ANSI RATING: Class 150 FF PIPING MATERIALS: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) SERVICE LIMITS: C to 21 C C CORROSION ALLOWANCE: 0.00mm ITEMS DIAMETER NOMINAL (DN) RATING ENDS TRIM DESCRIPTION TAG NO Ball Valve Note: 7,8 FROM 15 TO 100 Class 150 Socket PTFE PVC true union, PTFE seats, Viton seal 8FFCO Check Valve Note: # Socket PTFE PVC body, union body, Viton seals, ball type. 88FCO Pipe S/80 PE PVC ASTM D1785, PVC 1120 or 1220 to CSA B137.3 Flange Class 150 FF Fitting Note: 7 Bolting Gasket Note: 4 Instr. Conns. Socket PVC ASTM D2467, PVC 1120 or S/80 Socket PVC ASTM D2467, PVC 1120 or All Alloy stud bolts, A193 GR. B8 with heavy hex nuts A194 Gr All EPDM rubber, full face, punched holes, 6mm thick. 1AP Pressure: Flow: Piping Conn: NPS 20mm Socket Instr. Conn: NPS 20mm FNPT Bleed Valve: NPS 20mm Ball Valve, SW x THD. Block Valve: NPS 20mm Ball Valve, SW Piping Conn: NPS 15mm SW Instr. Conn: NPS 15mm FNPT Block Valve: NPS 15mm Ball Valve, SW x THD Temperature: Instr. Conn: NPS 25mm FNPT 8FFVO 8FFCO 8FFVO

430 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 8 of PVC Piping (PA7) Cont'd ANSI RATING: Class 150 RF PIPING MATERIALS: TP 304L Stainless Steel SERVICE LIMITS: C to 21 F C (Note:6) CORROSION ALLOWANCE: 0.00 ITEMS NOMINAL SIZES RATING ENDS TRIM DESCRIPTION TAG NO FROM TO NOTES: 1. For potable water service: CSA Seal of Approval is required. Mains shall be disinfected per Part 7, Ontario Building Code 2. Method of joining shall be by solvent cementing. Flush the piping to remove completely excess solvent cement prior to putting in service. 3. Installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's procedures. 4. Refer to Gasket List. 5. Where PVC piping passes through a fire rated wall or ceiling use fire stop device certified to CAN4-S115 and ULC listed. 6. Service limits indicate pressure ratings for pipe up to DN 100mm diameter, fittings up to DN 100mm diameter. 7. Use ball valves for vent and drain connections. 8. For control valves use DN50mm or DN38mm threaded ball valve as provided by ISI Controls (Tag No. XV-1A/B to XV-5A/B)).

431 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 9 of Valve List.1 Valves shall be as listed in the Valve List attached to the process specification. 2.5 Gasket List TAG NO. 1AP Description/Acceptable Material 6mm (1/8 ) thick, Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR or EPDM), full face, punched holes Standard of Acceptance: Garlock 8314 Rating PSI 125# 2.6 Pressure Gauges.1 Industrial pressure gauge, 112mm dia. face, reinforced thermal plastic case with pressure relieving back, stainless movement components, high temperature acrylic window, wetted parts to be 316 stainless steel, ANSI B40.1 Grade 2A ± 0.5% full scale accuracy, NPS ½ stem bottom mounting, liquid filled..2 All pressure gauges shall have a range of 0 to 1380KPa (0 to 200 PSIG)..3 Standard of Acceptance:.1 Pressure gauge: Winters Process..2 Diaphragm seals: Winters # Powered Actuators.1 Powered actuators shall be supplied with the associated mechanical equipment (i.e. valves, gates, etc.) and shall be in accordance with Section Powered Actuators. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Installation.1 Piping and piping components shall be installed, fabricated, assembled and tested in accordance with drawings, specification, the ASME/ANSI code B31.1, Power Piping for compressed air, ASME B31.3 (Normal Fluid Service) for other piping systems and the T.S.S.A., Boilers and Pressure Vessels Act. Potable

432 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 10 of 20 water shall be installed as per Part 7 of the Ontario Building Code..2 Piping and components shall be installed free of all foreign materials..3 Threaded connections which are not seal welded shall be made up using an approved thread sealant. Threaded connections which are seal welded (back welded) shall be made up dry. Sealants shall be as specified below: PTFE Tape - any screwed pipe joint (up to 260 C) PTFE Liquid or Paste - any screwed pipe joint (up to 260 C)..4 Bolt threads except Teflon-coated bolts and studs, shall be coated prior to assembly with an approved lead free thread compound..5 Heat tracing shall be installed by the Contractor in accordance with drawings and specifications..6 Vents and Drains.1 Valved process vents shall be provided at high points of pipelines and equipment. Equipment vents may be located in overhead piping, provided no valves or blinds are located between vent connections and vessels..2 Valved drains shall be provided at low points to empty pipe lines or equipment..3 Process vent, drain and sample connections shall be a minimum of DN 20mm size. For lines smaller than DN 20mm, vent, drain and sample connections are to be line size..4 Vents and drains shall consist of a branch connection with a nipple, a valve and a plug. Nipple length shall be equal to the insulation thickness plus three inches..5 Any additional vents or drains which may be required strictly for hydrostatic tests are not shown on the drawings. Contractor shall provide hydrostatic vents in welded pipe as required, which shall be plugged and backwelded after the test. Hydrostatic vents in nonwelded pipe shall be plugged. On insulated lines, the length of the plug will be sufficient to protrude through the

433 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 11 of 20 insulation. In the event a drain is installed for hydrotesting, it shall be provided with a valve which will be retained as a drain valve after the test..6 Process line vent, drain, and sample valves must be plugged, capped, or flanged, unless piped to receptacles..7 Drains emptying into open receptacles or floor drains shall terminate a minimum of 50mm above the receptacle and be visible from the drain valve..7 Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access for maintenance of equipment, valves and fittings..8 Connect equipment in accordance with manufacturer s instructions unless otherwise indicated..9 Cap open ends of piping during installation..10 Revisions to location of piping require approval of Engineer..11 Install piping, joints, fittings, valves and other items in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, except where there is conflict between Contract Documents and manufacturer's recommendations, in which case Engineer will decide..12 Become informed of installation requirements and dimensions of equipment required to be connected to piping. Where piping is to be connected to equipment, preliminary dimensions have been shown which are not warranteed and should be confirmed by Contractor prior to bidding. Contractor shall install and fabricate piping to suit equipment as selected..13 Contractor shall install all control devices for Division 44 work in the piping. Connection size and type to match requirements of equipment. Device locations to be as per control manufacturers directions or as indicated by Engineer..14 All piping components including pipe, couplings (flanges, mechanical grooved end couplings, bolting, nuts, etc.) supports, valves and valve actuators

434 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 12 of Fabrication submerged in liquids shall be stainless steel. Piping and piping components shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with ASME B31.1 for compressed air systems, and the T.S.S.A., Boiler and Pressure Vessels Act. Other piping systems shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with ASME B31.3 (for Normal Fluid Service) and manufacturer's recommendations..1 Welding.1 Welding procedures and welders shall be qualified in accordance with Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, CSA B51, and T.S.S.A. Boiler and Pressure Vessels Act..2 Welding procedures and welder qualifications shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval prior to start of fabrication. GMAW (MIG) welding using the short circuiting arc mode of transfer is limited to welds that will be backgouged and backwelded and to minor structural welds..3 All austenitic stainless steels, and nickel-based and other non-ferrous alloy piping shall be welded using the GTAW (TIG) weld process on the root pass with argon gas back purge..4 To ensure weld quality, GTAW (TIG) welding is recommended for the root pass of all carbon and low alloy steel piping less than or equal to 50mm nominal diameter. SMAW (stick) welding is acceptable only if the welder can demonstrate either through test pieces or radiography that he can produce satisfactory welds in small diameter pipe..5 Changes in size of threaded lines shall be made with reducing bushings, reducing couplings, reducing tees or swaged nipples..6 Preheating before welding shall be in accordance with the applicable section of the ASME/ANSI Code B31.1. Post weld heat treatment, when required by the ASME/ANSI B31.1 Code, shall be in accordance with the applicable section of the ASME/ANSI Code B31.1.

435 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 13 of 20.7 If threaded fittings are backwelded, each leg of the fillet shall be equal to or greater than the thickness of the female section..8 Piping shall be cleaned externally and internally to remove slag and other surface defects..9 Unless noted otherwise, all temporary lugs shall be the same material as the pipe. After removal, the surface shall be ground flush and smooth without reducing wall thickness..10 Branch connections using integrally reinforced fittings shall be such that the hole in the main line matches ID of the fitting..11 Backing rings are not allowed for any weld..12 All pipe welds shall be stenciled to identify the welder. Punch marks are not permitted..13 After fabrication, immerse all pipe assemblies in pickling solution in manufacturer's plant. Scrub and wash until discolourization and possible iron picked up form manufacturing process is removed..14 Field welds treated with pickling pasts, scrubbed and washed with stainless wire brushed until clean. Use stainless steel brushes..15 Completed pipe lines washed with steam or hot water to remove any dirt picked up during transport to construction site..16 During fabrication and installation, avoid contact of stainless steel pipe with structural steel, chain, wire-ropes, steel tools, cement, other building materials, etc. as the contamination of the stainless steel may lead to marks due to rusting or imbedded material..2 Flanges.1 Pressure rating and facing of all flanges DN 600mm and smaller shall be in accordance with ANSI B All flange bolt holes shall straddle the vertical centerline or the established north-south

436 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 14 of 20 centerline noted on the drawings, unless noted otherwise..3 Flange face shall be free from weld splatter, mars, and scratches..4 Slip-on flanges shall be continuously welded both inside and outside. The inside fillet weld shall be built up to the pipe wall thickness and shall conform to Fig B, Detail 1 of 2 of ASME/ANSI B31.3 (1989) Revision)..3 Pipe.1 Reinforcing pads shall be used only where called for in the specification or as required by B31.1. Material shall be the same as the pipe, unless otherwise approved. Refer to Branch Connections Section..2 All attachments to stress relieved piping shall be welded before stress relieving is performed. If welding is performed on stress relieved piping, local stress relieving is required per the applicable section of the ASME/ANSI Piping Code, B If at all possible, welds should not rest on pipe supports. If it is not possible, then welds which interfere with movement of lines on supports shall be ground flush..4 Root pass require full uniform penetration without weld shrinkage, porosity or incomplete penetration and provide uniform reinforcement smoothly blended into parent metal surfaces. After each pass, remove slag and flux from each by chipping before proceeding. Thoroughly clean complete bead or layer by chipping and wire brush using only stainless steel tools and brushes. Remove weld splatter from pipe ends and weld surfaces before laying down the next successive bead or layer. Grind away any cracks or blow holes that appear on the surface of any bead of welding before depositing the next successive bead. Finished welds shall have full penetration with no shrinkage or porosity.

437 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 15 of 20.4 Threaded Joints.1 In order to make tight screwed joints, the threads of pipe and fittings are to be cut with sharp dies and tools and wiped clean. The screwed joint is to be made up with a thread lubricant applied to the male thread. Approved compounds are: PTFE Tape - any screwed pipe joint (up to 260 C) PTFE Liquid or Paste - any screwed pipe joint (up to 260 C) Threaded connections which are to be backwelded shall be made up dry..5 Branch Connections.1 All lines which connect to another line or header, including instrument connections, vents and drains are considered branch connections. Reinforcement at branch connections shall meet: - Pressure/temperature limitations as stated at ANSI/ASME B31.1, Power Piping. - External loading determined by pipe stress analysis..2 All size-to-size branch connections shall be tees in all pressure classes..3 Reinforcement will be as shown in the Branch Connections Tables. When pad reinforcement is specified in the Tables, the minimum pad width shall be as shown below. The pad thickness shall be no less than the header wall thickness. Branch Size DN Pad Width mm When a line of lower pressure rating connects to a line of higher pressure rating, the higher pressure rating shall determine the piping up to and including the first shut-off valve in the line carrying the lower pressure rating..5 Vents, drains, instrument connections and short extensions subject to mechanical damage shall use olets.

438 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 16 of 20.6 Branch Connections Table I - For Stainless Steel Piping Symbols T - Tee X - Threaded or Socket Half Couplings *W - Integrally Reinforced Fittings (Weldolet) P - Reinforcing Pad * Integrally reinforced fittings for use on schedule 10S (or lighter) shall be light weight fittings. Notes: For size-to-size connections - use tees. For DN 20mm and smaller branches - use reinforcement. For DN 25mm and larger branches - use reinforcement, only if required; stub-in connections are permitted if branch connections have adequate strength in accordance with para Branch (across in Inches) by Header (Down in Inches) 1/2 T 1/2 3/ /4 T T 1 X X T 1.5 X X W T 2 X X W W T 3 X X W W P T 4 X X W W W P T 6 X X W W W W P T 8 X X W W W W W P T.6 Fabrication Tolerances The following dimensional tolerances for fabrication shall be adhered to and linear tolerance shall not be cumulative:.1 Length and other linear dimensions

439 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 17 of 20 ± 3.2mm dia. up to DN 250mm ± 4.8mm DN 300mm dia. to DN 600mm dia..2 Flattening a) Piping subject to internal pressure 8% of nominal pipe size b) Piping subject to external pressure 3% of nominal pipe size.3 Flange Face Alignment a) Flange to Flange 1.2mm per 300mm or 0.8mm Whichever is greater b) The plane across the gasket seating surface shall be perpendicular to the theoretical centerline of the pipe within: 1.2mm per 300mm or 0.8mm Whichever is greater.4 Bolt hole location deviation from centerline ± 1.6mm.5 In line pipe joint alignment: maximum permissible parallel misalignment ± 1.6mm.6 Placement of branch connection form indicated Same as Cleaning.1 The Contractor will internally clean and, if necessary, flush all piping to remove all large debris prior to turning over the systems to the Engineer. Following hydrostatic test and flushing contractor shall blow out piping using plant compressed air supply to remove all moisture and other debris. 3.4 Inspection And Tests.1 General.1 Perform examinations and test by specialist qualified in accordance with CSA W178.1 and CSA W178.2 and approved by Engineer. Personnel qualification shall be in accordance with SNT-TC- 1A, Recommended Practice for Non-Destructive

440 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 18 of 20 Testing Personnel Qualification and Certification. Contractor shall provide written verification of radiography technicians qualifications..2 To ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code, Section V, CSA B51 and requirements of T.S.S.A..3 Hydrostatically test all welds to requirements of ANSI/ASME B31.1 for compressed air, B31.3 for other piping and ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code. Where welds can not be hydrostatically tested, provide non destructive testing per ANSI/ASME B31.1, B31.3 and ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code..4 Defects causing rejection shall be determined as described in ANSI/ASME B31.1, B31.3 and ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code..5 Repair of welds which failed tests shall be reinspected and retested at Contractor s expense. If any welds fail radiograph tests, tests shall be extended to all welds made by the welder responsible and at the contractor s expense..6 Claims against Engineer for delays in completion of project will not be entertained for reasons of failures of welds to pass examinations..7 The Engineer shall have the right to select the welds to be radiographed, unless waived in writing..8 Formulate Inspection and Test Plan in cooperation with Engineer..9 Do not conceal welds until they have been inspected, tested and approved by the inspector..10 Contractor shall provide inspector and pay for all costs of testing and inspection..2 Inspections.1 All piping shall be subject to the visual examination requirements of the ASME/ANSI Code B31.1 and B31.3. A minimum sample of 5% of all welds shall be non-destructively examined as per requirements of ASME/ANSI B31.3 Normal Fluid

441 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 19 of 20 Service..2 Upon failure of a weld by visual examination, perform additional testing as directed by Owner of a total of up to 10% of all welds, selected at random by Engineer by radiographic test..3 All phases of shop and field pipe fabrication shall be subject to inspection by the Engineer. Dimensional accuracy shall be subject to check against the drawings and the tolerances specified in the specifications, or the drawings, whichever are more stringent. Responsibility for dimensional accuracy lies with the erection contractor..4 The Engineer may, at his expense, radiograph any weld. Repair of any faulty weld and subsequent radiography of any required weld shall be at contractor s expense..5 Failure of radiographic tests:.1 If any weld fails tests, tests shall be extended to all welds made by the welder responsible and at the cost of the contractor..6 Certifications and Records. The examiner shall be assured, by examination of certifications, records, and other evidence, that the materials and components are of the specified grades and that they have received required heat treatment, examination, and testing. The examiner shall provide the Inspector with a certification that all the quality control requirements of the Code and of the engineering design have been carried out. Radiograph films shall become the property of the Engineer upon completion..3 Testing All piping shall be hydrostatically pressure tested in the field after erection in accordance with the applicable ASME/ANSI Code B31.1 for compressed air piping, B31.3 for other piping and as modified by specification section , Field Pressure Testing of Piping.

442 Redwood Estates Process Piping Section WTP Upgrades Page 20 of Records.1 The records outlined below shall be kept by the Contractor/Vendor and be ready for correlation between test records and item tested and for Engineer s review (such as radiography of a weld)..1 Material Certification Reports.2 Mill Test Report(s).3 Welding Procedure(s).4 Welders Qualification Record(s).5 Hydrostatic or Pneumatic Test Record(s).6 Non-Destructive Examination Record(s).7 Heat Treatment Record(s) including charts showing time and temperature of heat treatment 3.6 Painting.1 Contractor shall clean and apply required coatings to all carbon steel and stainless steel piping and pipe supports in accordance with specification Section , Field Painting.

443 Redwood Estates WTP Upgrades Section Process Piping Valve List Page 1 of FFCO CLASS 150 SOCKET WELD BALL VALVE, PVC BODY, TRUE UNION, PTFE SEATS, VITON SEALS, NPS 1 AND SMALLER OVAL OR ROUND HANDLE OPERATED, NPS 1 1/2 AND LARGER LEVER OPERATED FFCO CLASS 150 SOCKET WELD BALL VALVE, PVC BODY, TRUE UNION, PTFE SEATS, VITON SEALS, NPS 1 AND SMALLER OVAL OR ROUND HANDLE OPERATED, NPS 1 1/2 AND LARGER LEVER OPERATED FCO CLASS 150 SOCKET WELD CHECK VALVE, BALL TYPE CHECK, PVC BODY AND BALL, UNION BODY, VITON SEALS NIBCO/CHEMTROL U45TB-V, OR SPEARS EQUIVALENT NIBCO/CHEMTROL S45TB-V, OR SPEARS EQUIVALENT NIBCO/CHEMTROL U45BC-V, OR SPEARS EQUIVALENT FCO CLASS 150 SOCKET WELD CHECK VALVE, BALL TYPE CHECK, PVC BODY AND BALL, UNION BODY, VITON SEALS FFAO CLASS 150 THREADED BALL VALVE, PVC BODY, TRUE UNION, PTFE SEATS, VITON SEALS, NPS 1 AND SMALLER OVAL OR ROUND HANDLE OPERATED, NPS 1 1/2 AND LARGER LEVER OPERATED FFVO CLASS 150 SOCKET WELD X THREADED 50 XV-1A/B to XV- 4A/B THREADED BALL VALVE, PVC BODY, TRUE UNION, PTFE SEATS, VITON SEALS, NPS 1 AND SMALLER OVAL OR ROUND HANDLE OPERATED, NPS 1 1/2 AND LARGER LEVER OPERATED. BALL VALVE, SS 316 BODY, BALL AND STEM, PTFE SEATS AND SEAL COMPLETE WITH ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR, 300 IN-LBS. TORQUE, FEMALE CONNECTION, LIMIT SWITCH, 115 VAC POWERED. 38 XV-5A/B THREADED BALL VALVE, SS 316 BODY, BALL AND STEM, PTFE SEATS AND SEAL COMPLETE WITH ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR, 300 IN-LBS. TORQUE, FEMALE CONNECTION, LIMIT SWITCH, 115 VAC POWERED. NIBCO/CHEMTROL S45BC-V, OR SPEARS EQUIVALENT NIBCO/CHEMTROL U45TB-V, OR SPEARS EQUIVALENT NIBCO/CHEMTROL U45TB-V, OR SPEARS EQUIVALENT APOLLO VALVE + VALVCON ACTUATOR SUPPLIED BY ISI CONTROLS APOLLO VALVE + VALVCON ACTUATOR SUPPLIED BY ISI CONTROLS

444

445 Redwood Estates Powered Actuators Section WTP Upgrades Page 1 of 6 Part 1 - General 1.1 Related Sections.1 Section Submittals.2 Division 26 Electrical.3 Section Process Piping 1.2 Submittals.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section Submittals..2 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section Submittals. Data to include:.1 Manufacturers name, type, model, capacity, and Serial number. 1.3 Description.2 Applicable operation and maintenance information as specified in section Provide calculations for sizing and actuator torque calculations..4 Submit a completed ISA S20.50 Instrument Specification sheet for each device..4 Installation certification form..5 Training Certification form..1 All powered actuators shall be supplied together with the mechanical equipment (i.e. valves, gates, etc.) by the mechanical equipment supplier under Division All sizing and selection of modulation and on/off control valve components shall be undertaken by the mechanical equipment supplier under Division 44.

446 Redwood Estates Powered Actuators Section WTP Upgrades Page 2 of 6.3 Sizing and matching of powered actuators to controlled devices shall be undertaken by the mechanical equipment supplier under Division 44 and coordinated with the work specified herein..4 Refer to the drawings and Valve Instrument Data sheets, attached to this section, for valve and actuator identification and specific information. Part 2 Products 2.1 General.1 The actuators shall be suitable for use on a nominal three-phase or single-phase, 60Hz power supply and are to incorporate motor, integral reversing starter, local control facilities, and terminals for remote control and indication connections. The actuator shall include a device capable of automatically correcting the phase relationship of a three-phase supply..2 Valves shall be capable of setting the torque level, position limits and configuration of the indication contacts without requiring the removal of any covers..3 Actuators shall be watertight to NEMA rating specified in the Instrumentation data sheets and shall have an inner watertight and dustproof 'O' ring seal between the terminal compartment and the internal electrical elements of the actuator fully protecting the motor and all other internal electrical elements of the actuator from ingress of moisture and dust when the terminal cover is removed on site for cabling..4 Actuators installed in explosion/hazardous areas shall be adequately certified and suitable for use in the rated area..5 All external fasteners shall be of stainless steel.

447 Redwood Estates Powered Actuators Section WTP Upgrades Page 3 of Electric Actuators, Open/Close Type and Modulating Type.1 The actuator shall be sized to guarantee valve closure at the specified differential pressure and with a 1.5x safety factor over the maximum required valve torque as specified by the valve manufacturer. Motor design shall ensure sufficient torque output in the event the supply voltage drops to 10% below nominal..2 The operating speed shall be such as to give valve closing and opening at approximately 250 to 300 mm per minute unless otherwise stated in the job specification..3 The actuator shall be capable of functioning in an ambient temperature ranging from -30 C to +70ºC, unless noted otherwise in the instrument data sheets attached..4 The electric motor shall be of a high torque, low inertia type, shall incorporate self re-setting thermostatic protection against overheating and be 15 minutes rated (minimum). The actuator shall deenergize the motor in the event of stall when attempting to unseat a jammed valve. Motors shall be equipped with Class H insulation..5 The actuator gearing must be totally enclosed, be of all metal construction and suitably lubricated without the use of special or exotic lubricants which may be difficult to source..6 A handwheel shall be provided for emergency (manual) operation and shall disengage the gear train by means of a declutching lever. Upon restoration of mains power the actuator will automatically re-engage the motor gear train. Handwheels must not rotate whilst the actuator is operating via the motor..7 The handwheel size and gearing must ensure the required rim pull does not exceed 360N.

448 Redwood Estates Powered Actuators Section WTP Upgrades Page 4 of 6.8 Torque sensing must be through electronic means and it shall be possible to easily adjust the actuator s overall output to 40% to 100% of its rated torque..9 A minimum of four latching contacts shall be provided for the selection of a normally closed (NC) or normally open (NO) contact forum. Contacts should maintain and update position indication if the actuator is manually operated without main power available..10 The contacts shall be rated at 5A at 120V AC and can be individually designated to signal conditions such as: Valve opening, closing or moving Thermostat tripped, lost phase Motor tripped on torque in mid travel, motor installed. Actuator alarm, valve alarm, control system alarm Remote selected Actuator being operated by handwheel.11 When requested in the instrument data sheets, the actuator must have a contactless transmitter to give a 4-20mA analog signal corresponding to valve position. The transmitter shall be auto ranging to the set actuator limits and be factory calibrated for 4-20mA (+/-1%)..12 The actuator display shall include a dedicated numeric/symbol digital position indicator displaying valve position from fully open to fully closed in 1% increments. Red, green, and yellow lights corresponding to open, closed, and intermediate valve positions shall be included on the actuator display when power is switched on. The digital display should be maintained and updated during handwheel operation when all power to the actuator is isolated..13 The digital display shall be capable of indicating real time torque output and valve position during actual operating conditions.

449 Redwood Estates Powered Actuators Section WTP Upgrades Page 5 of 6.14 The reversing starter, control transformer, and local controls shall be integral with the valve actuator, suitably housed to prevent breathing and condensation buildup. For On-Off service, the starter shall be an electromechanical type suitable for 60 starts per hour and of a rating appropriate to motor size..15 The integral transformer shall be fuse protected, have all necessary tappings and be adequately rated to provide power for the following functions: Energization of contactor coils 24VDC or 120 VAC output as indicated on the instrumentation data sheets for actuator remote circuits Supply all internal control circuits.16 For modulating applications, actuators shall use a nominal three-phase 60Hz power source and incorporate solid state starters for optimum lifetime performance..17 When specified in the instrumentation data sheets, the actuator shall include for proportional analog control via 4-20mA or VDC input and as well as provide a return analog signal back to the SCADA confirming valve position. It should be possible to configure this device such that the valve will stay put, open or close upon loss of analog control signal..18 Integral to the actuator shall be local controls for Open, Close, and Stop, and a Local/Remote selector switch pad lockable in any one of the following three positions: a) Local Control Only b) Stop (No Electrical Operation) c) Remote Control plus Local Stop Only. It shall be possible to select maintained or nonmaintained local control..19 The terminals shall be embedded in a terminal block of high tracking resistance compound. The terminal compartment shall be separated from the inner electrical components of the actuator by means of a watertight seal. The terminal compartment of the

450 Redwood Estates Powered Actuators Section WTP Upgrades Page 6 of Manufacturers actuator shall be provided with a minimum of three threaded cable entries. Each wire shall be clearly identified at each end. A durable terminal identification card showing plan of terminals shall be provided attached to the inside of the terminal box cover indicating: a) Serial Number b) External Voltage Values c) Wiring Diagram Number d) Terminal Layout This must be suitable for the contractor to inscribe cable core identification beside terminal numbers..1 Refer to the instrumentation data sheets for approved suppliers. Part 3 Execution 3.1 Preparation.1 Prior to installation of the valve, field measure and check all equipment locations, pipe alignments, and structural installations. Ensure that sufficient space and accessibility is available for pneumatic and electric actuators..2 Where conflicts are identified, inform the Engineer and initiate the necessary modifications at no cost to the owner. 3.2 Installation.1 Install actuators, related panels, and the interconnecting wiring as shown in the construction drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer.

451 Access Electric Actuator Valve Body Process/Fluid Data Gen M:\2015\ Redwood Estates WTP\3.0 Technical\3.8 Specifications\Spec\Division 44\ Instrument Data Sheet.xlsx INSTRUMENT DATA SHEET Instrument Type: Client: RedWood Estates POWERED ACTUATORS Location: South Glengarry Instrument Spec. Revision Tag Number Service Quantity Line Size (mm) Fluid Potable water Potable water Oper. Press Norm/Max (kpa) Oper. Temp Norm/Max ( C) Ambient Temperature Oper. Temp Oper. Temp Air Press Norm/Max (kpa) 1 1 Tag No. Type Valve Size and Rating Valve Material Shaft Material Seat Material Packing Material Process Connection CV Shut Offf Pressure (kpa) Type Duty Fail Position Enclosure Rating/Type Tag No. Power Requirement Input Signal Insulation Class Electrical Connection Limit Swithches Position Transmitter Local Controls Name Plate Connection Plug Mounting Bracket Manual Controls XV-1 A/B to 4 A/B Filter control 8 50 CBV 01 Ball 50 SS SS PTFE PTFE NPTF Electrical Actuator Isolating Last Position Nema 4X/Non-Intrusive XV-1 A/B to 4 A/B 208V AC 3Ø 120 VAC H Cable Gland Open/Close/Torque Yes Yes Yes Local/Off/Remote XV-5 A/B Filter control 2 38 CBV 02 Ball 40 SS SS PTFE PTFE NPTF Electrical Actuator Isolating Last Position Nema 4X/Non-Intrusive XV-5 A/B 208V AC 3Ø 120 VAC H Cable Gland Open/Close/Torque Yes Yes Yes Local/Off/Remote Approval/Enclosure Class/Division/Group Manufacturer Model Number Alternates CSA General CSA General Notes: 1. Vendor to supply Stainless Steel Tag with Instrument Tag Number clearly stamped on it. 2. Vendor is to fill in missing data in this specification sheet relevant to the device (i.e. model #) 3. Contractor is to supply mounting hardwate appropriate for the application. 4 Valve + actuator to be supplied by ISI Controls. No. Date By Chkd Appd Revision Sept

452

453 APPENDIX A PRESELECTED EQUIPMENT

454

455 Township of South Glengarry Lancaster, Ontario Redwood Estates WTP Greensand Filter Upgrade Proposal ISI Ref: Q9516 August 8, 2016 Revision 3

456 Table of Contents 1 Scope of Project Scope of Supply Bill of Materials Remote Communications Option High Lift Pumps VFD s Option Electrical Services Engineering & Site Services Clarifications and Exclusions Pricing Summary Remote Communications Option High Lift Pumps VFD s Option Terms and Conditions... 9

457 Township of South Glengarry Redwood Estates I.S.I Controls Inc. Lancaster, Ontario August 11, 2016 Shawn Killoran Director of Water/Wastewater Operations Township of South Glengarry Phone: Fax: Mr. Killoran, We are pleased to submit our proposal for engineering and services to upgrade your controls for the Redwood Estates WTP Greensand Filters. Our diverse expertise in control systems engineering, our accreditation from industry leaders as system integrators should comfort you in our ability to handle your project requirements. Our proposal is based on information gathered from site, information provided and our experience on similar type of projects. Our project team will provide you with the expertise and service necessary to complete your project successfully and on time. We thank you for considering ISI Controls and look forward to continuing a mutually beneficial relationship with Township of Glengarry. Yours very truly, I.S.I. CONTROLS INC. Shaun Cuggy Vice President Dean Hotton Business Development Manager Tel: (514) (613) Fax: (514) scuggy@isicontrols.com dhotton@isicontrols.com ISI Controls Inc. ISI Controls Inc chemin du Bois Franc Ottawa, Ontario Saint Laurent, Quebec H4S 1A7 3 ISI Ref: Q9516 Revision 3